Volusion Manual
For version
5.00.00 Last Revised: 7/24/07 Download Volusion Manual PDF file.
(right click > save as) PDF for version 5.00.00
PDF Last Revised: 8/06/07
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/8/6/2007 6:12:34 PM
Volusion Manual
Table Of Contents ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
1. Quick Start Guide 2. Knowledge Base 3. Installation 4. Using the Admin Area 5. Payment Collection 6. Shipping Calculation 7. Tax Calculation 8. Categories & Subcategories 9. Products & Inventory 10. Products Options 11. Vendors & Drop- Shipping 12. Placing Orders 13. Processing Orders 14. Configuration Variables 15. Text/Article Management 16. Newsletters 17. Discounts & Coupons 18. Gift Certificates & Store Credit 19. Affiliate System 20. Search Engine Optimization 21. B2B/Members-Only Site 22. Customizing Your Store 23. Analytics & Reporting 24. Importing/Exporting 25. Using the WYSIWYG 26. Quickedit Toolbar 27. Installing Live Chat
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/toc.php (1 of 2)8/6/2007 6:13:33 PM
Volusion Manual ● ● ● ●
28. Security 29. Updates & Upgrades 30. Hosting & Email 31. Shipping Resources
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/toc.php (2 of 2)8/6/2007 6:13:33 PM
Quick Start Guide - Volusion Manual
Step 1 Sign up for Volusion E-commerce 1. Choose the Volusion Solution that meets your needs. All monthly solutions come with all the features, free upgrades, free technical support, and premium Rackspace hosting. If you don't already have a domain name, you will need to purchase one prior to making your purchase. If you have any questions about this process please feel free to contact our sales staff at 1-800-646-3517 2. Sign up for an SSL certificate, this can be done at the time of purchase or at a later time when you are ready to go live.Once your order is placed, you should receive two emails. You first email will simply be an order confirmation. Once our developers had completed setting up your site on the servers the second email with login information and passwords usually within 24 hours. Learn more
Step 2 Set up your merchant account/gateway Sign up for the merchant account of your choice. We recommend choosing a merchant account that uses a major gateway like Authorize.net, so that you will be able to take full advantage of the all the features available: authorize, capture, credit, and void directly from the Volusion Order Screen. In addition if you choose Authorize.net you can also choose to accept e-checks. (Click here for more information or to sign up) After you've been approved for a gateway account you will then choose your gateway from the drop down menu and enter in your login and password within the Settings —> Quicksetup section of the admin. To select which payment options you want to accept you will then go to the Settings —> Payment section of the admin.Learn more
Step 3 Create Categories The first part of setting up your store is adding Categories to place your products in. To add a new category: click on Inventory -> Categories then click the blue ADD button on the top menu bar. A page will load with the form used to add a new category. There are only three fields required to add a new category. Each one is labeled with bold text to the left of the field. Parent ID designates where the category actually resides. If you are trying to create a
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=1 (1 of 6)8/6/2007 6:13:34 PM
Quick Start Guide - Volusion Manual
main category that is displayed on the Navigation Menu then you would select [0] MAIN CATEGORY from the drop down menu. If you were trying to create a sub-category, then you would select the category you wanted it to be under from the drop down. Category Name determines what is actually displayed in the link for the category. Category Visible determines which navigation menu the category is actually displayed in.Learn more.
Step 4 Load Products After you have created the categories for your store you can begin adding products. To add a product: click on Inventory —> Products in the admin area. From the products page then click on the blue ADD button in the top menu bar. The product page has several fields that allow you to customize the information used for items in your store but only three are actually required. Again these required fields are labeled with bold text. The product code field is used to for the identification code for the product. This can be a number designated by a manufacturer or vendor or something that you create on your own. The Product Price is used for the actual price displayed on the product page and how much the customer is charged. The Product Name field allows you to specify the name the product is listed under. Even though it is not required it is normally a good idea to fill out Product Category(s) so the products will be listed when the customer selects a category. In this field you would enter the id number for the category you want to have the product listed under. The id numbers for each category can be found in the Inventory —> Categories section. Learn more
Step 5 Importing If you have hundreds of products, then adding them each manually through the admin area can be quite time consuming. An easier way to add several products is through Volusion"s import feature. To import products click on the link Inventory —> Import-Export in the admin area. From there you will be given the option to do either a data import or a data export. We highly recommend doing a data export before importing to get the correct format for the store database. Also when doing the export we recommend not including any of the fields listed under virtual columns since they can cause issues with the import. Once you have a file with all of your product information in CSV (comma separated value) format you can click on the link for Data Import. From the import screen you would select Products from the table drop down and specify the file you want to use in the File Name field. For Overwriting Existing Data you should set it to replace any existing data with new data unless you want to completely remove all of the products you currently have in your store. Once you have entered all of the required information you can click on the Upload my files button to transfer http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=1 (2 of 6)8/6/2007 6:13:34 PM
Quick Start Guide - Volusion Manual
the data into your store. If you are using a demo and would like to use the import feature, then please ask us to open the import feature. Learn more
Step 6 Customizing Your Store Volusion's software is completely customizable and gives you full HTML and ftp access. You can choose to use one of our free templates, create your own design, have Volusion design a custom site for you or integrate Volusion software into an existing website. In addition you have access within the admin section to change colors site wide on a real time basis. Learn more.
Step 7 Shipping, Tax & Email Accounts
Shipping Volusion software comes loaded with real time shipping rates and advanced options like drop shipping automation. You will want to select the carrier(s) of your choice within in the Settings —> Shipping section of the admin area. Learn more
Tax Click on Settings —> Tax in the admin area. Generally in the United States you only charge tax on an order if your warehouse is in the same state as the customer's ShipTo address, but you will need to check with your local taxing authority to be sure. The default setting assumes you wish to collect tax for California residents only, at 8.35%. We strongly suggest that you edit / verify all tax rates in the system tax tables to reflect those states and the proper tax rates in which you are responsible for tax collection. You may modify/add states as you wish. Learn more
Setting Up Email Accounts 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Go to http://cp.volusion.com. Login to the control panel. Select the domain from the Choose your domain drop down list. Select Email from the Choose your section drop down list, click GO. Click Settings -> Email Accounts.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=1 (3 of 6)8/6/2007 6:13:34 PM
Quick Start Guide - Volusion Manual
6. In the Email Accounts box, click Add User, add the email account user information. 7. Enter and then confirm your password. 8. Click Save. Click here to learn more.
Step 8 SEO, PPC & Built-in Marketing Tools
SEO (Search engine optimization) SEO is a relatively new field of internet specialization and an especially effective tool for making a site more easily found by search engines. You'll be hearing a lot about this one if you haven't already. It is really important in making your online business successful. For this reason, we have built in some of the absolute best SEO features of any software on the market. The software automatically creates dynamic SEO friendly pages, dynamic site maps, has completely customizable Meta Tag fields and plenty of spots for your keywords. (Please note that if you are using a demo, the SEO tools are disabled.) Learn more Volusion SEO SERVICES Volusion SEO Specialists understand how to maximize your store's search engine power and do so legitimately, using cutting-edge SEO techniques that have proven to be effective. Since no one knows our software better than we do, we are uniquely capable of optimizing your e-commerce store. Let Volusion do the work for you! Learn more
PPC (Pay per click advertising) As part of a balanced marketing plan, you will need to run online advertising to help others find your site. Everyday millions of people use search engines to find new products and services and everyday sales are made due to these searches. We recommend using the 2 largest online advertising services to run your advertising campaigns: http://www.google.com/ ads/ and http://www.overture.com/
Volusion PPC SERVICES Let FastTraffic promote your business in the exact spot your future customers are looking. FastTraffic is a full service pay per click advertising program. Using years of experience, research and analysis in search engine marketing, the FastTraffic team makes certain that the ads created are doing what they should be doing — leading traffic to your website. We’ll http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=1 (4 of 6)8/6/2007 6:13:34 PM
Quick Start Guide - Volusion Manual
get the traffic to your website, you finalize the sale! It’s that easy. Let Volusion do the work for you! Learn more
Built in Marketing Tools Volusion has a lot of great built in marketing tools such as: affiliate programs, email marketing, ability to send out coupons, use of gift certificates, ability to set customer discount levels, email a friend, etc. Learn more
Step 9 Place & Process Orders
Placing Orders There are several options available for placing orders other than just from the storefront. You will be able to place phone orders from one screen or set up a point of sale system that works with a credit card swipe/ wand and printer within a physical store location. Learn more
Processing Orders Each time an order is placed, you and the customer will receive a notification via e-mail at the address you specified. Next, you will click Orders —> Orders of the admin area. From here you will follow a 5-step process: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Lock Order Collect Payments Print Invoice / Packing Slips Ship Items / Add Tracking Numbers Complete Order / Send Emails
Learn more
Step 10 Analytics & Reporting The Volusion E-commerce Software has several features available for tracking the statistics of your site including: Top Customers, Top Affiliates, Total Sales, Total Tax, Most Visited Categories, Most Visited Products, Top Selling Products, etc. You will also have access to
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=1 (5 of 6)8/6/2007 6:13:34 PM
Quick Start Guide - Volusion Manual
your website statistics (page views, hits, referrers, etc.), ROI tracking for PPC ad campaigns and the ability to add 3rd party statistics. In addition you are always able to export any financial data, down to even the most minute order details. Learn more
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=1 (6 of 6)8/6/2007 6:13:34 PM
Knowledge Base - Volusion Manual
Knowledge Base Navigate to Customers —> Knowledge Base from the home page of your admin area. The knowledge base (KB) is a place to store all of your company's information that's necessary to answer questions that your customers might ask. Some examples of things to store are: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Frequently Asked Questions & Answers How-To Guides / Training Manuals Employee Handbook Standard Operating Procedures
Extended Company Policies / Internal Policies
The main benefit is that it's a completely searchable database of information (knowledge) for both your internal company staff, as well as your customers via this public KB search page: http://www.yourdomain.com/kb_results.asp (you'll want to create a new link on your storefront so your customer's can find this page if you choose to use it) The KB search engine searches the title, body, and keywords of every KB entry. You can also upload multiple attachments to any KB article, allowing you to upload related documents and files to the information. For example PDF files, images, zip files, word documents, excel spreadsheets, anything relevant to the topic.
How to edit a KB article: To edit an article, simply click on the KB ID # located on the very left side of the appropriate KB article. This will open the KB article for editing.
How to link directly to a KB article: The syntax for linking to any article directly is: /kb.asp?id=123 http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=2 (1 of 2)8/6/2007 6:13:35 PM
Knowledge Base - Volusion Manual
where 123 is the KB ID. A complete HTML example of a hyperlink would be: <a href="/kb.asp?id=123">Your Link Here</a>
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=2 (2 of 2)8/6/2007 6:13:35 PM
Installation - Volusion Manual
Installation If you are hosting your store with Volusion or a certified partner, you may skip this installation step because a Volusion e-Commerce representative will install your software for you. If you are hosting Volusion e-Commerce on your own server, these instructions are for you. When installing Volusion e-Commerce, you should already have your Windows 2003 web server configured with at least a default website. Once you have your default website up and running, you can simply transfer your Volusion e-Commerce files into your websites directory.
Transferring Files Use the Volusion e-Commerce Auto-Installation page to install your store using either of the following two ways: â&#x2014;? â&#x2014;?
Send the files directly to your website via FTP. Generate a customized zip file. Extract the zip file to a directory on your computer (i.e., "C:VolusioneCommerce"). Upload the contents of the zip file (i.e., "C: VolusioneCommerce") to your website via FTP.
Note: You may upload your files to your root directory or any other directory, such as "yourdomain.com/store". Just make sure you specify the directory when generating your files on the Volusion e-Commerce Auto-Installation page.
Required Components In addition to your standard Windows 2000 or Windows 2003 Server installation, you must install the following add-on components. Company
Component
Cost
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=3 (1 of 5)8/6/2007 6:13:36 PM
Description
Installation - Volusion Manual
Microsoft
* XML 4.0
$0.00
Free upgrade to Windows Server 2000 / 2003. (NOTE: XML 4.0 SP2 is NOT supported.)
Persits
*AspEmail 5.0
$0.00
One of the most popular e-mail components. Required for sending emails from your store.
Volusion
* Licensing DLL
$0.00
Licensing DLLrequired to run Volusion e-Commerce software.
$0.00
One of the most popular e-mail components. Required only for the ability of the Newsletter system to handle bounced e-mail.
$69.95
The most popular image component, used to create thumbnails of the photos you upload via the admin area. Not necessary if you create thumbnails on your computer prior to uploading them. http://www.serverobjects.com/ products.htm#aspimage
Dimac
ServerObjects
* W3 Jmail 4.0
*ASPImage
How to get these components: Contact support@volusion.com to request all free components. They are only "free" to Volusion e-Commerce licensed version owners. You must purchase the ServerObjects AspImage component directly from ServerObjects via the link above. * Required for basic store functionality. * Optional, but HIGHLY recommended. Provides essential features that enhance the overall ease of use & functionality. To test for the existence of all required components, visit the following page of your store: http://www.yourdomain.com/admin/Server_Tests.asp After installing all of the components, you may have to reboot the server before being able to utilize the components.
Setting Permissions Once you have your Volusion e-Commerce files uploaded to your website, proceed through the following steps: Set the correct permissions on your directories (usually this must be done by your hosting company). Give the "IUSR_machinename" account "Read/Write/Modify" permissions to the
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=3 (2 of 5)8/6/2007 6:13:36 PM
Installation - Volusion Manual
following directories and/or files: Directory/File
When R/W/M permissions will be necessary
/photos
For uploading photos via the admin area
/logs
For storing log files
/dataport
For storing imported/exported files
/css
For allowing customization of colors in the admin area
/jmenu
For dynamic JavaScript menu system
/temp
For temporary files to be written
/downloadables
For uploading software files via the admin area
/customer-downloads
For allowing the customer to download software files
/templates
For uploading "branding" images via the admin area
/header.asp
For applying Design Templates to your store
/footer.asp
For applying Design Templates to your store
... OR you could just set the permissions to your entire directory, to avoid setting individual permission for each folder above.
An easier, but less secure, option is to give "Read/Write/Modify" permission to your entire store directory. Also, if you are using an Access database, give your database directory "Read/Write" permissions. Most hosting providers already have a specific directory set up for you to utilize, for example "/data".
Troubleshooting Installation The following scenarios may help you solve installation issues:
I cannot access the website after copying all the files into my website directory. 1. Make sure you can access any static page in your website, besides store files. For example, try going to "www.yourcompany.com/test.html" to verify that you can access files in that directory. NOTE: You must create a "test.html" or similar file. 2. Open up the Microsoft Access database on the server. 3. Open up the "ConfigSetup" table and check the following variables: â?? Config_DomainName â?? Config_FullSecureStoreURL http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=3 (3 of 5)8/6/2007 6:13:36 PM
Installation - Volusion Manual ❍ ❍
Config_FullStoreURL Config_StoreFolderName
NOTES: ● ● ●
The URLs above must all have the same domain name or IP address. Be sure to include the forward-slashes where indicated above. FullSecureStoreURL should only contain "https://" AFTER you've installed a SSL certificate for your website.
I get a "Permission Denied" error. Make sure you've setup the permissions as defined above in the "Setting Permissions" section.
I get a "Disallowed Parent Path" error. You must enable parent paths on your Windows server. In IIS, right-click your website and choose PROPERTIES. Then click the HOME DIRECTORY tab. Then click the CONFIGURATION button. Then click the OPTIONS tab. Then make sure "Enable parent paths" is selected. While you're here, also make sure "Enable session state" and "Enable buffering" are also selected.
I get a "Server.CreateObject Failed" error This means that you've not completely installed at least one of the required components. Please contact your server administrator to ensure that all components have been installed successfully.
I'm getting an error with the XML test on the "/admin/ServerTests.asp" page. 1. This means that you've installed MSXML 4.0 SP2, which must be uninstalled and reverted back to SP1. To do this, please follow these steps: 2. Uninstall all copies of MSXML that you've installed. 3. Search all hard drives for "msxml4.dll". 4. Delete this .dll file. NOTE: You'll have to stop IIS first, otherwise windows will not let you delete this file, often found in "C:WINNTsystem32" or "C:WINDOWSsystem32". 5. Reboot the server. http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=3 (4 of 5)8/6/2007 6:13:36 PM
Installation - Volusion Manual
6. Go ahead and install MSXML 4.0 SP1, then reboot the server again. NOTE: To verify which version of XML you have installed, you can search all hard drives for "msxml4.dll" and mouse over it, which will cause a pop-up box to appear that will specify either SP1 or SP2 in the description.
I'm getting an HTTP 405 error... See the following article on adding an extension for ".htm" to your IIS: http://www.somacon. com/docs/iis_http_405_resource_not_allowed_error.html
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=3 (5 of 5)8/6/2007 6:13:36 PM
Using the Admin Area - Volusion Manual
Using the admin area Accessing the Admin Area To manage your store you will need to login to your admin area which is located at "www.yourcompany.com/admin". Basically, just go to your domain name and add the "/admin" to the address bar in your browser. Once you go to that URL, you'll be prompted to login with your e-mail address and password. After logging in, you will be taken to the home page of your admin area where, you may begin managing your store.
Screen Size: It is recommended that you have your screen size set to 1024 x 768 or higher resolution when using the admin area. This allows you to view more data onscreen at one time without scrolling. To view/change your screen size, minimize your windows, right-click on your desktop and choose "Properties". A "Display Properties" window will pop up. On this window, click on the "Settings" tab. This is where you may change your screen resolution.
Navigating the Admin Area From the home page of the admin area, you will be able to navigate to all the various sections by clicking on the relevant links. For example, if you're working with products (adding/editing products), you'll find most of the links you need right there under the "Inventory" heading. Once you click into a section (such as "Products"), you will be taken to the products table page, which by default lists all records for that table. In this example, since we've clicked on "Products", the products table page would list all products.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=4 (1 of 9)8/6/2007 6:13:38 PM
Using the Admin Area - Volusion Manual
Using the "Table Viewer" Whenever you browse through the records of your table, you're most likely going to be using the "Table Viewer" page. This page allows you to browse through 25 (up to 500) records at a time, giving you the option of editing each record by simply clicking on the first field listed on the left side of the record. Clicking on that link will take you to the "Record Editor" page, where you may edit the existing record, add a new record or search your table based on any fields.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=4 (2 of 9)8/6/2007 6:13:38 PM
Using the Admin Area - Volusion Manual
The light blue tabs at the top-left of the "Table Viewer" each provide the following functionality: ● ● ● ●
SEARCH: Allows you to search the table by any field or multiple fields. EDIT: Allows you to edit a single record. ADD: Allows you to add a new record. VIEW ALL: Displays all records in that table, X at a time (i.e., 50 at a time, with next and previous page buttons).
There are often tan/peach-colored tabs in the top-right of the "Table Viewer" as well. These tabs take you to a new table or view of records. This is basically just a quick way to navigate to a related table.
Editing Records in the "Table Viewer": An easy way to edit your products (after you've added them) is to access the "Table Viewer". First click the "(edit)" link at the top of the column you wish to edit. This will make the entire column editable. Now you may change the data as you see fit, then scroll down to the bottom of the page and click the SAVE CHANGES button to save the changes you've made to the page.
When editing fields in the TableViewer, please note how many columns you have in view that are editable, and how many records you're showing per page. If you have 10 columns editable, and 500 records showing per page, this means there are 5,000 form fields of information that must be passed to the server when you click Save Changes... however there is a limit within your browser that does not allow this. Therefore we recommend that if you need to edit 10 columns at one time, first set your Rows Per Page to less than 50.
Modules Within the "Table Viewer": CUSTOMIZE THIS VIEW - This module allows you to show or hide any columns of the table. For example, if you're looking at the "View All Products" page and wish to show the column "SalePrice", do the following: http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=4 (3 of 9)8/6/2007 6:13:38 PM
Using the Admin Area - Volusion Manual
1. On the right side above the Product List, click "Customize This View" 2. In the fourth column, choose the "SalePrice" by clicking on the check box 3. Now hit the "Apply Preferences" button. The selected column should now be showing on this page. PLEASE NOTE: Not all columns can be shown on this page; some tables / columns cannot be displayed in the "Table Viewer"; as they may only be displayed for individual records.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=4 (4 of 9)8/6/2007 6:13:38 PM
Using the Admin Area - Volusion Manual
BULK DATA UPDATE - This module allows you to build SQL statements to update thousands of records in your table quickly. For example, if you want to hide all products with manufacturer "SONY", you could utilize this module to run a quick bulk data update on your table. This feature is very dangerous to use because it has the ability to erase or change data in your ENTIRE TABLE with a single click. Therefore, before using this tool it is HIGHLY RECOMMENDED that you first export all of your records for the table you're working with. To export data, please refer to the "Import/Export" section of this manual.
Note: Be careful what you do with this tool, as a simple mistake can change/erase tons of data.
QUICK EDIT WINDOW â&#x20AC;&#x201C; This feature allows you to view a single record without leaving the table viewer. Selecting the downward arrow in the middle of the bar (where applicable) will bring up a new panel which will show you the details of a single record.
Using the QueryBank: 1. The QueryBank (at the top of the "Table Viewer" in the light yellow section) is used to remember common searches that you might run. For example, if you do a SEARCH of the Products table every day to pull up a set of 50 products for whatever reason, normally you'd go to the SEARCH page, type in your search parameters and hit search. Now with the QueryBank, you only have to run your search ONE TIME. After performing the search, just type the following into the QueryBank: 2. A name for your new Query (such as "My XYZ Search"). 3. Leave the "Global" check box checked if you'd like for ANY administrator to be able to view and run this query. Otherwise, uncheck it if you only want this query to be displayed for YOUR admin account. For example, if you're the accountant, you might want a bunch of queries that are only useful to you, and therefore you don't want to waste space on other administrator's screens. 4. Lastly, just click the "add" button right next to this to add the new query. The new query will then show up at the top of the "Table Viewer" inside this small QueryBank section. So to run the query anytime, just click on the query ("My XYZ Search" link, for example)
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=4 (5 of 9)8/6/2007 6:13:38 PM
Using the Admin Area - Volusion Manual
Export to QueryBank: The "Export to QueryBank" feature on the right side of the screen above the list of records is used to quickly export the results currently displayed-to an Excel spreadsheet, for example. This saves the current search query to the QueryBank, which is integrated into the "Import/Export" system. This is also referred to as "SAVED EXPORTS", which you may read more about in the "Import/Export" section of this manual.
Using the "Record Editor" Whenever you arrive at a page that allows you to edit a single record, you'll be using the "Record Editor" page. This page can be used to do three things: SEARCH, EDIT or ADD records. It is important to realize which mode you're in by looking at the top of the screen to see which of these tabs is selected.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=4 (6 of 9)8/6/2007 6:13:38 PM
Using the Admin Area - Volusion Manual
SEARCH http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=4 (7 of 9)8/6/2007 6:13:38 PM
Using the Admin Area - Volusion Manual
To search for a product for example, you would first go to the "Table Viewer" by clicking on "View All Products" from the home page of the admin area. Next you would click the "SEARCH" tab at the top of the page. That will bring you to the "Record Editor" in SEARCH mode. When in SEARCH mode, you can type in any criteria you wish to search for, then scroll down and click the "Search" button, and it will perform the search and display the results in the "Table Viewer".
EDIT To edit a product, you would first go to the "Table Viewer" by clicking on "View All Products" from the home page of the admin area. Next, you would click on whatever is the very first field on the left side of the record you wish to edit. The first field on the left is always a click able link that takes you to the "Record Editor" in EDIT mode. So from this page you can now edit this single record. After changing the data on this page, you will then scroll down to the bottom of the page and you'll see a "SAVE CHANGES" button plus two radio buttons below it. The radio buttons are: ● ●
Save + View Record - This radio button means that after the changes are saved, you'd like to stay on this page, viewing this record. Save + View List - This radio button means that after the changes are saved, you'd like to return to the Table Viewer.
ADD To add a product, you would first go to the "Table Viewer" by clicking on "View All Products" from the home page of the admin area. Next you would click the "ADD" tab. Next you would begin filling in all the fields necessary. You will then scroll down to the bottom of the page, and you'll see an "ADD NEW RECORD" button plus three radio buttons below it. The radio buttons are: ● ●
●
Add + View Record in edit mode - This radio button means that after the changes are saved, you'd like to stay on this page, viewing this record in edit mode. Add + View Record in add mode - This radio button means that after the changes are saved, you'd like to stay on this page, viewing this record in add mode, with all the fields pre-filled with the same data as the previously added product. Therefore, if you're going to be adding many products with lots of the same information, this makes it VERY EASY to keep adding products quickly without having to re-type the same information over and over. Add + View List - This radio button means that after the record is added, you'd like to return to the "Table Viewer".
Helpful note: An easy way to duplicate a product, or add a new product with many of the same attributes of an existing product, is to do the following: 1. Go to "View All Products". 2. Click to edit the similar existing product. 3. Now click the "ADD" tab at the top of the page. This will take you to "ADD" mode with all of the fields pre-filled with the same information as the existing product. This idea works for any table/record, not only products.
"QuickEdit Toolbar" For more information on the QuickEdit Toolbar, please see the section in the Volusion Manual on the QuickEdit Toolbar. QuickEdit Toolbar http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=4 (8 of 9)8/6/2007 6:13:38 PM
Using the Admin Area - Volusion Manual
Configuration Variables Throughout this documentation, as well as throughout your admin area you'll run across references to configuration variables, commonly called "config variables". Anytime you see a word beginning with "Config_" this is a config variable. For example "Config_EnableCoupons", "Config_WebsiteTitle". A configuration variable makes changes that are relevant to the entire store, but they are broken up in different sections throughout the Administration section. Confirguation Variables that alter a certain section of the software will be found within the same section. For example, if you wanted to look at configuration variables that alter the products section, you would go to the product table (Go to the “Inventory” tab and then select “Products”) and select “Product settings.” Any variable that does not deal with a specific section can be found under the “Settings” tab, within the section labeled “Config variables.” Specific information on each variable can be found by selecting the box with a question mark inside.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=4 (9 of 9)8/6/2007 6:13:38 PM
Payment Collection - Volusion Manual
Payment Collection Payment Methods Navigate to Settings -> Payment in the home page of your admin area. The Payment Methods table contains all the available payment methods you currently accept. To activate/enable a payment method, check the PaymentMethod Active check box or leave it blank to disable it.
Note: DO NOT DELETE PAYMENT METHODS. If you delete an existing payment method, you will NOT be able to re-enter it.
Additional payment methods may be added if needed. All the payment methods are listed in the Payment Method drop down list on the one-page-checkout page during customer checkout. There are currently three payment method types, which trigger form fields to appear during the checkout process: 1. Credit Card - Triggers (1) Credit Card Number, (2) Expiration Date, (3) Name on Card, (4) CVV2 2. Electronic Check - Triggers (1) Checking Account Type, (2) Check Number, (3) Routing Number, (4) Account Number, (5) MICR 3. Purchase Order Number - Triggers (1) Purchase Order Number The following configuration variables also allow for flexibility on the above form fields:
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=5 (1 of 6)8/6/2007 6:13:40 PM
Payment Collection - Volusion Manual
Config Variable
Description
Example Value
Enable_Payments_CVV2
Enable collection of CVV2 (Credit Card Security Code)
Y
EnableCreditCardValidation
Enable validation of credit card numbers. Tests for valid number sequence, does not send to gateway for funds verification.
Y
Enable_Payments_CheckingAccountType
Enable collection of Checking Account Type.
Y
Enable_Payments_CheckNumber
Enable collection of Check Number.
Y
Enable_Payments_MICR
Enable collection of MICR from electronic checks.
Y
The following Payment Method types require that you edit an associated article: For example, if you enable the Check By Mail payment method, You'll need to: 1. Navigate to Webmaster -> Website Text, from the home page of the admin area 2. Scroll down to the Order Finished section of the page, according to the chart below PaymentMethodType
Article WebPage
Article SpotKey
Cash
OrderFinished.asp
Cash_Instructions
Check by Mail
OrderFinished.asp
CheckByMail_Instructions
Money Order
OrderFinished.asp
MoneyOrder_Instructions
PayPal
OrderFinished.asp
PayPal_Instructions
Purchase Order Number
OrderFinished.asp
PurchaseOrder_Instructions
Wire Transfer
OrderFinished.asp
WireTransfer_Instructions
Very Helpful Hint: When searching this long page for an article, press CTRL+F on your keyboard (OR, in your browser, go to EDIT -> FIND) which will open the find dialog box. This let's you search the page and QUICKLY find anything you're looking for. For example, in this case you happen to know the SpotKey according to the chart above, so type in CheckByMail_Instructions and click the Find Next button. It will take you down to the appropriate section of the page, and you can continue clicking the Find Next button to find multiple occurrences of text on the page. This functionality is actually a feature of your browser, not the software. Therefore, you can use this on any page of any website. If you're looking for an article where you do not know the SpotKey, you can always search for any word that you happened to know currently exists in the article. For example, if you see a paragraph on your website front-end that you want to change, and not sure where to go to change it, try going to Webmaster -> Website Text page of your admin area, and use this FIND dialog box to search for a word. For example, let's say the paragraph you see on your front-end is: As soon as your order ships, we will notify you via e-mail. You can also track your packages, review your orders, print invoices, and more... Choose a word or phrase that is somewhat unique. In the above example, you could choose the phrase order ships as an example. In the Webmaster -> Website Text page, type order ships into the find dialog box, you will quickly find the article you're looking to edit.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=5 (2 of 6)8/6/2007 6:13:40 PM
Payment Collection - Volusion Manual
PayPal To enable PayPal as an available payment option for your customers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Establish a new PayPal account using this link (It's FREE!): https://www.paypal.com/mrb/pal=RLBPZS2DJBXTC Click Settings -> Payment Method from the home page of your administration area Click on the Payment Method ID to edit the PayPal payment method Enter the Primary email address for your PayPal Account in the PaymentMethod_SpecialValue1 field Check the PaymentMethodActive field to enable it, click Save Changes
Note: PayPal is different than a normal merchant account in the fact that the customer is sent to PayPal's website to make his/her payment, whereas with a merchant account the customer NEVER leaves your website to submit payment. Also the PayPal does not require that the customer finish payment, as a customer can choose to abandon even after they are redirected.
After the order is placed, it creates the order in Volusion and then once the customer completes the order on PayPal, a notification is sent to your Volusion Order. In order for this to occur, the primary email address on your PayPal account must be entered as noted in Step 4 above in the setup on Volusion.
Google Checkout To setup Google Checkout go to: ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Go to http://checkout.google.com/ and register. Login to Google checkout and go to integration, Check the check box for “Shopping cart post security”. In the API Callback URL text box enter: HTTPS://WWW.YourDomainName.COM/net/WebService_Google_Checkout.aspx Collect your Merchant ID and Merchant Key. Login to the admin of the Volusion store and go to Settings > Payment > and select “click here to configure Google checkout.” Paste in Merchant ID and Merchant Key. Setup Google Shipping Rates by selecting “Add” and filling out all of the required fields.
When the customer places a order through Google Checkout a order record will be created as the customer is taken to the Google site to complete the order. Once they complete the order, Google will send all of the relevant order information to the order within the Volusion store, populating the order. If the order is not completed in Google Checkout, the order’s information will not be filled out. Any payment transactions that are made need to be done only through Google Checkout. Once the payment transaction is complete, Google will automatically update the order in the Volusion admin.
Setting Up Your Merchant Account & Gateway http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=5 (3 of 6)8/6/2007 6:13:40 PM
Payment Collection - Volusion Manual
Your store communicates with a payment gateway, such as Authorize.net for example, and the gateway communicates with your merchant account bank. Therefore your store software only needs to know the connection settings for your gateway. Navigate to Settings â&#x20AC;&#x201D;> QuickSetup in the home page of your admin area . Scroll down to the Payment section where you may: 1. Choose your Credit Card Gateway Name from the dropdown menu 2. Fill in the required fields Click the instructions link on the bottom right side of the credit card gateway name drop down list. You will find instructions on How to test your credit card gateway transactions as well as the Transaction types Supported for your gateway.
TESTING YOUR GATEWAY: Make sure to test your credit card gateway settings to ensure the configuration is working. Following are the steps to test your gateway settings:
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=5 (4 of 6)8/6/2007 6:13:40 PM
Payment Collection - Volusion Manual
1. We recommend that you first contact your gateway to ensure your account is NOT in test mode. 2. Navigate to Settings â&#x20AC;&#x201D;> QuickSetup from the home page of your admin area. Choose the option I'll do everything at shipping as the Authorization Mode. This way the credit card will not be charged until you click the Receive payment button in the order detail page, after the order has been placed 3. Next, place a test order on your website for the cheapest product you sell - a $1.00 product would be great 4. During checkout, we recommend using a real credit card 5. After placing the order, login to your admin area. Navigate to Orders -> Orders, click on the OrderID of the order you just placed 6. In the green colored Payment Log section of this page, click on the Receive button to attempt to charge the credit card. If the charge goes through successfully, it will show in the Payment Log here as DEBIT with all of the related transaction numbers. If the charge does NOT go through, it will show in the Payment Log as DECLINED, which means you did not receive any funds from the card. When a card is declined, you'll see the complete details of why it was declined with an error message displayed at the top of the page 7. If you get an error message at this point, you should double-check the gateway settings in the QuickSetup page. If you need assistance from our support department at this point, please COPY THE COMPLETE ERROR DETAILS that are shown when you try to charge the credit card, and send those details in an e-mail to support@volusion.com to our support department for assistance
ECHECKS: You'll also notice some fields on this QuickSetup page for an eCheck gateway, which is only valid if you've signed up for electronic check acceptance with your merchant service. This is always a separate service. eCheck gateways allow you to accept check information online and receive funds online without requiring the customer to mail you the check for deposit.
LINKPOINT GATEWAY SPECIFIC VARIABLES: If you're using the LinkPoint gateway, there are some additional configuration variables to check.
NOTE: All configuration variables are preceded with "Config_", although for space-saving purposes, they've been omitted from the display below. Config Variable
Description
Example Value
Credit Card Gateway PaymentGateway_CreditCards_LinkPoint_Host
LinkPoint Host - The http address of the linkpoint servers.
PaymentGateway_CreditCards_LinkPoint_KeyFile
LinkPoint KeyFile - If you've installed your PEM file in C:LinkPoint123456.pem (where 123456 is your storeID), leave this variable blank.
PaymentGateway_CreditCards_LinkPoint_KeyPath
LinkPoint KeyPath - If you've installed your PEM file in C:LinkPoint123456.pem (where 123456 is your storeID), leave this variable blank.
PaymentGateway_CreditCards_LinkPoint_Port
LinkPoint Port (provided in your welcome e-mail from LinkPoint).
Electronic Check Gateway PaymentGateway_Checks_LinkPoint_Host
LinkPoint Host
PaymentGateway_Checks_LinkPoint_KeyFile
LinkPoint KeyFile - If you've installed your PEM file in C:LinkPoint123456.pem (where 123456 is your storeID), leave this variable blank.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=5 (5 of 6)8/6/2007 6:13:40 PM
123456
Payment Collection - Volusion Manual
PaymentGateway_Checks_LinkPoint_KeyPath
LinkPoint KeyPath - If you've installed your PEM file in C:LinkPoint123456.pem (where 123456 is your storeID), leave this variable blank.
PaymentGateway_Checks_LinkPoint_Port
LinkPoint Port (provided in your welcome e-mail from LinkPoint).
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=5 (6 of 6)8/6/2007 6:13:40 PM
123456
Shipping Calculation - Volusion Manual
Shipping Calculation Click Here to view our Training Video covering the Shipping and Tax sections
Shipping Methods Navigate to Store Settings â&#x20AC;&#x201D;> Shipping, from the home page of your admin area. The Shipping table contains all of the available shipping methods you support. You may configure the current list of shipping methods by setting the Active field to Y to enable the shipping method or N to disable it.
Note: DO NOT DELETE SHIPPING METHODS. Simply disable them by removing the check mark next to Active field or changing Y to N on the View All page. In-Store pickup will always appear when logged in as an administrator even if the method is not active. It will only appear for your customers if the method is active.
You may add additional shipping methods if needed. The shipping methods will be listed in the drop down list of available shipping choices for the customer.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=6 (1 of 12)8/6/2007 6:13:41 PM
Shipping Calculation - Volusion Manual
When editing shipping methods, you may change the Shipping Method Name fields, but DO NOT change the Shipping Method field, which is used by the LIVE shipping calculation system. Available Shipping Calculation Systems:
LIVE This calculation system works by direct communication with shipping companies, including UPS, FedEx, USPS and DHL, to give the customer an accurate shipping rate based on the total weight of the order, as well as the customer's shipping address. You may modify the Shipping Method Name field for each record. For example, by default the UPS Ground shipping method is titled UPS Ground. However, you may rename this Shipping Method Name to Regular Ground Shipping if you'd prefer. Just remember that may you NOT change the Shipping Method field. UPS and USPS require you to register with them in order to use our Live Shipping Rate Lookup feature. There are no costs involved. To register with these http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=6 (2 of 12)8/6/2007 6:13:41 PM
Shipping Calculation - Volusion Manual
companies: 1. Navigate to Settings —> Shipping, from the home page of your admin area 2. Click on the Set & Test Shipping Rates tab 3. Click on the link, Click here to register with UPS / USPS / FEDEX / DHL / CANADA POST . This page displays instructions to follow in order to register with these shipping companies
Note: All LIVE rates are the same rates you would get by going to the shipping company's website (such as UPS.com) and getting a rate quote. If you have negotiated with UPS for a lower rate than normal, this LIVE connection CANNOT get your specific rates, as the shipping company's interfaces do not allow for this. However, we do offer ways to adjust these live rates.
Note: You should not set both the FreeShippingQualifyPrice (in the Setup & Test Rates) and the MinOrderPrice (in the Shipping Method section). The system will use the higher of those two fields, something you most likely will not want to occur.
For example, if you get 5% off the normal rates, you can use the variable Config_ExtraShippingCostPercent and set it to -5 to adjust all LIVE rates down by 5%. Also, please be aware that the other fields on this Setup & Test Shipping Rates page are important factors that influence the rates, such as the pickup type of Daily Pickup vs. One-Time Pickup.
Dimensional Packaging: Dimensional Packaging is only supported by UPS, DHL, FedEx, and USPS. This feature allows you to take into account the package size of the product you are shipping. 1. Navigate to Inventory > Products > Select the product you wish to edit. 2. Go to the section called “shipping options,” and put a check next to “Ships by Itself.” 3. Fill out the package type length, width, and height. Select “save changes.”
FedEx-Specific Notes: The variable EnableShippingRates_Residential toggles between two different shipping methods offered by FedEx: ● ●
FedEx Home Delivery FedEx Ground
If the variable EnableShippingRates_Residential is enabled, you cannot offer FedEx Ground. If the variable is disabled, you cannot offer FedEx Home Delivery.
Note: FedEx Ground is only a service to business addresses, whereas Fedex Home Delivery is the name of the same service to residential addresses. http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=6 (3 of 12)8/6/2007 6:13:41 PM
Shipping Calculation - Volusion Manual
The price varies slightly.
If a LIVE shipping company's web service is unavailable at anytime for any reason, your store will revert to using the Backup BaseRate and CostPerPound fields of the shipping method, which normally have no affect on the LIVE calculation. For example, if USPS doesn't respond with any LIVE rates, and the BaseRate for the shipping method is $10.00 and the CostPerPound is $2.00, the shipping rate for a 5 pound order would be $20.00 (BaseRate * CostPerPound). Please ensure you have set up your Backup BaseRate and CostPerPound fields for any shipping method you are using. The system has default rates for most methods, however you will need to ensure that these are the rates you wish to use as your backup to your Live Rates.
UPS-Specific Notes: You can use UPS’s large package rates, and additional handling fees with the live rate system. 1. Go to Inventory > Products > Select the product you wish to edit. 2. Go to the section called “shipping options,” 3. You will see the check boxes for “Large packages,” and “Additional Handling Indicator.”
BACKUP This calculation system is very flexible. You can incorporate a combination of rules to determine pricing, such as rules based on Order Price Value, Ship To Location, Product Weight, etc. You can read more about ByOrderPrice and Apply To Locations later in this tutorial. Let's begin by discussing the BaseRate and CostPerPound values which apply only to this BACKUP system. The BACKUP system uses the following fields in particular: ● ●
BaseRate - A flat fee for the shipment. For example, $10.00 CostPerPound - A fee multiplied by the weight of the order. For example $2.00.
Using the above parameters, the shipping rate for a 5 pound order would be $20.00 (BaseRate * CostPerPound) For example, if you would want to offer 3 shipping choices for your customers, you will only need to create three shipping methods as follows: Shipping Method
BaseRate
CostPerPound
Ground
$10.00
$2.00
2nd Day
$20.00
$2.75
Next Day
$37.00
$3.50
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=6 (4 of 12)8/6/2007 6:13:41 PM
Shipping Calculation - Volusion Manual
STEP 1: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Create a new shipping method (or change an existing method) with the following values: Set the System to BACKUP Set the ShippingMethodID to any unique number such as 1001 Set the ShippingMethodName to Ground Enable the ShippingMethodActive check box Enable the Apply To All check box Set the BaseRate to $10.00, set the CostPerPound to $2.00
STEP 2: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Create a new shipping method (or change an existing method) with the following values: Set the System to BACKUP Set the ShippingMethodID to any unique number such as 1002 Set the ShippingMethodName to 2nd Day Enable the ShippingMethodActive check box Enable the Apply To All check box Set the BaseRate to $20.00, and the CostPerPound to $2.75
STEP 3: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Create a new shipping method (or change an existing method) with the following values: Set the System to BACKUP Set the ShippingMethodID to any unique number such as 1003 Set the ShippingMethodName to Next Day Enable the ShippingMethodActive checkbox Enable the Apply To All checkbox. Set the BaseRate to $37.00, and the CostPerPound to $3.50
Free This system is triggered whenever an order qualifies for FREE SHIPPING.
An order qualifies for free shipping if: 1. The product(s) which you which to have Free Shipping for must have weight values assigned to them. If a product does not have a weight value assigned to it, no shipping calculations are done by the system 2. the item/ProductCode itself must be marked as a "Free Shipping Item." If this box is not checked, the system will not give "Free Shipping" as a shipping choice, even when other qualifications are met 3. Your "Free Shipping" Method must be set to Active, and it must apply to the State/Country where the customer would have the item shipped to. You can find this method in the admin part of your store by clicking on Settings, then Shipping and then ensure there is a check mark under "Shipping Method Active" column. http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=6 (5 of 12)8/6/2007 6:13:41 PM
Shipping Calculation - Volusion Manual
4. You have to enter a value greater than 0 in the "FreeShippingQualifyPrice" field. This field is under Settings, then Shipping, then click on "Setup & Test Rates". Also, depending on whatever you set this value to, the total order cost of items in the cart must meet or exceed this price value. In that situation, any item(s) in the cart that are marked as "Free Shipping Items" will not be included when calculating shipping costs of items that are not marked as Free Shipping Items. When free shipping is activated, it adds an additional shipping option to the drop down list for the customer to choose from. It does NOT replace the faster shipping methods. Therefore if the customer wants to choose a faster shipping method such as FedEx Overnight, they are still charged for shipping. You may only have one record in your Shipping Methods table that is assigned to the Free system, which by default is: ID
Shipping Method Name
500
Free Shipping (7 Day Ground)
Note: All of the products (in an order) must be marked as FREE SHIPPING ITEMS for that Shipping Option to appear and as well as meet the other qualifications. Also note that you can not split shipping methods among the products.
Download This system is triggered whenever an order's total weight is ZERO. This can be used for software sales which are distributed to the customer via digital download. Cost is always $0. You may only have one record in your Shipping Methods table that is assigned to the Download system, which by default is: ID 501
Shipping Method Name NONE
Pickup This system is used by your store's Point-Of-Sale System. Cost is always $0. You may only have one record in your Shipping Methods table that is assigned to the Pickup system, which by default is: ID 502
Shipping Method Name In-Store Pickup
Note: The In-Store Pickup method ALWAYS shows up if you are logged in as an Administrator, regardless of whether or not this shipping method is enabled in your system. This is not viewed by the customers unless you explicitly enable this as a Shipping option. http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=6 (6 of 12)8/6/2007 6:13:41 PM
Shipping Calculation - Volusion Manual
Calculating By Order Price Value: The following example explains how to set up shipping rates based on the subtotal value of the order. For example, if you want to offer 3 shipping choices based on the following order subtotal values, you will need to create three shipping methods as follows: Min Order Price
Max Order Price
Shipping Charge
$0
$50
$10.00
$50.01
$100
$25.00
$100.01
$40.00
STEP 1: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Create a new shipping method(or change an existing method) with the following values: Set the System to BACKUP Set the ShippingMethodID to an unique number such as 1004 Set the ShippingMethodName to Standard Shipping Enable the ShippingMethodActive checkbox Enable the Apply To All checkbox Set the MinOrderPrice to $0.00, and the MaxOrderPrice to $50.00 Set the BaseRate to $10.00
STEP 2: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Create a new shipping method(or change an existing method) with the following values: Set the System to BACKUP Set the ShippingMethodID to an unique number such as 1004 Set the ShippingMethodName to Standard Shipping Enable the ShippingMethodActive checkbox Enable the Apply To All checkbox Set the MinOrderPrice to $50.01, and the MaxOrderPrice to $100.00 Set the BaseRate to $25.00
STEP 3: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Create a new shipping method(or change an existing method) with the following values: Set the System to BACKUP Set the ShippingMethodID to an unique number such as 1004 Set the ShippingMethodName to Standard Shipping Enable the ShippingMethodActive checkbox Enable the Apply To All checkbox Set the MinOrderPrice to $100.01, and leave the MaxOrderPrice field as blank Set the BaseRate to $40.00
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=6 (7 of 12)8/6/2007 6:13:41 PM
Shipping Calculation - Volusion Manual
As you will notice above, we named all 3 methods with the same name Standard Shipping. You can repeat the steps again to create another set of 3 methods all named Rush Delivery 2nd Day for example, and the BaseRate set to a higher price for each method of course.
Applying Shipping Rates to certain locations: To setup different shipping methods for each location, you will be utilizing the following fields of the Shipping Methods table: Apply To All
This field means the shipping method is applied to ALL locations
Apply To Entire Countries
Click on Click To Edit to view the list of Countries. Select a Country(s) and click Add
Apply To States / Provinces
Click on Click To Edit to view the list of States. Select a State(s) and click Add
DO NOT Apply To Entire Countries
Click on Click To Edit to view the list of Countries. Select a Country(s) and click Add
DO NOT Apply To States / Provinces
Click on Click To Edit to view the list of States. Select a State(s) and click Add
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=6 (8 of 12)8/6/2007 6:13:41 PM
Shipping Calculation - Volusion Manual
The following example explains how to setup shipping rates based on the the location of the customer
Country
Apply To Entire Countries
ApplyToAll
United States Continental
N
United States - Alaska & Hawaii
N
Canada
N
Other Countries
Y
Apply To States / Provinces
DO NOT Apply To States / Provinces
DO NOT Apply To Entire Countries
234
2,11 2,11
37 234,34
Note: Make sure NOT to contradict the ApplyTo side or the DoNotApplyTo side with itself.
For example, the following combinations are INCORRECT and will cause problems: The reason is because 234 is United States, and 2,11 is Alaska and Hawaii. But if you apply a shipping method to 234 United States then that already applies it to Alaska and Hawaii automatically. Therefore, you do not need to put 2,11 in http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=6 (9 of 12)8/6/2007 6:13:41 PM
Shipping Calculation - Volusion Manual
the apply to.
Apply To Entire Countries 234
DO NOT Apply To Entire Countries
Apply To States / Provinces
DO NOT Apply To States / Provinces
2,11 234
2,11
Troubleshooting Live Shipping Rates If the shipping rates returned by the system are incorrect, follow the steps below to test the shipping rates: 1. Navigate to Settings —> Shipping, click on Setup & Test Rates tab 2. Scroll down to the Test Results section, click Save Changes. This will calculate the shipping rates and reload the page 3. Scroll down to the Test Results section again, where you should now see a tan colored box with the FROM and TO addresses. Verify both the From: and To: addresses
Note: Make sure to verify that the state code is spelled correctly.
For example, CA or California. If California is used, you will need to verify that California is in your States table. To verify this, go to Settings -> States, to view the list of all registered State names and State codes. You can add additional States for other countries as well, by clicking the ADD tab at the top of the page.
Extra Shipping / Handling Cost To add an additional cost to all shipping rates, modify the configuration variable Config_ExtraShippingCost. For example, $5.00 will be added to all shipping choices (except shipping choices which are $0). You may also specify an additional weight to be added to each order. To do this, modify the value of the Config_ExtraShippingWeight variable. For example, if catalogs are shipped with each order and they weigh 5 pounds each. Set the above variable to 5, to add 5 pounds to each order's shipping calculation. Insurance Cost/Delivery Confirmation You can enable “Insurance Cost” by placing a check box next to “Insure all packages,” and then select the delivery confirmation type on the drop down menu underneath. http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=6 (10 of 12)8/6/2007 6:13:41 PM
Shipping Calculation - Volusion Manual
Multiple Warehouses Having multiple warehouses allows you to calculate extra shipping cost based on the warehouse the product is being shipped from. If a customer orders a series of products that come from different warehouses, the shipping rates will alter to get the most accurate shipping rate possible. The Volusion software selects which warehouse to use based on the most efficient shipping schedule, which generally means the warehouse that is closest to the customer who ordered a product off of your site.
How to setup a warehouse: 1. Navigate to Inventory > Warehouses and select “Add.” 2. Fill out the warehouse_name, Country, State or province, and postal code. 3. Then save the changes.
How to assign warehouses to your products: 1. Navigate to Inventory —> Products from the home page of the admin area, click an individual product to edit 2. Under the “Shipping Options” section you should see a WarehouseID section which will include a list of warehouses once you select “Click to edit.” Then choose which warehouse(s) apply to the product. Note: To use this warehouse feature, you must enable the configuration variable Config_EnableWarehouses.
Optimizing the Drop-Ship Shipping Calculation Using the following recommendations will ensure the most accurate shipping calculation for companies that have drop-ship suppliers distributed across the United States. Set your store's ORIGIN shipping location to Billings, MT 59107 1. Navigate to Settings —> Shipping, from the home page of your admin area, click on the Set & Test Shipping Rates tab 2. In the Your Origin - For Shipping Rate Calculation section, fill in Billings, MT 59107 3. Click Save Changes Note: This is the ideal origin because it is the most equal distance from everyone in the United States. The majority of the United States population is on the either the far west coast near California, or the east cost, or the southern states. See the following US Census Map of Population distribution in the US (April 1, 2000 to July 1, 2005) http://www.census.gov/popest/counties/CO-EST2005-01.html Billings is a city located in the southern center of Montana(MT) state. Since we are using a location in MT state, here is a drilldown map of the population distribution within the state of Montana: http://nris.state.mt.us/gis/gisdatalib/downloads/ dens2000.gif http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=6 (11 of 12)8/6/2007 6:13:41 PM
Shipping Calculation - Volusion Manual
We also recommend to change your ExtraShippingCost_Percentage to 15 to add a minimal 15% extra cost to all calculations. This is due to the fact that choosing MT puts your origin closer to most locations.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=6 (12 of 12)8/6/2007 6:13:41 PM
Tax Calculation - Volusion Manual
Click Here to view our Training Video covering the Shipping and Tax sections
Tax Collection Navigate to Settings â&#x20AC;&#x201D;> Tax Generally, in the United States, you only charge tax on an order if your warehouse is in the same state as the customer's ShipTo address. The default setting assumes you wish to collect tax for California residents only, at 8.3%. You may modify/add states accordingly -- in fact, we suggest that when setting up your system that you review each state's tax rates so that they reflect your company's tax collection obligations.
Setting up Tax by Customers You may allow certain customers to be tax exempt by editing the PaysStateTax field in the Customer record. For example, a customer who is buying for a non-profit organization / educational organization / government group / reseller
Setting up Tax by Product By default all products are taxable. However, You may also set a product(s) as tax exempt by setting the Taxable Productfield of the product to N. For example, a product such as the Standard American Flag, is not allowed to charge tax on it.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=7 (1 of 2)8/6/2007 6:13:42 PM
Tax Calculation - Volusion Manual
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=7 (2 of 2)8/6/2007 6:13:42 PM
Categories & Subcategories - Volusion Manual
Click Here to view our Training Video covering the Categories section
Categories & Subcategories Categories and subcategories can be displayed in many unique ways. The purpose of categories is to help the customer find the products they want quickly and efficiently by categorizing your products into various categories and subcategories. You can also assign a single product to multiple categories. Navigate to Inventory —> Categories, to ADD categories
PARENT/CHILD RELATIONSHIP: The category system works with a parent/child relationship:
Each main category has a ParentID of 0 Each sub-category has a ParentID defined as the CategoryID of the parent category The following example explains how to create a main category Footwear, and sub-categories for Footwear:
● ● ● ●
In the above example, Sandals, Shoes and Boots are the first set of sub categories. Each of these should have the ParentID defined as 35 Sandals does not have any further sub categories The next set of sub categories are Cross-Training, Walking,Running, Basketball and Tennis. These should have the ParentID defined as 39 The next set of sub-categories are Suede and Leather. These should have the ParentID defined as 36
Edit mode/Drag and Drop mode When you first go to the category table viewer you will see the full category tree of your store. You will be able to see your main categories, with the associated subcategories listed underneath. If you are visiting this page for the first time you will automatically be in “edit mode.” You will be able to change the name of your category or view the record details of the category to make specific changes. http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=8 (1 of 7)8/6/2007 6:13:45 PM
Categories & Subcategories - Volusion Manual
If you select “Drag and Drop mode,” you will be able to move the categories around with your mouse cursor. This will allow you to quick change sub categories to other main categories, or to move main categories under a different navigation menu.
Easy mode If you switch to easy mode you will see a list of your main categories. Easy mode only allows you to quickly change the names of your main categories. It will not allow you to show sub-categories, and you can only add new categories that are selected to be on the first navigation menu. Note: If you wish you view your categories in the same fashion as the regular table viewer, you can select “view all,” while in Edit/Drag and Drop mode.
CATEGORY VISIBLE: The Category Visible drop down list has multiple purposes: 1. It can be set to Hidden to temporarily disable the category 2. It may define where a main category will be displayed 3. It may define the style/layout of how a category is displayed Value
Displayed on...
1st Nav Menu
Main website navigation menu
2nd Nav Menu
Second navigation menu, usually titled Quick Links by default
3rd Nav Menu
Additional support for more navigation menus. (Not supported in most templates)
4th Nav Menu
Additional support for more navigation menus. (Not supported in most templates)
5th Nav Menu
Additional support for more navigation menus. (Not supported in most templates)
6th Nav Menu
Additional support for more navigation menus. (Not supported in most templates)
7th Nav Menu
Additional support for more navigation menus. (Not supported in most templates)
8th Nav Menu
Additional support for more navigation menus. (Not supported in most templates)
Photo Gallery
(Hidden) To link to a photo gallery, you must have a link on your website which follows the format /SearchResults.asp?Cat=17, whereas 17 is the category of your photo gallery. A photo gallery is not for the purpose of selling products, but only for displaying photos with descriptions
CUSTOMIZING CATEGORY DISPLAYS: Each of your categories may be displayed in a unique way. The sub categories page layout can be changed through the two SubCategory DisplayMode fields. The display of the products can be changed through the following mentioned Display_... and SHOW... fields. You may add custom text on each category page through the Category Description field. Here are the list of fields and their descriptions: Field
Description
Product Display Mode
Defines how the products are laid out on the page. For example, in the standard single rows or in a grid
Category Description SHORT
Short description used in SubCategory DisplayMode 2, Thumbnails displaymode only
Category Description
Description of this category displayed near top of page.
SubCategory DisplayMode1
Defines how the first subcategory listing is displayed. Either at the top of the category page or on the left side of the category page.
SubCategory DisplayMode2
Defines how the second subcategory listing is displayed. This optionally appears in the center of the page with optional use of subcategory graphics
Display Columns
Number of columns of products to display
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=8 (2 of 7)8/6/2007 6:13:45 PM
Categories & Subcategories - Volusion Manual
Display Rows
Number of rows of products to display
Display Featured ProductsOnly
Setting this field to Y hides the next and previous buttons. This is useful for encouraging the customer to click a subcategory
List Price - Show it?
Shows the list price of products
Sale Price - Show it?
Shows the sale price of products
You Save - Show it?
Shows the You Save: $ amount of products
Stock Status - Show it?
Shows the stock status of products
Availability - Show it?
Shows the availability of products
Description SHORT - Show it?
Shows the short description of products
Description - Show it?
Shows the description of products
CATEGORY GRAPHICS: You can also customize your categories by using custom graphics for each of your categories. You can upload these custom graphics via the Upload New Images. You can upload two different graphics for each category. To upload a new graphics file: 1. Click on the Upload New Images link on the upper left-hand corner of the category's EDIT tab page 2. Click on the browse button and locate the file on your computer, click on the file to select it, click OK 3. Click the Upload my Images button, and your image will show up under the existing images section on the upload page. The upload page will automatically rename the graphic file as follows, but will not resize the photo: Graphic Name
Example
Description
(CategoryID).jpg
35.jpg
A large graphic displayed at the top of your category display page
(CategoryID)-T.jpg
35-T.jpg
A small graphic used on the parent category's display page for the listing of subcategories in SubCategory DisplayMode 2
CATEGORY ORDER: The Category Order field allows you to specify the order in which a category will appear when it is listed with other categories. If you do not specify an order, or if two categories are assigned the same CategoryOrder value, the default order is alphabetical. Lesser numbers will be displayed before greater numbers. The order of the navigation menu by default is listed in alphabetical order. If you wish to use a manual order, you must do the following: ● ● ●
Click Inventory —> Categories Click the View All tab. Enter any number in the Category Order field for each category to define the order in which the categories will be displayed on the navigation menu. Lower numbers will be displayed before greater numbers.
Customizing the visual display (EXAMPLE #1)
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=8 (3 of 7)8/6/2007 6:13:45 PM
Categories & Subcategories - Volusion Manual
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=8 (4 of 7)8/6/2007 6:13:45 PM
Categories & Subcategories - Volusion Manual
SubCategory DisplayMode1
Category SubCategory DisplayMode 2 Graphic
A display of all the subcategories. Go to the EDIT category page and set the field SubCategory
Product Display Mode
DisplayMode 1 to Top, Left Side or None (Hide).
A display of all the subcategories. You may have An
Category image Description used to
This area displays all of the products in this Related Fields: category. Be aware that if a category has
brand Text to the describe category assigned to this category PLUS any products this SubCategory with a Categories Top Left Displaymode1 assigned to any subcategories. category custom and a look & DataName DataValue general Related Fields: feel. To Config_Colors_Lines_LightExample CCCCCC Example overview of Table FieldName upload Value1 Value2 Config_Colors_BackgroundLight BEDFFF the type of this Product Config_Colors_BackgroundNeutral EEEEEE items found Single Categories Display Grid graphic, Rows in this Mode go to category. Related Graphics: the You may SearchResults_SubCat_Angle.gif Related Graphics: EDIT also use Bullet_SubCategory.gif buttons/btn_go_gray.gif category HTML in Config_Colors_Lines_Light buttons/btn_nextpage.gif page this field to Config_Colors_BackgroundLight buttons/btn_nextpage.gif and add any Config_Colors_BackgroundNeutral Bullet_MoreInfo.gif click the type of divider_bgr.gif "Upload content you Grid_Divider_Vertical.gif New wish, such Grid_divider_bgr.gif Images" as more link imagery, Example Example Table FieldName subcategories, this category will pull products Value1 Value2
text, promotions, etc.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=8 (5 of 7)8/6/2007 6:13:45 PM
Category Thumbnail Image
two simultaneous subcategory listings, which are configurable using the fields SubCategory
This image
DisplayMode1 and SubCategory DisplayMode 2.
is being
(For more examples of this, see the next example in
pulled from
this tutorial.)
this subcategory. Related Fields:
Table
FieldName
Categories
SubCategory Displaymode 2
To upload a
Example Value1
Example Value2
thumbnail
Thumbnails
Category Graphics
subcategory,
for the go to the EDIT
Related Configuration Variables:
category
DataName
DataValue
tab page for
Config_EnableYouAreHere
Y
that subcategory
Related Graphics:
and click
SearchResults_SubCat_Angle.gif
"Upload
Bullet_SubCategory.gif
New Images"
Customizing the visual display (EXAMPLE #2)
Categories & Subcategories - Volusion Manual
Navigation Menu Promotions SubCategory SubCategory DisplayMode DisplayMode Note: Navigation menu links are controlled by the Categories table. Navigation menu promotions are an additional way to insert customized links and promotions into your navigation menu. 1 2 Another
Another
In order to add unlimited flexibility to your navigation area, we've created the Specials table. You may add promotional messages
example of
example of
such as Save over 30% during December only!. Let's take a look at some of the things you can do...
displaying
displaying
subcategories.
subcategories.
To enable this
To enable this
display mode,
display mode,
go to the
go to the
EDIT
EDIT
category tab
category tab
page and set
page and set
the field
the field
SubCategory
SubCategory
DisplayMode
DisplayMode
1to Left Side
2 to Category Graphics
Creating a text promotion with link to an article: ld
Example Value
SpecialTitle
Super Sale!
SpecialDescription
Save up to 30% during December only!
SpecialLink
http://www.yahoo.com
BgColor
Red (or you may use HTML Color Codes such as 0000CC)
Page
ALL
Side
L
Special Order
25
The above nav menu promotion example will be displayed below the main navigationmenus, but above the Quick Links Menu. This is because the SpecialOrder field is set to 25. The existing navigation menu items havethe following pre defined order placemarks: Search box = Position 10Nav Menu 1 = Position 20Nav Menu 2 = Position 30 http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=8 (6 of 7)8/6/2007 6:13:45 PM
Categories & Subcategories - Volusion Manual
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=8 (7 of 7)8/6/2007 6:13:45 PM
Products & Inventory - Volusion Manual
Click Here to view our Training Video covering the Products section
Products & Inventory Product Management Navigate to Inventory â&#x20AC;&#x201D;> Products. This will list all existing products in your database. From this page you may add new products and/or edit your existing products.
Adding New Products: 1. The easiest way to add new products is to click to edit an existing product, THEN, click the ADD tab at the top of the page. This will pre-fill all of the fields with the same data as the existing product to often save you time from having to retype common information. If you'd rather not have all fields pre-filled you may simply click the ADD tab from the View All Products page. 2. Fill in all the fields appropriate for this product. Please note that almost all of the fields are optional and are rarely used. The field names listed in Bold are mandatory and must be filled in before you click on the Save Changes or Add New Record buttons. Here is a list of the most commonly used fields: Field
Description
ProductCode
A unique part number/code for this product. Please see a detailed tutorial below for more information on choosing your product codes
ProductName
The complete name of your product The complete name of your product, but shorter. Try to omit any unnecessary words. This value is used in only two places: This field, which has to be less than 50 characters long, should contain the product name, however a shorter version than your ProductName field. This field is displayed on the home page of your website on the right hand side
Product Name Short
for the Super Deal, Top Sellers, New Products sections. Most importantly, it is displayed in the URL address of your product pages if you have the SEO Friendly feature enabled. This is a critical component for SEO optimization. Make sure to use a keyword or keyword phrase that you think customers will type to find your product. Leave out numbers and words that customers wouldn't type while looking for this product.
Product Description
A long, detailed description of your product
Product Description Short
A one or two paragraph maximum description, which is shown in search results and therefore should not have too much text
Product Price
The price at which the product is being sold
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=9 (1 of 8)8/6/2007 6:13:47 PM
Products & Inventory - Volusion Manual
Product Weight
The weight of the product in pounds. This weight is used by the shipping calculation systems. If your product weighs less than a pound, such as a 1/2 pound, enter 0.5 into this field.
Product Category(s)
Type in the CategoryID(s) of the categories in which you want this product to show up. You may type multiple categoryIDs separated by commas.
3. Upload the product's photos (see below for instructions).
Choosing Good Product Codes: 1. Be sure NOT to use any of the following reserved product codes: SETUP, GFT, FEE. Also be sure that your Product Codes do not begin with either DSC- or MEMBERSHIP2. Try to avoid any characters other than regular letters and numbers. For example, avoid the following characters: (") or (') or (&) or (/) or () or (+) or (#) 3. Do NOT include spaces within the Product Code Examples of GOOD Product Codes... ABC123 (Highly Recommended) ABC-123 (HighlyRecommended) ABC_123
Examples of BAD Product Codes... ABC/123 ABC&123 ABC:123 ABC+123 ABC=123
Uploading Photos There are multiple photo uploading options from automatic thumbnail creation to pre-thumbnailed batch uploading. Upload Method Easy-Auto Upload (Recommended!)
Description PROS: Upload one large photo, and it will automatically create the four required thumbnails CONS: You can only upload one photo at a time. Also, .gif is not supported through this upload method PROS: Will work on any computer or browser
Basic Form Upload
CONS: You must resize and correctly name each of your photos before you upload them. You can only upload 10 photos at a time.
When creating photos for your products, follow these standard guidelines: 1. Each of your main product photos must be resized to three smaller sizes (we call them thumbnails) 2. Each photo must be named according to the naming syntax described on this page Note: Most people use the Easy-Auto Upload method described above, which can be accessed by going to EDIT an http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=9 (2 of 8)8/6/2007 6:13:47 PM
Products & Inventory - Volusion Manual
existing product and clicking on Upload New Photos. This is by far the easiest way to upload photos. If you use the Easy-Auto upload method you can disregard all further notes below about photos because the Easy-Auto upload method takes care of everything automatically. If you have a large number of existing photos, you can use the Thumbnail Generator program that will automatically resize(create thumbnails) and rename all of your photos with a single click. Click here to download this program: Thumbnail Generator
Naming Syntax: (product code)-(photosize).(filetype). The software supports .jpg, .gif and .png PhotoSize
Recommended Dimension
Usage
Image on Shopping Cart page
REQUIRED
100x100
Thumbnail on Search Results
REQUIRED
2
500x500
Larger image
REQUIRED
2T
150x150
0
50x50
1
Normal Image on REQUIRED Product Page & PhotoGallery.asp
.................................................................................................................................. 3
500x500
Additional Image
OPTIONAL
3T
150x150
Additional Image Thumbnail
OPTIONAL
4
500x500
Additional Image
OPTIONAL
4T
150x150
Additional Image Thumbnail
OPTIONAL
.................................................................................................................................. etc.
etc. (unlimited photos supported)
etc.
EXAMPLE: This is how you would name the photos for a product with product code CD445. CD445-0.jpg CD445-1.jpg CD445-2.jpg CD445-2T.jpg CD445-3.jpg CD445-3T.jpg CD445-4.jpg CD445-4T.jpg
All product photos are placed into the folder /vspfiles/photos/ Manufacturer Logos are also supported! Simply upload the manufacturer's logo as a .gif file into the /v/photos/ manufactures/ directory and name the files the same as the manufacturer's name. For example, if a manufacturer's name is Sony, then name the file would be sony.gif. Recommended maximum image
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=9 (3 of 8)8/6/2007 6:13:47 PM
Products & Inventory - Volusion Manual
dimensions are 100 x 40 (width x height).
Easy Upload Instructions: ● ●
●
Click on a product code to EDIT, then click on Upload New Photos on the upper left-hand corner. Click on the Browse button and locate the file on your computer(Note: We recommend that you use a Jpeg file format), select the image file, click OK Click on the Upload my Images button. The photo will be renamed and resized in accordance with the naming syntax automatically. Once the file has been successfully uploaded, you will be able to preview the resized photos.
Inventory Management To begin using the live inventory management feature, start by defining your current product's StockStatus value in the Products table.
Understanding InStock vs. Out of Stock: A product is InStock if the StockStatus field for the product is greater than zero OR if the StockStatus field is left blank (NULL). A product is Out of Stock if the StockStatus is zero or less. As long as the StockStatus field has a stock value OR, is NOT left blank(NULL), each time this item is purchased, your store will automatically deduct the quantity ordered from the product's StockStatus value. If this field is left blank(NULL), the system considers the product to have UNLIMITED stock and therefore is treated as always in stock. Each time you receive a new product into inventory, you can add the quantity to the product's StockStatus value.
Displaying StockStatus to the Customer: If the Config_EnableLiveStockStatus variable is enabled, the customer is able to view the actual StockStatus quantity on the product details page. Or, if instead, the configuration variable Config_EnableDisplayStockStatus is enabled, the customer is able to view the text In Stock on the product details page if your product's current stock status is greater than 0, or Out of Stock if the StockStatus is less than 0. If you do not wish to display any indication of StockStatus to the customer, you may set the configuration variable Config_EnableDisplayStockStatus to N. You may also use the Availability field of the Products table to indicate availability. This field is a static field, not affected by your actual StockStatus in any way.
Handling Back Orders: Enabling the configuration variable Config_EnableAllowBackOrders will allow customers to order products which currently have a StockStatus of less than 1. If you want to allow back orders only on certain products, you'll need to enable this variable, and then use the DoNotAllowBackOrders field of the Products table to disable back orders for a specific product.
Recurring Payments http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=9 (4 of 8)8/6/2007 6:13:47 PM
Products & Inventory - Volusion Manual
Recurring payments allow you to sell products which have a recurring fee, such as a periodic monthly fee. Enabling the config variable Config_EnableRecurringPayments allows six extra form fields to be displayed on the Product Configuration page, to set up products to incur recurring fees. You'll be able to create any schedule of fees, including monthly fees, yearly fees, any number of months in between and even promotional start pricing.
Setting up a product that costs $19.95 per month: 1. Set the Product Price to $0.00 2. Set the Recurring Price to $19.95 3. Set the Recurring How Often (months) to 1
Setting up a product that costs $99.00 per year + $20 setup fee: 1. Set the Product Price to $20.00 2. Set the Recurring Price to $99.00 3. Set the Recurring How Often (months) to 12
Setting up a product that costs $19.95/mo for the first Three months, then $49.95/mo thereafter: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Set the ProductPrice to $0.00 Set the Recurring Price to $49.95 Set the Recurring How Often (months) to 1 Set the Recurring Start Price to 19.95 Set the Recurring Start Duration to 3
Note: The Recurring Duration (months) field if left blank means the recurring fee will be charged infinitely until the account is canceled. For example, If you enter 12 in this field, this would limit the recurring fee to be charged only for 1 year (12 months).
Downloadable Products To set up a downloadable product, go to edit the existing product and then follow these steps:
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=9 (5 of 8)8/6/2007 6:13:47 PM
Products & Inventory - Volusion Manual
1. Set the Product Weight to 0
2. Enter the name of the file for upload in the Download File field. For example, if the filename is eBook.zip, then type
eBook.zip into this field. 3. Click on the [Upload File] link located next to the Download FileName field which will allow you to upload the ebook. zip file to the server. Make sure the name of the file for upload and the name of the file in the Download FileName field are the same. When the customer purchases the product, the link to download it is sent in the OrderHasShipped.asp email. This is the email sent when an order has been marked as shipped by clicking the Complete Order / Send Emails link in the order details. You can also manually send the email by selecting Shipped in the drop down menu at the bottom of the Quick Order Processing section of the order details. You must also collect payment on the order before you send the Shipped email, otherwise the link will not work. The system can accept any file type, however some file types may need to be enabled on the server. If you test your product and the file does not download, please contact support at 800-646-3517 to see if the file type needs to be enabled.
Note: The maximum file size you can upload within the edit mode of the product is 10MB. Any files larger then 10MB need to upload via FTP to the /vspfiles/downloadables/ folder.
Sometimes Microsoft Windows will hide the extensions of your files, which may cause confusion when working with your store, where the extensions of files are important. To adjust your Windows setting's please follow these steps: 1. 2.
Double-click on your My Computer icon In the window that pops up, go to Tools â&#x20AC;&#x201D;> Folder Options
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=9 (6 of 8)8/6/2007 6:13:47 PM
Products & Inventory - Volusion Manual
3.
In the dialog box that pops up, click on the View tab, UN-CHECK the option Hide extensions for known file types, and click OK to close the window Note: You can only have one downloadable file per product.
Product Key Distribution The Product Key Distribution system is used for the following scenarios: ●
●
If you sell software that requires you to provide a unique activation code to each customer purchase If you would like to send an e-mail to a customer to provide more information about a specific product purchased.
This system basically sends out an e-mail to the customer when payment is received for an order (received meaning either authorized or captured).
Setting up UNIQUE Product Keys for Distribution for an individual product: For example, let's say the first piece of software you want to set up is called BlueSkySoftware 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
9.
Navigate to Inventory —> Product Key Distribution, click the ADD tab Set PKey_KeyType to BlueSkySoftware Set PKey_Email_Template to generic.asp. You can create a new customized template for each key type if you'd like. Set Pkey_Email_Subject to Your BlueSkySoftware key Set PKey_DateAdded to today's date. Keys will be distributed OLDEST first Leave PKey_AllowReuse as blank because you don't want to reuse any keys Leave PKey_Used blank because this key is obviously not used yet Fill in the PKey_Email_Body with the key itself, such as ABCD-1234-WXYZ-9876. You may type more text into the body as well, before or after the key, but obviously the point of this is to give the customer their activation key code. It is often easiest to add any additional text into the Email Template itself by creating a custom e-mail template, rather than entering lots of text here. Click the Add New button to add this new key. You can repeat this process for as many keys as you have. If you have 100 keys for this BlueSkySoftware product ready to go, you'll need to have 100 records in this Product Keys table. Once you have added a few records and tested it, it's often easiest to import them from a .CSV file (see the Import/Export section of this manual for more information).
Setting up a RE-USABLE Product Key for Distribution for an individual product using the PKey_Allow Reuse Field: http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=9 (7 of 8)8/6/2007 6:13:47 PM
Products & Inventory - Volusion Manual
Navigate to Inventory —> Product Key Distribution, click the ADD tab PKey_AllowReuse field is used if you are NOT distributing UNIQUE keys for a product. If this field is enabled, you only have to set up one record, as opposed to setting up 100 records(one for each time the product is ordered). The PKey_AllowReuse field allows a single key to be reused unlimited times. This transforms the ability of the Product Key Distribution system to be beneficial for many uses. You do not have to include a key in the e-mail that is sent to the customer, you can instead just send an e-mail with content / information about the product they just purchased. For example, if you set up the Product Key Distribution system for a digital camera, you could send the customer an e-mail on photography tips & advice. Another useful example, if you sell information, and if a customer purchases a product called Secrets of Online Marketing for example, your store could automatically send out an email to the customer with all information OR send an e-mail with a link to download / view the information online.
To send a product key automatically to a customer as soon as the payment for the order was received: ● ●
●
Navigate to Inventory —> Products Click to edit the product that is associated with the BlueSkySoftware set of keys, enter BlueSkySoftware in the Uses_ProductKeyType(s) field. If a customer orders this product, it will send the customer a unique key for the BlueSkySoftware automatically as soon as payment is received for the order.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=9 (8 of 8)8/6/2007 6:13:47 PM
Products Options - Volusion Manual
Click Here to view our Training Video covering the Products Options section
Product Options Understanding Product Options Product Options are displayed to the customer on the Product Details page. Options can be drop down menus, check boxes, radio buttons or even text boxes. They may be used for allowing the customer to choose Size, Color etc. Navigate to Inventory —> Product Options At the top of this page, you will see Options Categories and Options tabs. These two tables Options and Option Categories work together as follows: The Option Categories table specifies the name of the list. For example: Size, Color. The Options table specifies the actual choices in the list. For example: Small, Medium, Large OR Blue, Red, Yellow. Options may also be grouped into another organization structure when displayed by using the HeadingGroup field of the Option Categories table. Please note the following examples: ● ●
● ●
HeadingGroup - Colors OptionCategories - Stripe 1 Color, Stripe 2 Color HeadingGroup - Size OptionCategories - Shirt Size 1, Shirt Size 2
Note: Naming the HeadingGroup the same as the OptionCategoryDesc will allow the OptionCategoryDesc to NOT be displayed.
Under Inventory ⇒ Product Options, before you can create the product options, you need
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=10 (1 of 5)8/6/2007 6:13:48 PM
Products Options - Volusion Manual
to create the category they will belong to under the Option Categories tab. When creating product options, there are several different types that you can create which include: Drop down, Check box, Radio and Text box.
Note: If setting up product options as check boxes and adding multiple check boxes to a product, each check box option must have it's own Option Category.
EXAMPLE: To create a drop down menu option for Size:
In the Option Categories table: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Set the Heading Group to Size. Set the OptionCategoriesDesc to Size Set the AboutOptionCategories to N/A Set the DisplayType to DROPDOWN Add the new record.
Now in the Options table 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Set the OptionCatID field to that of the Option Category you just created Set the OptionDesc field to Blue Set the PriceDiff field to 0 (meaning no cost difference for this color) Set the ArrangeOptionsBy field to 10 Add the new record. Repeat steps 1-5 (changing the OptionDesc field to Red, Yellow, etc. and also changing the ArrangeOptionsBy field to 20, 30, etc. in the order you want them to appear)
Note: A product option can only be assigned to a single OptionCatID. Therefore if you need the same option assigned to multiple Option Categories, you will need to create the same option for each category.
How do I sell an optional product at a discounted price if a customer buys it along with another product? Set up the first product - ProductCode:BICYCLE and ProductPrice:$200 Set up the second product - ProductCode:HELMET and ProductPrice:$75 We want to sell the HELMET for $50 only if the customer purchases the HELMET along with the BICYCLE. So, now you want to add an option to the BICYCLE product and simply set http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=10 (2 of 5)8/6/2007 6:13:48 PM
Products Options - Volusion Manual
the field PriceDiff to 50.00 and the field IsProductCode to HELMET. This way, when added to cart, the customer will only pay $50.00 for the HELMET. You can also enable the configuration variable in your store called Config_EnableDisplayOptionProducts to enable a clear breakdown of options which are actually products in the cart.
JumpToProductCode This field of the OPTIONS table is useful to have the first drop down menu choices basically jump to a different product. For example, if your first option drop down determines what productcode should be added to cart, and the rest of the options are simply attributes to any of these products, then you will want to fill in the JumpToProductCode field of each OPTION in your first drop down menu. On the customer side, when selecting a choice from the first drop down menu(or radio buttons) and then clicking either Update price or Add to cart button, the system will jump to the other product code first, then apply all the attributes you selected to that other product, and either add it to the cart, or if you clicked Update price it would take you to that other product's page.
Color Swatches This allows you to display images of your product options through the product details page on the store front. 1. Navigate to Inventory > Products > and select the parent product. 2. Scroll down to Option Color Swatch Images…. And select the title of the section
to expand the window. 3. In the list of different options select add. There will be a column for the color swatch, and a column for the “medium and large” pictures, which are your alternative view pictures. 4. Select Browse and search for the image file you wish to upload. Do this for every option you have listed. 5. Select upload photos. The photos will appear on the product details page of the store front. All of the images are placed into the following directory: /vspfiles/photos/options/ The files are automatically renamed as follows: ●
Tiny Swatch image: productcode-optionid-S.jpg (25x25)
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=10 (3 of 5)8/6/2007 6:13:48 PM
Products Options - Volusion Manual ● ●
Medium Thumbnail: productcode-optionid-T.jpg (300x300) Large Photo: productcode-optionid.jpg (500x500)
So if the product code of the parent product is “myproduct” and the option ID of the color swatch is 50, the syntax of the file name will be: ● ● ●
Tiny Swatch image: myproduct-50-S.jpg Medium Thumbnail: myproduct-50-T.jpg Large Photo: myproduct-50.jpg
Alternate Photos This feature allows you to have different image files for one product. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Go to Inventory —> Products —> and select the product. Select "Upload new Photos" and select "advanced options." Place a check next to "Generate Alternate View Photo". Then browse for the image file on your computer, and then select upload.
Inventory Control for Options Using SmartMatch™ Technology: This feature is designed to manage inventory for your options. The following assumes that you've already created Options & Option Categories. 1. Go to Inventory —> Product Options, Click on Option Categories tab, click an Option Category to edit it. Set the Display Type field to DROPDOWN_SMARTMATCH (SmartMatch™ Technology) 2. Go to Inventory —> Products, click on a Product to edit it. Fill in the OptionID(s) field(in the Product Options section) with the options. Check the Enable Options Inventory Control check box. Click the SAVE CHANGES button. This will generate the inventory control table below the product(in the Inventory Control grid section) 3. If you would like to keep track of stock status, you will need to specify a unique ProductCode for each combination in the Inventory Grid ProductCode field. By default, the Inventory Grid ProductCode is set to the ProductCode of the parent product. Click Save Changes to Inventory Control Grid
Note: To make this super easy, enable the configuration variable Config_SmartMatch_AutoCreateChildInventory. This will generate new products named intelligently with the productcode as the prefix. If you
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=10 (4 of 5)8/6/2007 6:13:48 PM
Products Options - Volusion Manual
already generated the inventory control grid, try this: 1. Copy the OptionIDs 2. Remove them, uncheck the Enable Options Inventory Control and click Save Changes 3. Paste them back in the Option IDs field and click Save Changes Note: If you do not need to keep track of stock, you may leave the ProductCodes set the same as this parent product.
4. To prevent ordering of combinations you do not carry, simply set the StockStatus field to 0 or just erase the contents of the appropriate Inventory Grid ProductCode field in this inventory control list.
Note: The above steps also work with the Option Categories DisplayType of the drop down. The point of enabling DROPDOWN_SMARTMATCH is to automatically hide certain size + color combinations that are currently out of stock or just not available.
IsProductCode: The IsProductCode field of the Options table is another way to control inventory. For example, if you sell computers and you have an option for the customer that says Choose a Monitor and one of the choices is Sony 19-inch LCD Monitor, you can fill the IsProductCode field for this option to be SONY-19LCD. This ProductCode must exist in your database. So, if a customer purchases the computer and happens to choose the Sony 19-inch LCD Monitor as one of the options, the inventory will be deducted appropriately for that monitor in your store.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=10 (5 of 5)8/6/2007 6:13:48 PM
Vendors & Drop- Shipping - Volusion Manual
Vendors & Drop-Shipping Vendor Management Adding Vendors: Navigate to Inventory â&#x20AC;&#x201D;> Vendors, and click the ADD tab to begin adding Vendors Each of your vendors should be listed in this Vendors table, which provides the complete details of the vendors, including all the necessary information to generate Purchase Orders when needed. Most of the information that is filled out in this table is information which will be displayed on the Purchase Order's that you generate.
Note: The Vendor_PO_Template should be set to po.asp. It is possible to create custom templates for each vendor, but by default this one will work.
Setting up Vendor Rules: The Vendor Rules table is what ties a product(s) to various vendor(s). It is flexible enough to even support multiple vendors supplying a single product.
The Vendor Rules section is located at the bottom of the EDIT product detail page. This needs to be filled in to specify which vendor(s) are associated with this product. 1. In the VendorID field, enter the VendorID for the vendor 2. In the VendorPartNo field, enter the Part Number for this product as required by your Vendor. Often this is the same as your ProductCode 3. In the MinQty field, enter 1, and leave the MaxQty field blank
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=11 (1 of 5)8/6/2007 6:13:49 PM
Vendors & Drop- Shipping - Volusion Manual
4. In the Price field, enter the price you pay your vendor for this product 5. Click Save Changes to Vendor Rules
Note: You may setup multiple Vendor Rules based on Quantity using the MinQty and MaxQty fields. For example, you may be charged $50.00 if you were to purchase just 1 no. of the product, but if you purchase 5-10 nos. of the product you may be charged $45.00 each, and 10 or more you may be charged $40.00 each. Furthermore, you may have multiple vendors who can supply this product, and you may be able to get it cheaper from one vendor if you buy 1, but you might get it cheaper from another vendor if you buy 5 or more.
Purchase Orders Generating Purchase Orders: Purchase Orders can be generated in the following ways: 1. Through Automatic Drop-Shipping (as described below) 2. Through the Low Inventory tab at the top of the View All Products page 3. Manually creating POs from the View All Purchase Orders page and then clicking the ADD tab
How to use the Low Inventory and Queued for PO tabs: These tabs are located on the top-right of the View All Products page. The purpose of these tabs is for your purchasing department to be able to quickly order inventory for products that are running low on stock. The following fields of the Products table must be filled in: â&#x2014;?
â&#x2014;?
Stock Low Qty Alarm - If the StockStatus of this product goes below this Stock Low Qty Alarm number, this product will show up on the Low Inventory tab Stock Re-Order Qty - This number specifies the product quantity to order, each time it runs low
If the above fields are filled in, along with the Vendor Rules as always, this product will show up on the Low Inventory tab when it's running low on stock. In the Low Inventory tab page, display the AddToPO_Now field(Click on Customize this view, and check the AddToPO_Now field). If this box is checked, the product will be moved to the Queued for PO tab. In the Queued for PO tab page, cross-reference the data including the vendors and costs for each product, and choose a vendor you'd like to use this time, or just leave everything according to the Vendor Rules, which will choose the cheapest vendor for the Quantity you're ordering.
Note: If you'd like to choose a different vendor to order from this time, click to edit the product, then scroll down to the Vendor Rules section of the edit product page, and fill in the Deactivate Until field of the Vendor Rules record that you do not want to use this time. The Deactivate Until field holds a date value, such as 10/22/04 and will deactivate the Vendor until the date specified. When you're ready to build the http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=11 (2 of 5)8/6/2007 6:13:49 PM
Vendors & Drop- Shipping - Volusion Manual
purchase order(s), just click the Generate All Purchase Orders button on this page. If you are ready to send them as well, check the box and send them now.
How to create a Purchase Order manually: Note: Before creating a PO manually, make sure to Add the Vendor and fill in the Vendor Rules for the product. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Navigate to Inventory -> Purchase Orders in the home page of the admin area, and click the ADD tab Choose the Vendor from the drop down list, Click Continue On the Build New Purchase Order page, verify the PO information and Click Build New PO Enter the product code and Qty, Click ADD. Note: To Edit products that have been added to the PO, click on Edit Items currently associated with this PO 5. Once all products have been added to the PO, click on Yes, send the PO now
Sending Purchase Orders: When sending purchase orders to Vendors, the following are the available options: SendVia
Description
E-mails the PO to the specified vendor's e-mail address
fax
Faxes the PO to the specified vendor's fax number
none
Allows you to print the PO to send it manually.
Note: You must sign-up for an account with ClickFax to use this feature. This will allow us to send the PO e-mail to the ClickFax system, which will instantly send the PO to the vendor's fax machine. The e-mail address that you register with ClickFax must match the one specified in the config variable Config_EmailAddress_Billing (Billing E-mail Address). Click here to sign up for a new account: ClickFax
Receiving Purchase Orders: Once you get the inventory from your vendor, you will want to receive the PO. Navigate to Inventory â&#x20AC;&#x201D;> Receiving, from the home page of your admin area and follow these steps: 1. From the first drop down menu choose PO#, and in the field next to it type in the PO number such as 1089 and click the Prepare button 2. You should now see all of the items listed that were ordered through this PO. As you count the tangible inventory to verify that you received the complete quantity of products that you ordered, you'll want to fill in the Quantity Received boxes on this page, and click the Save Changes button 3. Since 90% of the time your vendor's never tell you the actual shipping cost until this point, now is the time you can input the Shipping Cost in the field right above the Distribute button in the lower right corner of this screen. 4. Once you are finished, click the Distribute button at the bottom right corner to update the stock status of the products that you received.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=11 (3 of 5)8/6/2007 6:13:49 PM
Vendors & Drop- Shipping - Volusion Manual
Note: In order for the stock status to update when receiving a Purchase Order, the products must already have a stock amount in the Stock Status field even if the Stock Status is 0. The reason is if the Stock Status field is blank, the system assumes the stock is infinite and therefore it doesn't update when you receive your stock from a Purchase Order.
For example, if you enter $59.91 for the shipping cost and click the Distribute button, it will distribute $59.91 evenly throughout the items on the order based on the weight of each product. After clicking the Distribute button you can then easily adjust/edit the shipping cost for an item(s) as you see fit. The reason for the distribution of shipping charges per item is to help you run more accurate Cost/Profit reports to get the TRUE cost of your goods. For example, you might be paying $5.00 for an item and selling it for $12.00 and assuming your profit is $7.00 per sale. However, the item might be costing you $10.00 after shipping it to your warehouse because of its size & weight, therefore the Distribute data feature is able to calculate the true Cost/Profit of your inventory.
Customizing Purchase Orders: Purchase Order templates can be customized for each vendor: 1. Navigate to Inventory â&#x20AC;&#x201D;> Vendors, from the home page of your admin area 2. Click the VendorID of the individual vendor you wish to customize 3. The Vendor_PO_Template field is by default set to po.asp. This file is located in the following directory of your website /wwwroot/admin/emails/po.asp. You can edit this file by logging in via FTP, or you can use the LiveEdit File Editor feature by simply clicking the pencil icon on this page, which opens the file to allow editing the existing po.asp template However, you could create a NEW template for a purchase order and upload it via FTP. The following are the instructions to add a NEW template: 1. Login via FTP, and navigate to the following directory /wwwroot/admin/emails/ 2. Duplicate the po.asp file and rename it. For example: VendorABC.asp 3. Open the new file VendorABC.asp to edit it
Note: It's mostly HTML along with some variables that are in the form of $(variable)
Automatic Drop-Shipping How to setup a product for automatic drop-shipping: 1. Navigate to Inventory â&#x20AC;&#x201D;> Products, click to edit one of your existing products 2. You must fill in the Vendor Rules for each of your products as specified above 3. Next verify that the following fields of this product are set as follows:
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=11 (4 of 5)8/6/2007 6:13:49 PM
Vendors & Drop- Shipping - Volusion Manual
●
● ● ●
The Stock Status field must be set to 0. As this product is ordered, the stock status will decrease to -1, -2, etc. which is fine The AutoDropShip check box must be checked The DoNotAllowBackOrders check box must be unchecked The Config_EnableAllowBackOrders checkbox [within Settings —> Config Variables —> Checkout Variables] must be checked
In this Drop-Shipping scenario, POs are sent as soon as payment is received for the order. In most scenarios you'll want to only authorize payment first, which sends the PO, and then when your vendor says ok, it's shipped, then you can capture the payment. If you authorize + capture at the same time, that's fine too. POs are sent automatically only the first time payment is authorized/captured. POs will never be sent twice.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=11 (5 of 5)8/6/2007 6:13:49 PM
Placing Orders - Volusion Manual
Placing Orders Understanding the Checkout Process Your customers will usually begin at your home page. Sometimes they will begin from a category page, or a product details page if they came from a search engine. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Home page (Default.asp) Category pages / Search Results pages (SearchResults.asp) Product Details page (ProductDetails.asp) Shopping Cart (ShoppingCart.asp) Login (Login.asp) 1. Login with existing e-mail and password or 2. Click "create new account" button 6. Create New Account or Modify Existing Account Info (AccountSettings.asp) 1. Create new e-mail address + choose new password 2. Enter new shipping address 3. Enter new billing address if different from shipping address 4. Choose shipping preference 5. Enter credit card / payment information 7. Review Order then hit Proceed to Checkout button (one-page-checkout.asp.asp) 8. Order Finished Confirmation / Receipt (OrderFinished.asp) New customers would follow the above steps intuitively as they shop from your website. Returning customers will skip most of step #6 because when they login to their account they'd have all of their past information saved to allow for a quick checkout process.
Admin Area - Quick Phone Order Page As an administrator, you can place orders from the front-end of your store simply following the same checkout process as your customer's would, or you may use the Phone Order page in the admin area to take orders over the phone and enjoy some additional tools, control, and features that are useful for taking phone orders quickly.
Placing Orders from the front-end: http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=12 (1 of 4)8/6/2007 6:13:49 PM
Placing Orders - Volusion Manual
1. From the home page of your admin area, in the top right corner click the Logout link 2. Now, from the home page of your store's front-end, go ahead and add all of the products to your cart, then proceed to checkout 3. When asked to login or create a new account, simply create a new account with all of the customer's information. You're basically just placing the order the same way they would.
Placing Phone Orders thru' the Phone Order page: Navigate to Orders —> Phone Order page, from the home page of your admin area For a NEW customer —> Create a new account by entering an email, password, and click Create New Account Note: It is possible to have the customer place the order anonymously, which means that they do not need a Email account to place a order. Simply select "anonymous customer," before filling out the order. The downside to this process is that you will not be able to capture any of the customer's address, or email information. For financial reporting, all anonymous orders are lumped together.
For an EXISTING customer —> Enter the Customer ID and click the Login button and it will pull up the customers email and password. To add products to the Phone Order page: 1. Click on the Go Shopping link to add products to the cart. This will take you to the 2. 3. 4. 5.
home page of your storefront. Once products have been added to the shopping cart, close the shopping cart page in your storefront. This will bring you back to the Phone Order page. Click on the REFRESH button in the Phone Order page. This will add / list the products that was added to cart thru your storefront, to the Phone Order Page cart Enter the customers Shipping information, then click Precalculate Tax + Shipping Rates, then choose the shipping method they prefer Enter the customers Billing information and payment details, and click the Place order button
Note: At the point of taking a phone order, you are logged in as administrator to the admin area, but are placing the order thru the customers account by logging into his account thru the phone order page.
Point of Sale System
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=12 (2 of 4)8/6/2007 6:13:49 PM
Placing Orders - Volusion Manual
Navigate to Orders —> Point of Sale, from the home page of your admin area. The Point of Sale(POS) system allows you to quickly sell your products to customers who are physically in your store. This also assumes there will be no shipping cost, since the customer will carry his items out of the store. The point of sale process is just like going to your local supermarket... 1. Use your Barcode Scanner to scan each product. If you have a product without a
UPC code or you do not have a barcode scanner, you can simply browse your online store to add the product to the cart. 2. Collect payment: (in any of the following quick ways) ❍ Use your Credit Card Swipe to swipe the customer's credit card ❍ Enter the cash value handed to you ❍ If the customer is paying by check, you may click Proceed to checkout to change payment button to enter the MICR check info button, then click Save Changes 3. Your Receipt Printer quickly prints the receipt + displays the amount of change to give to the customer if paid cash. The following POS hardware is supported: ● ● ●
Barcode Scanner Credit Card Swipe / Magnetic Stripe Reader 3-Inch Receipt Printer
Note: An MICR check reader is not supported at this time.
To purchase hardware, you might consider the following hardware vendors: http://pos.epson.com http://www.symbol.com http://www.waspbarcode.com
Or you may want to search eBay for low cost hardware. One of the most inexpensive credit card swipes is the Magtek Credit Card Swipe. Hooking up the hardware: Both the Barcode Scanner and the Credit Card Swipe hookup to any computer using the same plug as your keyboard. The barcode scanners and credit card swipes http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=12 (3 of 4)8/6/2007 6:13:49 PM
Placing Orders - Volusion Manual
always come with a splitter to allow for everything to plug into the same existing plug on your computer. Whenever you use either of their pieces of hardware, for example, if you scan a barcode, all that does is simulate your keyboard typing. So, for example you can open up any text editor such as Microsoft Word, or notepad, and then just scan a UPC code... wherever your cursor is within the document you'll see it type the UPC code numbers into the document. So the point is that these hardware devices simply save you time, and ensure accuracy since you don't have to type the code, you just scan it. The powerful convenience actually comes from using your e-commerce software in conjunction with this hardware, for example when using the POS System in your admin area, you'll simply have your cursor in the UPC code field, and all you have to do is scan any barcode to add the product to the cart. Quick & Easy.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=12 (4 of 4)8/6/2007 6:13:49 PM
Processing Orders - Volusion Manual
Processing Orders Each time a customer order is placed, you will receive a notification via e-mail at the address(es) you specified in the following variables: ● ● ●
Go to Settings —> Quicksetup Send Order Notifications To (1):* Send Order Notifications To (2):*
Each day that you have orders, it is recommended that you process them in the following way: 1. Go to Orders —> Orders, from the home page of the admin area 2. Click on the OrderID you wish to process 3. Follow the steps and links in the Quick Order Processing box
Recommended Steps:
1. LockOrder If you have chosen to process payments at the time of shipment, all orders are editable by the customer via the customer's My Account manager immediately after placing the order. Each time you begin to process an order, it is recommended that you click the Lock Order link in the Quick Order Processing box, to prevent the customer from editing the order. You can also auto-lock all orders to prevent customers from editing an order once it has been placed. To do this, disable the variable Config_EnableOrderEditing. 2. Collect Payment http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=13 (1 of 9)8/6/2007 6:13:51 PM
Processing Orders - Volusion Manual
Depending on the Authorization Mode you have set on the QuickSetup page of your store, you may be collecting payment at the time of sale, or you may be collecting payment at shipping 1. Collecting payment at sale: In the green section on the left side titled Payment Log you will see the payment details for this order. Since you are authorizing + capturing at sale, there is nothing to do now except review that the payment log record shows a successful charge for the correct amount. 2. Collecting payment at shipping: In the green section on the left side titled Payment Log you will see the payment details for this order. To collect payment you will want to have the drop down menu selected as DEBIT, verify that the amount in the text box is correct, then hit the Receive button.
3. Authorizing payment at sale and capture at shipping: In the green section on the left side titled Payment Log you will see the payment details for this order. Since you have it authorizing payment at sale you should see a payment log record displaying a successful authorization of funds. Now to collect the funds you will need to click the Capture button. So to explain further, authorizing funds at sale only, checks if funds are available. Capturing funds at shipping actually charges the customer's credit card. 3. Print Invoice / Packing Slips To print an invoice or packing slip, simply click the appropriate link on Step 3 in the Quick Order Processing box. There are four possible invoice versions to print: 1. Print Order - This prints an invoice including complete payment details, which is intended only for internal staff use, not meant to be sent to a customer 2. Print Invoice - This prints a standard invoice, hiding sensitive payment details 3. Print Gift Invoice - This only shows up if the customer selected gift options including Yes, my items are a gift check box during checkout. A gift invoice hides all pricing and payment information 4. Print Packing Slip - This prints an invoice without any pricing information 4. Ship Items / Add Tracking Numbers This step simply means that it's time to physically ship the items. Go ahead and physically pack them up and send them off to your shipping company. Your shipping company will then provide you with tracking numbers for the packages. Once you get the tracking numbers, return to the software and input the tracking numbers into the section of this page titled Shipping / Tracking Numbers. Please contact your preferred shipping company for more details on how to ship packages using their interface such as UPS.com, FedEx.com, etc. 5. Complete Order / Send Emails Now that the packages have been shipped, you can mark this order as completed, and send the customer an e-mail notifying them that their order has shipped. Just click the Complete Order / Send E-mails link to mark the order as Shipped which automatically send the customer a confirmation e-mail letting them know that their packages are on their way! The e-mail sent to the customer contains a link to login to their My Account section of your store and track their packages through your website.
Note: The Send Emails drop down list of templates is to re-send any e-mails to the customer. The Complete Order / Send E-mails link sends out the Order has shipped e-mail automatically.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=13 (2 of 9)8/6/2007 6:13:51 PM
Processing Orders - Volusion Manual
Understanding Inventory on Orders: Navigate to Orders —> Orders in the home page of your admin area Scroll down to the section titled Items Purchased, which displays all the items purchased through this order You can edit any details of each item listed and then click the Save Changes button below. Usually this is not necessary, the only thing you will do regularly is check the following columns: ● ● ● ●
Quantity - This is the quantity that the customer ordered Qty On Backorder - This is the quantity that was NOT in-stock at the time the order was placed Qty On Hold - This is the quantity that was in-stock at the time the order was placed Qty Shipped - This is the quantity that has been shipped
Examples of Inventory on Orders: Let's say a customer orders 10 of an item, and you have all 10 in-stock, here is what will show in the above mentioned fields: ● ● ● ●
Quantity = 10 Qty On Backorder = 0 Qty On Hold = 10 Qty Shipped = 0
Then, to ship this product, you would just enter 10 in the Qty Shipped field. Let's say a customer orders 10 of an item, and you have only 7 in-stock, here is what will show in the above mentioned fields: ● ● ● ●
Quantity = 10 Qty On Backorder = 3 Qty On Hold = 7 Qty Shipped = 0
Then, to ship this product, you will have to wait until you get the extra 3 in stock. Once the products are received and are ready to ship, you will need to change the Qty On Backorder to 0, and the Qty On Hold to 10 before you are able to completely ship this order. To make these changes mentioned, you will need to add the stock received to the Stock Status field of the product. To do this, click on the View link which is located to the left of the product code in the Items purchased section. This will take you to the product's edit page. Add the no. of quantity received to the Stock Status field and click Save Changes. This will update the stock in order details page and you are now able to ship the products to the customer.
How would i partially ship a product in an order? For example, a customer purchases 5 units of a product, and the current stock status for this product was 2, and you would like to ship 2 nos of the product to the customer. Therefore, at the time this order was received, the On hold field in the order detail page will be automatically set to 2 and the Back Order field will be set to 3. To partially ship this product:
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=13 (3 of 9)8/6/2007 6:13:51 PM
Processing Orders - Volusion Manual ● ●
Type the quantity on hold (2 nos) in the text box located between the On Hold and Shipped fields. This is the quantity to be shipped. Type the quantity to be shipped (2 nos) in the Qty on PackSlip box located to the far right end of the product code.
Note: The number in the Qty on PackSlip should match the quantity On hold.
Adding Tracking Numbers to an Order: To add tracking numbers to an order, go to Orders and then click on the Order ID that you want to add the tracking numbers to. Below the payment information you will see the following section:
The only required fields to add tracking numbers is the Tracking Number and Shipping Method fields. Once you have filled in the fields, click the Add button on the right.
Note: You must click the Add button to on the right side of the Tracking Numbers section to add the tracking number. Clicking the Save Changes button at the bottom will NOT add the tracking number.
Adjusting Order Totals / Adding Discounts: ● ● ● ●
Navigate to Orders —> Orders in the home page of an admin area Scroll down to the Discounts section of the page (the light-green area) To add a new price adjustment, change the discount name from Special Discount to whatever you like You can enter either a negative or positive Discount Value. Note: You can add a discount value to either add or subtract from the total order value.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=13 (4 of 9)8/6/2007 6:13:51 PM
Processing Orders - Volusion Manual
Changing Order Information / Adding Notes: To change a customer's Billing Address, Shipping Address, Payment Method, or Shipping Method, simply click the appropriate pencil icon next to each. You can also add both public and private order notes anytime. Simply use the yellow section on the right side of the page titled Order Comments. The Public notes are viewable to the customer and appear on their invoice, and can be seen when they check the status of their order online. Public notes can also be filled in by the customer when they place their order if you have the config variable Config_EnableOrderComments enabled. Once the order has been placed they can no longer edit the public notes. Private notes are only viewable to administrators.
Adding / Removing Products from an Order: To add additional products or remove products from an order, go to the Items Purchased section of the order details. To remove a product, simply click on the quantity they ordered and change the amount to 0, then click Save Changes.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=13 (5 of 9)8/6/2007 6:13:51 PM
Processing Orders - Volusion Manual
Once the quantity has been changed to 0, you can remove the product from the order itself by clicking the check box at the bottom that says "Remove Items that have Qty set to 0" and then click Save Changes.
To add additional items, look below the last product in the order and there will be a blank section with the word "ADD" to the left. This is where you can add additional products. Simply enter in the Product Code and the Quantity the customer needs and then click Save Changes.
Note: You can remove as many products as you want from an order at a time, however, only one additional product can be added to the order at a time.
How to manually drop-ship an order: http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=13 (6 of 9)8/6/2007 6:13:51 PM
Processing Orders - Volusion Manual
Note: An item on an order can only be drop-shipped if it is out-of-stock.
●
● ● ● ●
For example, if an order for 10 nos was placed for an item, and this item was out-of-stock, the Qty On Backorder for this item will be automatically set to 10, and the Qty On Hold will be 0. Next, verify the Drop Shipped (abbreviated as Drop Shpd) column has a check box in the box. Now, click the Drop Ship button toward the bottom left corner of this page. If the drop-ship was successful, you will see the Qty On Backorder change from 10 down to 0. You will also see the Drop Shipped column now show 10, and the Qty Shipped column also show 10.
Note: If you do not see this happen, you will want to verify the product was setup to support drop shipping.
● ● ●
To verify a product was setup for Drop Shipping: Click on the link titled View to the left of the Product code in the Items Purchased section of this page. This will take you to the edit product management page. Scroll down to the very bottom to the Vendor Rules. Make sure the Vendor Rules are filled in accordingly.
For more details on setting up Vendor Rules, click the following link: Vendors & Drop-Shipping —> Vendor Management
Recurring Payments Navigate to Orders -> Recurring Billing from the home page of the admin area. ●
●
●
By default, you will be taken to the Recurring: DUE tab. This tab page displays all payments that are currently due to be charged. Everyday, or every few days you can visit this page, review the list of payments that are due, and then just click the Process all payments now button to collect all the payments. This will clear the DUE list for today. If any payments are declined, they will then show up in the Recurring: Declined tab. The customer is also sent an automatic e-mail notifying them that their card was declined and are provided with a link for them to update their payment information / credit card details. All recurring payment records that were declined have the Delay Charge Until field set to a date 3 days in the future. This means that although the payment is still DUE, it is delayed for another 3 days. Therefore, 3 days later the system will move this record back to the DUE tab so that an attempt to charge the credit card again maybe made. During these 3 days the customer may have either updated their credit card details or deposited more funds into their credit card.
Note: If you would like to delay a payment for whatever reason, you can also fill in the Delay Charge Until field anytime. If for some reason you want to completely cancel a recurring payment record, uncheck the Active box for the recurring payment record. The Recurring: All tab displays all recurring records.
Returns / RMAs If a customer calls in requesting to return an item, follow these steps: ●
Navigate to Orders —> Orders in the home page of your admin area
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=13 (7 of 9)8/6/2007 6:13:51 PM
Processing Orders - Volusion Manual ● ●
●
● ●
● ●
●
Click on the order ID to edit it Scroll down to the Items Purchased section and locate the item they wish to return On the extreme right side of the item you will see the column titled Qty to Return. Enter the quantity they are requesting to return in the Save Changes.
colored box, and click
You will now notice that a new section has appeared above the Items Purchased section called RMAs. This new section lists all RMAs associated with this order. You can now enter the Refund Type and if appropriate you may enter what OrderID the returned merchandise was exchanged for. Both of these two fields Refund Type and Exchange for OrderID are only for your notes and are not used by the system.
Once you receive the merchandise from the customer, you may click on the Inventory -> Receiving from the home page of your admin area. From the first drop down menu select RMA#. Then in the text box beside it type in the RMA#, for example 17. Then, click the Prepare button. This will pull up all the details of this RMA. You may then enter in the Qty Sellable and the Qty Damaged and then click Save Changes.
Note: The Qty Sellable means the item you have received is going back into inventory and thereby automatically adds this quantity to the Stock Status of the product in your store. The Qty Damaged on the other hand does not adjust the Stock Status of the product in your store.
●
Once all items on this RMA are received, the status of the RMA will be changed automatically from WAITING to RECEIVED.
How do i return the payment OR adjust the order value for an order with the RMA? http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=13 (8 of 9)8/6/2007 6:13:51 PM
Processing Orders - Volusion Manual
The following are the ways to refund the amount and adjust the order value: ● ● ●
If the payment was collected, this amount has to be credited back to the customer or given a store credit If the payment was not collected, then you would deduct the value for the returned items from the Total Order value and collect the payment. You can adjust the Total Order Value by editing the Qty field in the Items Purchased section, for the individual product.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=13 (9 of 9)8/6/2007 6:13:51 PM
Configuration Variables - Volusion Manual
Configuration Variables Enable / Disable Features Navigate to Settings â&#x20AC;&#x201D;> Config Variables on the home page of your admin area. This page will allow you to enable or disable various features of your store. Checking a box enables the features, and leaving it blank disables the feature. There are three groups of configuration variables and each one is has it's own tab - e.g., general variables, checkout variables, email variables.
Any variables that deal specifically with a particular section of the administration page, i.e. categories, products, etc. will be found within the tableviewer page of that section.
General Variables Note: These variables are the first ones to appear within Config Variables.
Variable Name
Description This config variable no longer works in order to change the continue shopping link you need to go to webmaster -> website text and edit article 64. You will see an a href tag linking to default. asp. Replace default.asp with where you want to the button to go or the javascript shown below. After a customer adds an item(s) to their Shopping Cart, they have the ability to either "shop for more items," or "procede to checkout." If they choose to continue shopping, this link will
Config_ContinueShoppingPage
dictate where they are taken to do so. The default setting for this page is default.asp. You may want to use a different path here if, for instance, you use a separate "Shop" category that you would like the customer to remain in instead of returning to default.asp. (hint: using javascript in this field [ javascript: history.go(-1); ] will send the customer back to whichever product page they were just on.) This variable allows you to select which date format you want to use for your store. By default the store is set to use MM/DD/YYYY
Config_DateFormat
which is standard for US transactions. If you wish to use a different format
Config_Donations_Suggested_Amounts
This is where you specify what donation amounts will be shown on the donations.asp page.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=14 (1 of 10)8/6/2007 6:13:52 PM
Configuration Variables - Volusion Manual
Enabling this option will cause and design changes you make to be Config_Enable_Publish_Always_By_Default
live and come into affect immediately. You will not have to click on the 'Publish' button to affect the change.
Config_Enable_ShipAddresss_Validation
No documentation has been added yet for this field This variable allows you to control whether your store's time runs
Config_Enable24HourTime_Without_AMPM
on AM/PM hours or a "military" clock. If this variable is activated, 4:00PM would read as 16:00. Enables a display of product accessories on the bottom of
Config_EnableAccessoriesBelowShoppingCart
ShoppingCart.asp. This feature displays accessories of the products currently in the customer's shopping cart. Allows quantity discounts and coupons to be used by anyone. If
Config_EnableDiscounts_With_SpecialPricing
you disable this variable, it will prevent customers to whom you've given special pricing levels or store-wide percentage discounts from getting any quantity or coupon discounts. Enables the display of estimated shipping costs on the "ShoppingCart.asp" page. If the customer is not logged in with an account, "zip code" textbox appears allowing the customer to enter their zip code and calculate shipping rates for their cart. (Only
Config_EnableDisplayEstimatedShipping
works for U.S. zip codes). If a customer enters an invalid postal code it will display an error notifying the customer to proceed through the checkout process for international shipping rates. Basically we need to collect the customer's complete shipping address before being able to provide them with a quote. When using the field "IsProductCode" in the Options table, you have the option of displaying the product codes separately in the shopping cart, visually grouped with the main product, to do this enable this variable. If you disable this variable it will display
Config_EnableDisplayOptionProducts
options normally which is just the text such as "Color:Blue", "Size: Large" for example within the same line item in the cart. So if you enable this variable it will use different line items in the cart. PLEASE NOTE: Regardless of this setting, the invoice and all visual displays of this order through the admin area and invoices will show all products on separate line items..
Config_EnableDisplayVendor_PartNo_On_PackingSlip
Enables the display of the vendor product code on the purchase order only. Enables the fax number field on the Billing Address and Shipping
Config_EnableFaxNumber
Address pages. It would allow for the customer to type in their Fax Number, however it would not require that they fill this field in.
Config_EnableFreeShippingZeroWeight
Marks all items with a zero weight as eligible for free shipping (if enabled in the shipping area). Enables the ability to sell gift certificates. Please refer to this link
Config_EnableGiftCertificates
from the manual for more details about gift certificates and store credit.
Config_EnableCustomerReviews
Enables customers to read and write reviews on your products.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=14 (2 of 10)8/6/2007 6:13:52 PM
Configuration Variables - Volusion Manual
Enables the ability to set a maximum allowed purchase quantity Config_EnableMaximumOrderQty
per product, per order. In other words this enables a field in the Products table called "Maximum Order Quantity". This will not work unless you also enable Config_EnableMinimumOrderQty. When this variable is activated your store will REQUIRE visitors to
Config_EnableMembersOnlyBrowsing
register before being able to browse any products and begin shopping. When a customer visits your site they will be redirected to the "Register.asp" page until they signup for an account or login. When this variable is activated, an un-registered customer will be able to access all products and categories on your store, but will
Config_EnableMembersOnlyWebsite
not see pricing or be able to add any items to a shopping cart. Instead they will see (Price: Members Only.) If they click "Members Only" or an add to cart button, they will be directed to Register.asp. Activating this variable will enable the field "TaxID" on the "Register.asp" page. This field will be a REQUIRED part of registration.
Config_EnableMembersOnlyWebsite_TaxID In instance in which you would need your customer's TaxID would be if you're running a members only website and selling only to wholesalers. Enables the ability to set a minimum allowed purchase quantity per Config_EnableMinimumOrderQty
product, per order. In other words, this enables the field "MinQty" in the Products table. Enables the display of chosen product options in the checkout process accessible via a popup window, instead of displaying all
Config_EnableOptions_DisplayPopup
chosen options directly on the page. If you have very few options, you'll want to disable this variable. If your products have tons of options, you'll want to enable this variable so that the shopping cart page does not get cluttered with option choices. Enables the inventory control grids so that you can create for child products. line items in the cart. PLEASE NOTE: Regardless of this
Config_EnableOptions_InventoryControl
setting, the invoice and all visual displays of this order through the admin area and invoices will show all products on separate line items. If enabled, allows customers to login to their "My Account" section and edit the quantity of items they ordered, as well as change their shipping address, billing address, or shipping method. It will let them edit their order only until you LOCK the order in the admin area, which is the first step to processing an order in the admin area. Once an order is locked it is no longer editable by the customer, however an administrator can always edit an order anytime. If you disable this variable, basically the system will just
Config_EnableOrderEditing
LOCK all orders as soon as they're placed. An order will automatically be LOCKED if you Authorize or Authorize + Capture at Sale. Please note that if someone chooses to pay via PayPal, their order
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=14 (3 of 10)8/6/2007 6:13:52 PM
Configuration Variables - Volusion Manual
is automatically locked regardless of this variable. This is due to the fact that the customer must visit PayPal to make their payment, and to avoid any discrepancy in the amount they must pay via PayPal, all PayPal orders are locked immediately. Enables the ability to sell products which the customer may edit the price of. If you allow price editing for a product, the customer has the ability to change the price of the item in their cart. This is Config_EnablePriceEdit
useful for things such as accepting donations. This variable is also required to be enabled if you allow customers to purchase gift certificates.
Config_EnableProtect_Images
Disables the customers' ability to right click on images. Enables the display of the current "Stock Status" as "In Stock" or
Config_EnableDisplayStockStatus
"Out of Stock" for products. If the stock status of a product is greater than 0 then it will show "In Stock". If the stock status is less than 1, it would show "In Stock". When activated along with Config_EnableMembersOnlyWebsite, this variable lets you accept new customers on a "pending" basis before granting them regular access to your store. After registering on Register.asp, the customer will still not have regular customer access. They will see the message, "Your account is pending activation. Please allow time for your account to be
Config_EnableRegisterPendingStatus
activated by our staff. Thank you." To activate pending accounts, go to the Customers section in admin and review new accounts. If you are satisfied with the user's account and want to make them a member, change their Access Key field from "Membership Pending" to "Customer." If you do not want them as customers, change the Access Key to "Cancelled/No Access." Enables the display of the running cart total on all pages of the website, with a link to view the full details of the cart. This running
Config_EnableRunningCartTotal
cart total is a simple text sentence usually at the top of the site that shows up only if there is something in your cart. Says something like "There are XX number of items in your cart. View Cart." Enables the sending of an e-mail to the customer when you've
Config_EnableSendEmailOrderShipped
shipped the order. Basically this send the customer their "Your order has shipped" email when you click "Complete order / Send Emails" link on the process order page of the admin area.
Config_EnableShoppingCartProductLink
Enables the "Product Name" text for each item in the customer's shopping cart to link back to that product's Product Details page. This enables syntax highlighting in the text editors for HTML, CSS,
Config_EnableSyntaxHighlighting
Javascript, and SQL . Disabling this option will cause pages which use the easy editor to load more quickly.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=14 (4 of 10)8/6/2007 6:13:52 PM
Configuration Variables - Volusion Manual
This variable activates the Warehouse system for products. The Config_EnableWarehouses
Warehouse variable on a product page will help calculate an extra base rate for shipping if you are shipping from multiple warehouses. When enabled, this variable activates the "Featured Products" section of the Home Page. To add a product to Featured Products,
Config_HomePage_EnableSection_FeaturedProducts
change the "Home Page Section" field of that product page to Home_Featured. Featured Products are displayed in random order on the store front. When enabled, this variable activates the "New Products" section on the upper right side of the Home Page. To add a product to
Config_HomePage_EnableSection_NewProducts
New Products, change the "Home Page Section" field of that product page to Home_New. You can assign as many products as you like to the New Products section. A maximum of five will appear at one time. They are cycled randomly. When enabled, this variable activates the "Today's Super Deal" section on the upper right side of the Home Page. To add a
Config_HomePage_EnableSection_SuperDeal
product to Today's Super Deal, change the "Home Page Section" field of that product page to Home_SuperDeal. You can assign as many products as you like to the Today's Super Deal section. Only one will appear at a time. They are cycled randomly. Hides all pricing on your website, and does not allow anyone to add to cart until they register and login. In place of pricing it would say
Config_EnableMemberOnlyBrowsing
"Price: (Members Only)" and if they click "Members Only" or if they click an "Add to Cart" button it would redirect them to the "Register. asp" page where they must signup for an account first. When enabled, this variable activates the "Top Sellers" section on the upper right side of the Home Page. To add a product to Top
Config_HomePage_EnableSection_TopSellers
Sellers, change the "Home Page Section" field of that product page to Home_TopSeller. You can assign as many products as you like to the Top Sellers section. A maximum of five will appear at one time. They are cycled randomly. This variable will enable an auto-formated text title to be used as your store's header logo. It will use the text you have entered in Quicksetup as "Website Title." The text title will be a hyperlink back to your homepage from anywhere in the store.
Config_HomePage_EnableTextTitle
To change the text title to a custom image logo, go to Webmaster > Branding Images and load a new Company Logo 1. This image must be correctly sized for your template. Otherwise the image will be cut-off, or will repeat across the header area. Loading a new Company Logo 1 will automatically disable the variable Config_HomePage_EnableTextTitle. This variable, when activated, will enable the line of text at the top of your store's home page that reads, "Welcome CustomerX. (If
Config_HomePage_EnableWelcomeText
you're not CustomerX, click here.)" Note: This will only work if you have one of the three right side featured products, for example super deal.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=14 (5 of 10)8/6/2007 6:13:52 PM
Configuration Variables - Volusion Manual
This field allows you to rename the home page section, New Config_HomePage_NewProductsTitle
Products. Products are assigned to this section by setting the field "Home Page Section" to Home_New. The initial setting for this field is "New Products." This field allows you to rename the home page section, Today's
Config_HomePage_SuperDealTitle
Super Deal. Products are assigned to this section by setting the product field "Home Page Section" to Home_SuperDeal. The initial setting for this field is "Today's Super Deal!" This field allows you to rename the home page section, Top Sellers.
Config_HomePage_TopSellersTitle
Products are assigned to this section by setting the product field "Home Page Section" to Home_TopSeller. The initial setting for this field is "Top Sellers." This field establishes the wwwroot directory folder that is
Config_ImagesFolder
referenced by your store's code to retrieve site images such as buttons and store logos. This field is automatically updated when you install a store template.
Config_Live_Chat_ID
This is your volusion live chat ID for integration with your store. When the product field, DisplayBeginDate is used to begin a product's visibility, a "New!" icon is attached to the product to let
Config_NewGraphicDays
customers know this is a new item. The field, Config_NewGraphicDays, determines the number of days the product will display this "New!" icon. If you do not wish to use the icon, enter 0 in this field. When this variable is activated, a printable reciept will
Config_POS_EnableReceipt
automatically generate at the end of a Point of Sale transaction. This reciept will also display the amount of change owed to the customer if they payed in cash.
Checkout Variables Note: To find these variables, click on the blue tab called Checkout Variables once you go to Config Variables.
Variable Name
Description If you check this box, users will always see the text boxes to fill in their shipping and billing information on the one-page-checkout.asp. The default is that a user first chooses "Ship to a different address",
Config_AlwaysDisplayDifferentShipToAddressFields
then the text boxes will be displayed. With this checkbox selected, the page will seem more static and the user will be influenced to fill the fields in. This will also decrease the number of screen refreshes required for a sale!
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=14 (6 of 10)8/6/2007 6:13:52 PM
Configuration Variables - Volusion Manual
Config_Checkoutfee_Minimum allows you to set the minimum "Checkout fee". For example, if the checkout fee percent calculation is less than this amount (for example $50.00), then this fee will be used Config_CheckoutFee_Minimum
instead. The checkoutfee_minumum requires a checkoutfee_percent in order to apply anything to the order. This variable adds a "Checkout fee" to the customer's shopping cart.
Config_CheckoutFee_Percent
This variable holds the percentage, for example 0.01 would charge a 1% additional fee to the shopping cart. This config variable no longer works in order to change the continue shopping link you need to go to webmaster -> website text and edit article 64. You will see an a href tag linking to default.asp. Replace default.asp with where you want to the button to go or the javascript shown below. After a customer adds an item(s) to their Shopping Cart, they have the ability to either "shop for more items," or "procede to checkout."
Config_ContinueShoppingPage
If they choose to continue shopping, this link will dictate where they are taken to do so. The default setting for this page is default.asp. You may want to use a different path here if, for instance, you use a separate "Shop" category that you would like the customer to remain in instead of returning to default.asp. (hint: using javascript in this field [ javascript: history.go(-1); ] will send the customer back to whichever product page they were just on.) This field controls the sidenote next to the cvv2 entry when a customer is entering their credit card information. By default it is
Config_Credit_Card_CVV2_SideNotes
designed to notify the customer which credit cards require a cvv2 number to process. The Config_Credit_Card_CVV2_SideNotes allows you to add or make ammendments to this note as you see fit. This variable will activate the Issue Date field on the Credit Card
Config_Enable_Credit_Card_Issue_Date
information page. Find out from your gateway provider if this is a required field for your transactions. This field allows you to add sidenotes next to the Issue Number field
Config_Credit_Card_Issue_Number_SideNotes
the customer see's while they are entering their credit card information. This text will not be visible unless the variable This variable will activate the Issue Date field on the Credit Card
Config_Enable_Credit_Card_Issue_Date
information page. Find out from your gateway provider if this is a required field for your transactions. This variable will activate the Issue Number field on the Credit Card
Config_Enable_Credit_Card_Issue_Number
information page. Find out from your gateway provider if this is a required field for your transactions.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=14 (7 of 10)8/6/2007 6:13:52 PM
Configuration Variables - Volusion Manual
Activating this variable enables the field Account Type. The Account Config_Enable_Payments_CheckingAccountType
Type field is a dragdown which allows the customer to choose between CHECKING and SAVINGS when filling out their Electronic Check information.
Config_EnableAllowBackOrders
Allows product's to be ordered even through the product's "stock status" value is less than 1. When this variable is activated, the customer will NOT have the option of creating an account with an email/password login during checkout. In this case the customer would only be required to enter their Billing/ Shipping address information, Agree to Terms, and choose their
Config_EnableAnonymousCheckout_Forced
shipping and payment methods. Note: this variable overrides whatever selection you have made for Config_EnableAnonymousCheckout_Optional. If both are activated, the customer will still not have the ability to create a login account during checkout. When this variable is activated, the customer will have the option of placing an order without creating an email/password login. In this case
Config_EnableAnonymousCheckout_Optional
the customer would only be required to enter their Billing/Shipping address information, Agree to Terms, and choose their shipping and payment methods.
Config_EnableCoupons Config_EnableDifferentShipToAddress Config_EnableDisplayCartTax
Enables customers to use coupons for your store. Enables the option for customers to have a shipping address that is different from their billing address. Enables the display of sales tax on the customer's shopping cart. Enables the ability to sell gift wrap with your orders. This feature would enable a check box on the "ShoppingCart.asp" page directly below the grand total in the cart. Next to the text box it would say "Show gift options during checkout". If checked, when they proceed through checkout it would take them to an additional page which allows them to add gift wrap to certain items in the cart. They can also
Config_EnableGiftWrap
type a gift message, which your shipping department could include with each wrapping. You can specify the cost of gift wrapping each of your products using the field "GiftWrapCost" in the Products table. Some products of course cannot be gift wrapped, therefore if you leave the gift wrap field of these products blank it will not let them get gift wrap with those items. You cannot offer free gift wrapping, instead you must offer gift wrapping for 1 cent at least.
Config_EnableOrder_Comments
Enables the customer to enter notes into an order. This numeric field sets a maximum amount for your customers' order cost. If a customer tries to check out with a cart that totals
Config_MaximumTotalOrderCost
$100,000.00, and you have the Config_MaximumTotalOrderCost set to $20,000.00, the customer will see the message, "This online checkout system has a maximum order total of $20,000.00. If you'd like to place an order over this amount, please call or email us. Thank you."
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=14 (8 of 10)8/6/2007 6:13:52 PM
Configuration Variables - Volusion Manual
This numeric field sets a minimum amount for your customers' order cost. If a customer tries to check out with a cart that totals $12.00, Config_MinimumTotalOrderCost
and you have the Config_MaximumTotalOrderCost set to $15.00, the customer will see the message, "Your order must total at least $9.00 before you may proceed."
Email Variables Note: To find these variables select Email Variables while in the configuration variables page.
Variable Name
Description This is where bounced emails will go which are sent from the store. To create
Config_BounceEmailAddress
and manage store email accounts, go to http://cp.volusion.com and log in with your Volusion.com account. This field sets the email address that will be used by the system to notify you any time a new Affiliate is created for your store. For more information about
Config_EmailAddress_AffiliateNotification
Affiliates, check out this page of the Volusion Manual. To create and manage store email accounts, go to cp.volusion.com and log in with your Volusion.com account. The email address in this field will receive notifications about customers'
Config_EmailAddress_Billing
recurring billing status? If a customer's recurring payment is declined one month, you will recieve an email at this address to let you know. This field will populate the "From" email id of your store's outgoing emails. This
Config_EmailAddress_From
should be the address that you would like your customers to reply to if they are responding to a system email. This field tells the system where to send an email notification when a customer
Config_EmailAddress_OrderNotification1
places an order in your store. To create and manage store email accounts, go to http://cp.volusion.com and log in with your Volusion.com account. This field tells the system where to send an second email notification when a
Config_EmailAddress_OrderNotification2
customer places an order in your store. This field is useful if you have more than one administrator managing your store. To create and manage store email accounts, go to cp.volusion.com and log in with your Volusion.com account.
Config_EmailServerComponent
This field should remain set to VSMTP. This is the password for your bounced email account for News Letters.
Config_POP3_Bounced_Password
Config_POP3_Bounced_Server and Config_POP3_Bounced_Username must also be filled in. This is the bounced mail server which will be used to put bounced emails from
Config_POP3_Bounced_Server
your News Letters. Config_POP3_Bounced_Server and Config_POP3_Bounced_Username must also be filled in. and Config_POP3_Bounced_Username must also be filled in.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=14 (9 of 10)8/6/2007 6:13:52 PM
Configuration Variables - Volusion Manual
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=14 (10 of 10)8/6/2007 6:13:52 PM
Text/Article Management - Volusion Manual
Text / Article Management Article Management Navigate to Webmaster -> Website Text from the home page of your admin area. Almost all of the text on your website is contained within the Articles table, and can be edited with ease. The article system is currently divided into the following 2 tabs:
Article Group - PageText: An Article Group is a collection of articles throughout your website pages. All of the articles you see on this tab are used in key positions of the store. â&#x2014;? â&#x2014;?
The WebPage column shows you which page the article appears on. The SpotKey column describes where on the page the article is shown.
Note: You cannot make up your own article pages names or spotkeys; these are pre-existing naming patterns assigned by the developers. You should only edit the Article Body field, which is the actual text paragraph displayed on the page.
Article Group - Other: Any other articles you might want to have. None of these articles will show up on your store unless you directly link to them. You can view ANY article on your website by visiting articles.asp?id=123 where 123 is the ArticleID. For example:<a href="/articles.asp?id=123">Your Link Here</a> Therefore you can have unlimited pages on your website by utilizing this article system.
Note: The same idea applies to categories. You can have unlimited categories and use them as way to
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=15 (1 of 3)8/6/2007 6:13:53 PM
Text/Article Management - Volusion Manual
create unlimited pages within your site. For organizational purposes it is often best to use Categories / Sub-Categories for any custom text or HTML pages you would like to add to your site. You can also link directly to categories by visiting /searchresults.asp?cat=123 where 123 is the Category ID. Please see the section of this manual related to categories / subcategories for more information.
Article Group - Help: All of the articles which make up your Customer Help section. By default, your HELP section on the customer-side contains many questions and answers to help them shop on your website. You will want to edit these generic questions and answers to better apply to your specific business information & policies. Articles are also organized into categories, as defined in the Article Categories table. You will notice this clearly on the PageText tab, where you will see this page divided up by various headings as you scroll down.
How to locate the appropriate article using the FIND feature: When searching this long page for an article, always press CTRL+F on your keyboard (or in your browser go to EDIT -> FIND) which will pop-up the find dialog box. This will let you search the page and QUICKLY find anything you are looking for. http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=15 (2 of 3)8/6/2007 6:13:53 PM
Text/Article Management - Volusion Manual
For example, if you know the web page that you have seen text on, type in the name such as OrderFinished.asp and click Find Next button. It will take you down to the appropriate section of the page, and you can continue clicking the Find Next button to find multiple occurrences of text on the page. This functionality is actually a feature of your browser, not the software. Therefore, you can use this feature on any page of any website. If you are looking for an article you can always search for any word that you happen to know currently exists in the article. For example, if you see a paragraph on your website front-end that you want to change, and not sure where to go to change it, try going to the Manage Articles & Text page of your admin area, and use this FIND dialog box to search for a word. Let's say the paragraph you see on your front end is:As soon as your order ships, we will notify you via e-mail. You can also track your packages, review your orders, print invoices, and more... From the above paragraph, choose a word or phrase that is somewhat unique. For example, you could choose the phrase order ships. So, if you go to the Manage Articles & Text page and type order ships into the find dialog box, you will quickly find the article you are looking to edit.
How to edit an article: To edit an article, simply click on the article ID # located on the very left side of the appropriate article. This will open the article for editing.
How to link directly to an article: The syntax for linking to any article directly is: /articles.asp?id=123 where 123 is the Article ID. A complete HTML example of a hyperlink would be: <a href="/articles.asp?id=123">Your Link Here</a>
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=15 (3 of 3)8/6/2007 6:13:53 PM
Newsletters - Volusion Manual
Newsletters Send Newsletters Navigate to Marketing â&#x20AC;&#x201D;> Newsletters, from the home page of your admin area.
How to create a newsletter:
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=16 (1 of 5)8/6/2007 6:13:54 PM
Newsletters - Volusion Manual ● ● ● ●
Click the ADD tab at the top of the page to begin creating a new newsletter. Fill in the Newsletter Name field with a title for this newsletter. This is not displayed to the customer. Choose an Email Template. There is an existing one called EmailTemplate1.asp that is a simple email template with an un-subscribe link at the bottom. Choose who you want to send the e-mail to: Group
Description
All Email subscribers
All records in Customers table with EmailSubscriber set to Y. (By default, all customers are Email Subscribers until they unsubscribe.)
Only Customers
All records in Customers table with AccessKey set to C.
Only Affiliates
All records in Customers table with AccessKey set to P.
Only Administrators
All records in Customers table with AccessKey set to A.
Note: Newsletters do not get sent out to customers that have the option "Customer_IsAnonymous" checked.
● ●
● ●
●
●
●
Type a Scheduled Send Date for your reference as to when you plan to send it, and to look back in the future as to when you sent it. This is only for your reference. Fill in the Send Test Email To field with an email address to send a TEST email prior to sending it out. Note: This must be an email address that is registered in your customers table. Normally, you would not want to check the box labeled Include people who unsubscribed. Type an Email Subject, which will be the subject line of the email. In the Email Body (HTML version) you may type out your newsletter and include any fonts, graphics, links, images that you want. Any HTML code can be used. Note: Do NOT include any <HTML></HTML> or <BODY></BODY> tags, just begin with your paragraphs and content. You actually should follow this rule of thumb throughout the entire software. Fill in the Email Body (Text Only Version). This should be filled in with plain text only. No HTML. A very, very small percentage of people have their email settings to view text and no HTML, this is for them. So you will want to only use plain text here. Check the appropriate Newsletter # check box from 1 to 20 under the section titled Send to persons w/ the following interests only. By default everyone would be on Newsletter 1.
Click Add New Record at the bottom of the page to add this new newsletter. Make sure the radio button beneath the button is set to Add + View Record in edit mode, because the next step is to edit this newsletter...
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=16 (2 of 5)8/6/2007 6:13:54 PM
Newsletters - Volusion Manual
Preview / View Stats / Send the Newsletter: ● ●
●
Click on a existing Newsletter to edit it. At the top of the page, you will see a green box labeled Send / View Stats. Click the button Preview / View Stats. From this page you can preview the email. Another important thing to check on this page is the top of the page Quick Stats that lists how many emails have been sent. If 0 of 250 have been sent, this means it is going to send the newsletter to 250 customers. If this number doesn't look correct, go back to the previous page and verify that you are sending the newsletter to the appropriate group of customers. Next, click the Send Test Email Now button, which sends you an email to the email address you specified. Once you review the test email and everything looks good then you can continue on to the next step which sends all emails.
Note: If you are managing your own server, then, sending newsletters is dependent on the installation of the VSMTP component and a correct configuration / installation according to the instructions provided in the Volusion Components zip file provided to licensed version store owners. There is an Email Agent program that runs on the server to send bulk email newsletters. Please refer to the installation notes provided in the Volusion components zip file.
Tracking Newsletters: To view your success of newsletter campaigns you will want to return to the Preview page and look at the Quick Stats section of the page. This will show you how many people have opened the emails, how many bounced, etc.
If you would like to get very accurate detailed statistics on the success of your newsletters through to the point of tying together sales ROI, you will want to do the following: ● ●
●
Click on an existing newsletter to edit it. In the top right section of the page titled ROI Tracker > Newsletter you will see a TrackingURL. Use this TrackingURL throughout your newsletter, so anytime you have a link in your newsletter, make sure to use this TrackingURL. The only important parameter of the TrackingURL is the ?Click=123 part. So, if one of your hyperlinks in your newsletter links to a product or category page that already has query string parameters, you can add the &Click=123 parameter to it. Here are a few example links: ❍ http://www.yourdomain.com/?Click=123http://www.yourdomain.com/SearchResults.asp?Cat=1&Click=123 ❍ http://www.yourdomain.com/SearchResults.asp?Cat=7&Click=123 ❍ http://www.yourdomain.com/ProductDetails.asp?ProductCode=ABCXYZ&Click=123 To track your sales success, Go to Reports -> ROI Tracking from the home page of your admin area. . You will see the newsletter listed and you can track it's success along side all of your other advertising channels.
Personalizing the Email Subject and Body: You may personalize each email using the text $(FirstName) or $(LastName) in the subject or body of the e-mail. This text, which is case sensitive, will be automatically http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=16 (3 of 5)8/6/2007 6:13:54 PM
Newsletters - Volusion Manual
substituted with each customer's name prior to sending each email.
Creating Custom Email Templates: ● ● ●
●
You must login via FTP to your site. In the FTP account, navigate to the following directory of your website where all of your email templates are stored: /vspfiles/admin/emails/ Copy the existing EmailTemplate1.asp file and rename it. For example, MyNewEmail.asp. Edit this new file in your favorite HTML editor, and upload it back to the website via FTP. To use this newly created newsletter, simply choose it from th drop down menu list for the field Email Template. It will automatically get listed in the drop down menu list if it exists in the vspfiles/admin/emails/ folder on your site.
Note: To include an unsubscribe link in your e-mails, simply create a link to MailingList_unsubscribe.asp. You may also create a link, usually on your navigation menu or anywhere on your site that says Join our Mailing List, which you may link to the page MailingList_subscribe.asp. All customers who create an account at your store are automatically subscribed to your mailing list unless they un-check the newsletter sign-up check box during checkout. The newsletter opt-in check box that is checked by default during checkout, is located below the billing address on the one-page-checkout.asp page.
Handling Bounced Email: ● ● ●
Navigate to Settings —> Config Variables, click on the Email variables tab Fill in the following variables: Config_BouncedEmailAddress = (This is the email address that bounced emails get sent to. Make sure to create an email account prior to inserting an address into this field.)
The above variable is required.
Note: We suggest setting up an email address called bounced@yourdomain.com. And you can check this email account Inbox anytime.
However, if you would like your store to handle all bounced email and provide you statistics on the bounced email, fill in the following configuration variables as well: ● ● ●
Config_POP3_Bounced_Server = (This is the mail server such as mail.yourdomain.com) Config_POP3_Bounced_Username = (This is the username to login to your email account, this value is usually your full email address) Config_POP3_Bounced_Password = (This is the password to login to your email account)
If the above variables are filled in, it will allow the system to keep track of how many emails were bounced for each newsletter email campaign you send out.
Monthly Newsletter Limit
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=16 (4 of 5)8/6/2007 6:13:54 PM
Newsletters - Volusion Manual
Plan Bronze Plan Silver Plan
Limit 250 500
Gold Plan
2,500
Platinum Plan
5,000
Semi-Dedicated Standard
10,000
Semi-Dedicated Premium
15,000
Dedicated
15,000
Note: Please note that these limits are only for the newsletter and not for any order confirmation or system generated e-mails.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=16 (5 of 5)8/6/2007 6:13:54 PM
Discounts & Coupons - Volusion Manual
Discounts & Coupons Navigate to Marketing â&#x20AC;&#x201D;> Coupons / Discounts from the home page of your admin area Discount Type
Description
Percent off a product
Discount is applied as a percentage discount.
Percent off entire order
Discount is applied as a percentage discount on the entire order.
Dollar amount off a product
Discount is applied as a dollar amount discount. Multiplied per quantity.
Dollar amount off entire order
Discount is applied as a dollar amount discount on the entire order.
Free Shipping off an entire order
The order will not charge shipping
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=17 (1 of 3)8/6/2007 6:13:54 PM
Discounts & Coupons - Volusion Manual
How to create Quantity Discounts: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Set the discounts Name to something like: Quantity Discount Set the MinQty to your first price break. So if your price changes when 50 or more are ordered, then 50 would go into this field Set the MaxQty to end of the current price break. Set the DiscountType to Percent Off or Dollar Amount Off a product Set the DiscountValue to how much the discount is on this price break. Click Add + View New Record Repeat steps 1-6 and change the MinQty and MaxQty for each of your price breaks
Note: The discount name should be the same for all your price breaks. If you set up a new group of price breaks, then that group will have a different name.
To apply this set of Quantity Discounts to a product, do the following: http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=17 (2 of 3)8/6/2007 6:13:54 PM
Discounts & Coupons - Volusion Manual ● ●
Navigate to Marketing —> Coupons / Discounts, click on the DiscountAutoID to edit it Enter all of the product codes which should receive the discount in the ApplyToProductCode(s) field
How to create a coupon: 1. Set the Coupon Code to anything you want 2. Tell your customers what the coupon code is. They will be able to enter the Coupon Code on the shopping cart page during checkout to trigger the discount. For Example, to create a coupon for $5 off your order 3. Set the discounts Name to $5 off your order 4. Set the DiscountType to Per Order 5. Set the DiscountValue to 5 6. Set the Coupon Code to (for example, ABC123)
How to create a coupon for free shipping: 1. Set the discount type to “Free Shipping off a ENTIRE ORDER.” 2. Set the Coupon code to anything you want. 3. Then select “Save changes.”
Note: You cannot combine two coupons and/or discounts that discount a percentage off the entire order.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=17 (3 of 3)8/6/2007 6:13:54 PM
Gift Certificates & Store Credit - Volusion Manual
Gift Certificates To sell gift certificates, first make sure the configuration variable Config_EnablePriceEdit is enabled. This variable is located at Settings â&#x20AC;&#x201D;> Config Variables, in the home page of the admin area. To create a gift certificate, do the following: 1. Add a new product to the Products table with the Product Code field set to GFT 2. Enter 0.00 in the Product Price field 3. Place a check in the box for the field Allow PriceEdit under the "Advanced Options" section
Note: The information on these pages cannot be changed since it is built into the source code. The only thing that can be changed is the Gift Certificate image at the top left corner which can be done via FTP.
When a customer adds this product to their cart, they will be redirected to a page where they may enter the details of the gift certificate. The first page allows the customer the choice of e-mailing the gift certificate as a gift (directly to the recipient) or the customer may choose to have the gift certificate printed and mailed to themselves or the recipient.
If the customer chooses to send the Gift Certificate via email, they are given the following screen on what information they want in the gift certificate.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=18 (1 of 4)8/6/2007 6:13:56 PM
Gift Certificates & Store Credit - Volusion Manual
If the customer chooses to have the Gift Certificate printed and mailed to them or someone else, then they are given the following screen on what information they want in the gift certificate.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=18 (2 of 4)8/6/2007 6:13:56 PM
Gift Certificates & Store Credit - Volusion Manual
When the customer purchases a gift certificate, they may choose either one of the predetermined amounts in the drop down or enter their own amount. The predetermined amounts are $15.00, $25.00, $50.00, $75.00, $100.00 and $500.00. When processing an order for a gift certificate, the payment must be marked as received and then the administrator must click the Complete Order / Send Emails link under Quick Order Processing —> gift certificate will be sent to the recipient via email. If it is a printed gift certificate, a link will appear within the order and the administrator will print and mail the gift certificate to the buyer or the recipient.
Note: You cannot create your own product codes for Gift Certificates. Only GFT can be used as the product code for gift certificates.
How to View / Apply the Gift Certificate The customer may view their current remaining gift certificate balance by logging into their My Account manager and clicking View gift certificate balance. A gift certificate can be used by applying the gift certificate to their account. Once the gift certificate is applied to the account, it will automatically be used in any subsequent purchases made through that account. The customer may apply the gift certificate to their account in any of the following ways: 1. By entering the gift certificate code on the one-page-checkout during checkout. 2. By visiting their My Account manager and clicking on Apply a gift certificate to your account. 3. As an Administrator, you can apply the gift certificate to the customer's account by going to Marketing —> Gift Certificates and then entering their Customer ID number into the CustomerID field.
How to issue Store Credit You can issue a store credit to an existing customer's account using the following steps: 1. Go to Orders —> Orders 2. Look for the customer's order and then click on the Order ID to go into the details of the order 3. Scroll down to the Payment Log section of the order and click on << Show link to the right of Issue Store Credit
4. After clicking on << Show, the amount, email address and customer's name will automatically be filled in
Note: The amount, email and name fields can be changed. You do not have to give the customer a store credit for the full amount of the order.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=18 (3 of 4)8/6/2007 6:13:56 PM
Gift Certificates & Store Credit - Volusion Manual
5. Click the button that says Issue Store Credit / Gift Certificate to issue the store credit 6. If you leave the check box next to Send via Email Now selected, it will email the customer the store credit
Note: When you issue a store credit, it creates a gift certificate and is applied to the customer's account automatically. When the customer places another order, the store credit is applied to the order automatically.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=18 (4 of 4)8/6/2007 6:13:56 PM
Affiliate System - Volusion Manual
Affiliate System What is the affiliate system? The affiliate system allows you to pay people for referring traffic and sales to your website. For example, you could pay 10% commission. All you would have to do is give each affiliate an unique URL to direct traffic to, and the affiliate system will track all visitors through to the sale. Therefore, you can easily run a report to view the amount/commission each affiliate has earned so far. The affiliate can also login to their account anytime to view their statistics.
How to setup the affiliate system:
Navigate to Marketing â&#x20AC;&#x201D;> Affiliates and click on the Affiliate Settings tab From this page you will be able to setup the payout percentage rates on the total sales generated by the affiliate. The payout may reach 5 levels deep, based on one affiliate referring another affiliate. For example, each new affiliate is always at level 1. So, if level 1 payout percentage is set to 0.05, the affiliate will earn 5% of all sales he/she generates. If he/she refers another affiliate, that affiliate will become level 2, and the original affiliate will earn a percentage of sales generated by this new affiliate. If this new affiliate happens to refer another affiliate, the original affiliate AGAIN may collect a percentage of this new affiliates generated sales. This may continue up to 5 levels deep. Keep in mind that each new affiliate starts at his/her own level 1, whereas he/she can refer 5 levels deep as well which is explained as follows: http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=19 (1 of 4)8/6/2007 6:13:56 PM
Affiliate System - Volusion Manual
The Affiliate payout section of the affiliate area lists the parent ID for each affiliate. If the ID is 0 then the affiliate was the first person to sign up. If the parent ID is a different number then the person is signed up under that affiliate. For example, if Affiliate A signed up and was assigned ID # 2, his Parent ID is 0. If Affiliate B then signed up under Affiliate A, his ID would be # 3 and his Parent ID would be # 2. You may also set the Config_AffiliateMinimumCheck configuration variable to the minimum total earnings you require before you will generate and mail a check to the affiliate. For example, your policy might be a $25.00 minimum check, because you don't want to write checks for $2.00 each month, you'd rather wait until their check is worth mailing. If you create banner ads for your affiliates to use, simply upload them to: ● ● ●
(your templates images folder)/banners/banner1.gif (your templates images folder)/banners/banner2.gif (your templates images folder)/banners/banner3.gif
The default directory is (your store)/templates/1/images/banners/. The actual current location of your images can be found in the Settings --> Config Variables, the path stored within the <Config_ImagesFolder> field. EXAMPLE: /templates/1/images/banners/banner1.gif Banners can be any size. There is currently support for only 3 banners, as described above. You may upload the banners to your server via FTP.
How to edit the affiliate pages text: The affiliate sign-up process consists of the following 3 pages: 1. Affiliate_info.asp 2. Affiliate_signup.asp 3. Affiliate_thankyou.asp You may edit the text on all of the above pages by going to Webmaster —> Website Text from the home page of your admin area. Please note that the Affiliate_thankyou.asp page by default tells the customer to "please allow 24 hours for your account to be activated". This is actually not true, as their account is activated immediately. However, the reason this message is worded this way by default is to protect you, the store owner, and give you time to review their new registration and cancel it if necessary. If this is not a concern, feel free to change the message to say the following: "Thank you for becoming an affiliate, please click the 'My Account' link located in the top right corner of this website to login to your account. Once you've logged in, you'll see a 'View my affiliate page' link where you can download banner ads and track your success."
How the sign-up process works: http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=19 (2 of 4)8/6/2007 6:13:56 PM
Affiliate System - Volusion Manual
Customers may sign-up to become an affiliate at http://www.yourdomain.com/affiliate_info.asp. Once they sign-up, you will receive an e-mail notification at the address specified in the Config_EmailAddress_AffiliateNotification variable.
Note: No email is sent to the customer, only to the administrator
At this point, the customer is already in your system as an affiliate. You may then review the new affiliates account information, and if for any reason you do not want the customer to be an affiliate, you may cancel it by: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Navigate to Customers —> Customers Find the new affiliates customer record Edit the record by changing the Access Key from Partner (P) to Customer (C) You may also completely remove the affiliate account. Go to Marketing —> Affiliates from the home page of your admin area. Check the check box located at the right hand side of the record for the Customer's affiliate record and click Save Changes
Customers who are Affiliates also have access to an additional section of web pages in their My Account manager. These additional pages allow the customer to automatically generate banner ads, as well as view their current statistics and earnings. A customer can track total click-throughs generated, as well as how many of those clicks actually convert to sales.
How to give certain affiliates different commissions:
1. Navigate to Marketing —> Affiliates, and click on the Affiliate Payouts tab 2. You can edit existing affiliates and change their commission percentages, as well as how many days affiliates are tracked for. For example, 7 days to track, means that if a customer visits your website through an affiliate link, that customer's computer is tagged with that affiliate for 7 days. So, if the customer visits the website 3 days later and places an order, that affiliate will still get commission from the sale. If the customer returns on the 6th day and orders AGAIN, the affiliate will again get more commission. If the customer places an order again on the 8th day, the affiliate will no longer get any commission. However, if the customer does not directly visit your website thereafter, and for some reason the customer continues to visit the affiliates website and clicks on their affiliate URL every time they visit your website, then the affiliate will continue to get commission. Each time they click on the affiliate URL, the days to track is reset, for http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=19 (3 of 4)8/6/2007 6:13:56 PM
Affiliate System - Volusion Manual
example back to another 7 days.
Note: When entering the percentages an Affiliate should earn, the values must be entered in decimal format. So if you wanted level 1 to be 5%, then you would enter the value as 0.05.
How to pay your affiliates each month: 1. Navigate to Marketing â&#x20AC;&#x201D;> Affiliates, and click on the Pay Affiliates tab. 2. When you are ready to pay all the affiliates listed on this page, click the link print all checks for the selected period. 3. Enter the text to use as the date and memo sections of the checks, then click Print Checks. If you have the correct check paper, you may automatically print out the checks; otherwise you may just view the checks on-screen and write the checks manually. 4. After printing, or manually writing all checks, click Yes, I've successfully printed all checks. This will let your database know you have paid the balance amount to all affiliates.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=19 (4 of 4)8/6/2007 6:13:56 PM
Search Engine Optimization - Volusion Manual
How to become SEO Friendly Here at Volusion, we want to make sure your on-line business is a success! We have many great SEO tools built into our software and want to make sure you are taking full advantage of them. Now is the perfect time to make sure your website is optimized for search engines. With the latest Volusion e-Commerce Software, you have the tools.
TIP #1: Enable the SEO Friendly feature Navigate to Marketing â&#x20AC;&#x201D;> SEO, in the admin area and follow the steps on that page to enable this feature. If you have any questions on how to implement this, please contact technical support at 1-866-999-2808.
Note: Demo Versions of Volusion E-Commerce Software do NOT support this feature. Please do not enable this feature until you have signed up for a solution, as this feature requires changes to your hosting control panel.
TIP #2: Fill in the Meta Tags Fill in all the following fields in your database in order to maximize your potential of being listed high in the rankings: Fill in the three MetaTags fields on this page. These MetaTags will be used on all of the pages in which you have not yet specified MetaTags. Examples can be found on the SEO Optimization page right next to the text boxes.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=20 (1 of 5)8/6/2007 6:13:57 PM
Search Engine Optimization - Volusion Manual
Products Table: 1. Product Name Short — This field should contain the product name, however a shorter version than your Product Name field. This field is displayed on the home page of your website in the 3 right hand side Super Deal, Top Sellers, New Products sections. More importantly, it is displayed in the URL of your product pages if you have the SEO Friendly feature enabled as described in TIP #1. 2. Photo_AltText — A maximum of 2 to 3 words recommended. 3. Meta Tag Title — This could be the same thing as your Product Name or main keyword or keyword phrase. 6 words or less is recommended here. 4. Meta Tag Description — Short paragraph. A maximum of 2 or 3 sentences. 5. Meta Tag Keywords — List of keywords separated by commas. There is no need for more than 15 to 20 words here.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=20 (2 of 5)8/6/2007 6:13:57 PM
Search Engine Optimization - Volusion Manual
If you do not have time to fill in all these fields, it is recommended that you just copy your Product Name or main keyword into all the Meta Tag fields.
Note: If you DO NOT fill in all three Meta Tag fields, then no keywords will show up in your URL address. Also keep in mind that on each page you should not try to optimize for more than 2 to 3 keywords or keyword phrases.
Categories Table: 1. Link Title Tag - 2 to 3 words max recommended. This is also displayed in the URL of your product pages if you have the SEO Friendly feature enabled as described in TIP #1. 2. Meta Tag Title — This could be the same thing as your Category Name. 3. Meta Tag Description — Short paragraph. 2 to 3 sentences. 4. Meta Tag Keywords — List of keywords separated by commas.
Articles Table: 1. Meta Tag Title — This could be the same thing as your Category Name. 2. Meta Tag Description — Short paragraph. 2 to 3 sentences. 3. Meta Tag Keywords — List of keywords separated by commas.
TIP #3: Link to Category & Product Indexes Make sure you have a link in your footer to 'cindex.asp and /pindex.asp, which are the two files in your store that list all of your categories and products. This makes it easy for search engines to find all of the pages in your site. If you do not already have links in your footer to these files, here's some sample code which you can paste in your footer: <a href="/cindex.asp">Category Index</a> <a href="/pindex.asp">Product Index</a>
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=20 (3 of 5)8/6/2007 6:13:57 PM
Search Engine Optimization - Volusion Manual
You may also contact support@volusion.com to request one of our support reps to add these links to your footer.
Note: These links are already in the footer of all stores by default, you only need to add these links if they are removed.
TIP #4: Write good content Content is king. The more relevant content you have on your site the better. For example, if you can have many paragraphs for your Product Description that is one of the best things. Same for your categories, if you can type up at least a few paragraphs for your categories, you will have MUCH better success with the search engines. They have always liked lots of text paragraphs. And of course try to include your keywords as much as possible in them.
Do I have to submit my website to the search engines? If you have not done so already, yes. Search engines will find you eventually on their own if other sites link to you, but it does not hurt to give them a hand. Here are the two major search engines to submit to: Yahoo: http://submit. search.yahoo.com/ Google: http://www.google.com/addurl.html
Note: Our Knowledge Base also has information on submitting your product list to search engines. See the following on how: Google Upload and Other Uploads
So how long does it take to see results? The major search engines are crawling the web, and re-crawling websites non-stop. Once you are listed in the search engines, even if you are not ranked very high, the search engines will automatically re-crawl your website every so often. You may get lucky and have them visit your site the day after you make all your changes, or it make take 1-3 months. All of us webmasters simply have to be patient.
How do I choose good keywords? If you are trying to optimize your website text with good keywords, it is good to try and find out what the most commonly search phrases are. The following link will provide great tips for choosing good keywords: http://websearch. about.com/od/quicktipsandtricks/ht/keyword.htm
How do I learn more about SEO? There are many great resources out there to learn about search engine optimization. Two sites where you can learn a great deal about the subject and ask questions are: http://www.seochat.com and http://www.searchenginewatch.com http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=20 (4 of 5)8/6/2007 6:13:57 PM
Search Engine Optimization - Volusion Manual
Google Page Rank This has become one of the important aspects in getting high rankings in Google. Basically, the ranking system has to do with how many high quality and relevant sites link to your site. We recommend downloading the tool bar from Google, so you can see your ranking. In addition, by visiting the above mentioned sites you will be able to read more information on page ranking. Remember, things are always changing in the land of search engines, so you have to constantly educate yourself to stay ahead. Patience is also a good virtue to keep in mind, because getting high rankings can take time. Finally, be safe and err to the side of caution on any questionable strategies to get you to the top. Good Luck!
*NOTE: Because the Search Engines are constantly changing their ranking algorithms on a daily basis, it is impossible to know the best methods for search engine ranking; therefore this guide is provided for general information only, and does not constitute legal or professional advice.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=20 (5 of 5)8/6/2007 6:13:57 PM
B2B/Members-Only Site - Volusion Manual
B2B / Members-Only Site Members Only Websites Navigate to Settings â&#x20AC;&#x201D;> Config Variables, and enable the variable Config_EnableMembersOnlyWebsite Enabling this feature, requires all visitors to the store, to register before they are able to browse your database of products and services. Visitors are automatically redirected to the page Register.asp. This page contains a Quick Login box for returning customers as well as a complete registration form for new customers. You may allow free registration to any visitor, or you may charge a fee. To charge a registration fee, add a product to your database with the product code beginning with MEMBERSHIP-. For example, you can add a product with product code MEMBERSHIP-1. You may configure this product to be a normal one-time fee product, or you may setup this product to be a recurring fee. If you charge a fee, the customer's credit card information will be collected, and charged immediately upon submission of registration. All successful registrations are granted immediate access to your website. You also have the option of adding multiple membership choices, which will be presented as a dropdown menu on the registration form. For example: 1. MEMBERSHIP-1: Standard - Monthly - $19.95 2. MEMBERSHIP-2 : Premium - Monthly - $39.95 To change the text on the Register.asp page, use your Article Management system to edit the articles with PageName set to Register.asp. There are 2 articles on this page with the following SpotKeys: Register_Welcome and Register_NewCustomers.
Discounted Pricing Levels Navigate to Inventory -> Products, from the home page of the admin area, and click an individual product to edit. You will notice that there is a section titled Special Pricing Levels and a few fields titled DiscountedPrice_Level1, DiscountedPrice_Level2, ..3, ..4 and ..5. These fields allow you to specify a cheaper price than the normal pricing.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=21 (1 of 3)8/6/2007 6:13:58 PM
B2B/Members-Only Site - Volusion Manual
Here is an example of a pricing structure: Field
Description
Example Value
ProductPrice
Price available to any website visitor
$99.00
DiscountedPrice_Level1
1st level discounted rate.
$92.08
DiscountedPrice_Level2
2nd level discounted rate.
$80.31
DiscountedPrice_Level3
3rd level discounted rate.
$73.22
DiscountedPrice_Level4
4th level discounted rate.
$71.28
DiscountedPrice_Level5
5th level discounted rate.
$70.71
Note: The shopping cart will always give the customer the lowest price for the product. For example, if a product has a Product Price of $25.00, a Sale Price of $15.00 and a DiscountedPrice_Level1 of $20.00, the customer will get charged the Sale Price of $15.00 since it is the lowest price. Therefore if using the Discounted Pricing, these prices should be lower then the Product Price or Sale Price.
To assign a customer to a special pricing level:
● ● ● ●
Navigate to Customers —> Customers, from the home page of the admin area Click the CustomerID to edit an individual customer record From the Pricing Discount Level field drop down list, select a discount level and click Save Changes Now, you will want to advise the customer to login to their account before shopping. This way once they are logged in, they will see their lower discounted price on all products.
Store-wide Percentage Discount: For some customers you may want to simply give them an additional 1% off store-wide of anything they purchase, maybe they are one of your best customers. Here is how:
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=21 (2 of 3)8/6/2007 6:13:58 PM
B2B/Members-Only Site - Volusion Manual
● ● ●
●
Navigate to Customers —> Customers, from the home page of the admin area Click the Customer ID to edit an individual customer record You will see a field called Percent Discount. Type in a number such as 2 means they get 2% discount. If you were to type 2.5 means 2.5% discount. Now you will want to advise the customer to login to their account before shopping. This way once they are logged in, they will see their lower price on all products.
Quantity Discounts & Coupons with special pricing For some customers you may want to give them a special pricing level, maybe your wholesale cost. However, if you also have quantity discounts setup on this product, or are running other coupon sales, you may not have enough margin to give these additional discounts to customers who are setup on a special discounted pricing level. So to disable discounts for customers with special pricing levels, disable the configuration variable Config_EnableDiscounts_With_SpecialPricing.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=21 (3 of 3)8/6/2007 6:13:58 PM
Customizing Your Store - Volusion Manual
Customizing Your Store Click here if you would like to see a complete mapping of all the images used in Volusion's E-commerce Solution.
Uploading Your Logo A quick and easy way to brand your store in a professional way, is to upload your logo. ● ●
●
From the home page of the admin area, navigate to Design > My Logos Next to “Website Heading Logo” Select “Graphic” and browser for the image file on your computer. Click on “Save Changes.”
Website Heading Logo This is the image file that will be placed at the top of your page.
Why does my logo repeat across the top of my website? The logo you are referring to is the Website Headling Logo, which must be imprinted on a background which is 1600 pixels wide. We recommend that you go to the above mentioned “My Logos” page and scroll down just a bit where you will always see a sample image with NO logo on it, ready for you to download by right-clicking on it and choosing Save Picture As. This will allow you to save this blank background image to your computer, which you can then open in your favorite graphics editor and imprint your logo on top of it. Once you have placed your logo onto this graphic, just re-upload the graphic from this “My Logos” page.
Invoice Logo This is the graphic file that will be included in your store’s order confirmation e-mail to customers, as well as on receipts, invoices, POs sent to vendors and e-mail newsletters generated by the store. While this image does not have a fixed size, we recommend keeping the dimensions of this image within reasonable limits, as it will be included in customer e-mails, etc.
Changing Your Website Design Navigate to Design > Choose Template, from the home page of your admin area. http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=22 (1 of 3)8/6/2007 6:13:59 PM
Customizing Your Store - Volusion Manual
You may change the look and feel of your site by installing a new Template. A website design includes of all the graphics on your website, plus the color scheme of your website which includes many of the text colors and background colors on your website. Be aware that applying a website design will reset all of your custom changes back to the default of the template. You may get a new website design by: 1. having a web designer build one for you 2. downloading a design from the Volusion e-Commerce Design Gallery at http://www. volusion.com/DesignGallery. Your default website template is located in your store directory vspfiles/templates/1/. For more indepth guides on how to design your own template, visit http://www.volusion.com/university.
Navigation Menus Click Design —> Navigation Menu, from the home page of your admin area. If you have one of your menus set to rollover_colors_pop-out, that is the only time you will have to pay attention to the field titled Vertical Offset on this page. The determines the absolute positioned height of the JavaScript menu. The menu is designed to be compatible with only certain templates. If you are using the default Blue New Edge template the vertical offset should be set to 125. If you are using the Audio Gear template the vertical offset should be set to 154.
Customizing Your Template Note: Before customizing your template you should install the free template that best matches your desired layout. Using a template that is close to your layout will make the integration process much easier. To view your design files go to Design à Live Edit File Editor. Under design files you will see the different files that you need to make custom changes to your store’s template. The template. html file handles the header and footer sections of your site. It is also the file you would use to add additional navigation menus. You have the option of either creating static menus through editing the html of the template.html file and adding the correct links or you can have it pull the links dynamically from the store database. To add a dynamic navigation menu, first find the cell where you want it to be located. Once you have determined where its location will be, paste in the following line of code: <%Call catDisplayDDB("1","horizontal","rollover_colors","divider")%> Call catDisplayDDB is the ASP function that tells the page to load the navigation menu. ●
●
1 is the navigation menu that is being displayed. In this case it is pulling the first navmenu. Horizontal specifies the layout for the categories. You can select either horizontal or vertical.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=22 (2 of 3)8/6/2007 6:13:59 PM
Customizing Your Store - Volusion Manual
Currently, the Volusion software allows you to have up to eight separate navigation menus in your shopping cart but images are only available for the first two. Any images for additional navigation menus would need to be uploaded to the images directory for you template. The colors and fonts for each navigation menu are pulled from the color variables under Design Ă Navigation Menu, but that is only for the first 2 navigation menus. You will need to edit the . CSS files in your store to change the colors of the navigation menus you add yourself. To use a custom splash page that is completely separate from your store all you have to do is place the HTML code of your splash page to default.htm, which is available in the Live Edit File Editor. Note: In order to connect to your store you must have a link pointing to default.asp on your splash page.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=22 (3 of 3)8/6/2007 6:13:59 PM
Analytics & Reporting - Volusion Manual
Analytics & Reporting Store Statistics Navigate to Reports -> Financials, from the home page of your admin area. This page allows you to run a wide variety of real-time reports, all with the convenience of being able to drill down all the way to individual orders or products. For example, if you would like to view Orders by Year, month and date: ● ● ● ●
Click on the year 2006 to view a new report for 2006 Then, click on January to view all orders for month of January 2006 Click on the 18th to view all orders for January 18th, 2006 And finally, you can click to view each individual order for Monday, January 18th 2006.
The power of drill down allows you to validate & trust that your numbers are accurate for the report you are running. All information is real-time, showing 100% live data. For example, the instant you receive a new order, it will be part of the financial reports, if you include that time period.
How to generate a report: 1. Choose a report 2. Choose a time period (optional) 3. Choose what to group by (usually you will only want to group by one thing at a time)
Chart Format: You may choose to view your data in either a bar graph, or pie chart by clicking the appropriate icon in the top-right corner of the chart area. The charts only show the first 30 records of your data. So, if your reports returns more than 30 records, you will want to refer to the data grid below the cart for the remaining records.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=23 (1 of 5)8/6/2007 6:13:59 PM
Analytics & Reporting - Volusion Manual
FAQ If this report page shows less orders than running a report on the VIEW ALL orders section of the admin area, the discrepancy is due to two reasons. 1. This page uses an INNER JOIN on OrderDetails, which means if your orders have no products on them it will not include that order in the financials. 2. The second reason is that if you do not choose an Order Status for the report on this Financials page, then it automatically excludes Cancelled Orders.
ROI Tracking/Ad Campaigns Navigate to Reports -> ROI Tracking, from the home page of the admin area. The term ROI stands for Return On Investment. In this case the ROI Tracker allows you to keep track of all your advertising campaigns to keep track of the campaigns that are performing best in terms of total clicks and total sales, as well as the conversion rate.
ROI Tracking & Affiliate System: The ROI Tracker uses the same exact system as the Affiliate system. This system consits of two tables, Affiliates and Customers. Therefore, on this ROI Tracking page, you will view two columns on the left labeled A and C respectively. You will also see that the ROI Tracker displays both regular Affiliates, as well as Ad campaigns on this page. This helps you to clearly view all advertising channels from one screen. Any clicks that hit your website from your personal advertising, or from your affiliates, you can view it from here.
Note: Do not test out any of the links under the ROI tracking. If you click on or go to one of those links, it will put a cookie into your browser. Then if you run a transaction on the Phone Order page or your website, you will give credit to that affiliate or campaign for the sale.
The Other Campaign: There one other record on the ROI Tracking page called Other. This record is like a catch-all for clicks. Any clicks that hit your website that are not through a TrackingURL, meaning not from a personal advertising campaign, banner ad or an Affiliate, end up in the Other campaign record. If you click on the link titled Other, you will be able to drill down further and http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=23 (2 of 5)8/6/2007 6:13:59 PM
Analytics & Reporting - Volusion Manual
see the actual pages your visitors came from.
Linking From Google Appropriately: Clicks will only be recognized if you link properly. Lets say, you wanted to track how many customers clicked on your Google Adwords link and at the same time, for the customer to be taken to the home page. â&#x2014;? â&#x2014;?
Create the tracker using the Add button. You can name it anything you want as its for your reference. For example, google adwords
Once you create the ROI tracker, you will notice that an tracking url was generated in the following format: For example, http://www.yourdomain.com/?click=XNote: Click=X (X representing a customer ID number) So, what you would do is provide Google the link http://www.yourdomain.com/?click=X so that 1. the customer is taken to the homepage 2. the click is tracked into the right campaign
Note: The URL's used for the ROI tracking links only work with the Non-SEO URLs. In other words if you enable SEO friendly you must continue to use the asp pages for the ROI tracking. See the direct examples at the bottom of the ROI tracking for the correct format. These URLs will work regardless of whether SEO is enabled or not.
Installing Third-Party Tracking Scripts Please see the following related section in the manual: Installing Third-Party Javascripts
Custom Reporting Capabilities http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=23 (3 of 5)8/6/2007 6:13:59 PM
Analytics & Reporting - Volusion Manual
Custom reports can be generated in the following three ways: Report Generator: ● ● ● ●
Navigate to Reports -> Reporting, from the home page of your admin area. Choose "Custom," in the drop down menu next to "Choose your Report." Create your own custom SQL Query in the large text box. Select "Generate Report"
Note: Using this feature requires a strong knowledge of SQL programming. You could run any report you wish through this page which will allow you to pull any available information from the Volusion software.
Custom Saved Exports: ● ● ●
● ●
●
●
Navigate to Inventory -> Import / Export, from the home page of your admin area. Click Data Export Choose the Table you wish to export. Now choose the columns to export, and be sure to select a filetype to Export To such as CSV. Scroll down to the Export Later section of the page. Fill in the field under Save to QueryBank as with a name for your custom export. For example, My Custom Report 1 Click the Save to QueryBank button. You will be taken to the Saved Exports tab at the top of the page, where you will see your saved export queries, which you can access anytime. Now if you would like to really write a CUSTOM SQL QUERY / CUSTOM SQL REPORT you can click on the pencil icon to edit this query. By editing the query you can generate virtually any report you can imagine.
Note: Custom reporting requires a strong knowledge of SQL programming. So, once you have this saved query in your Saved Exports tab you can run it anytime by selecting the query, choosing the export to (i.e. CSV) and clicking the Export my data button on this Saved Exports page. Search, then Save to QueryBank: Let us take the Products table as an example. ● ● ● ● ●
●
Navigate to Inventory -> Products, from the home page of the admin area Click on the Search tab at the top of the page Type in the word sony in the Manufacturer field Scroll down to the bottom of the page and click the Search button This will pull up all products with a manufacturer of sony for example. So the point is that you just created a search on whatever you want, now you want to export this data. So to export the results of your search, do the following: Scroll to the right side of the page, above the results you will see Export to QueryBank as with a field to type in a name for your new saved export. Type in My Custom Product Export 1 for example.
Now to access your saved export query anytime, you can go to: http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=23 (4 of 5)8/6/2007 6:13:59 PM
Analytics & Reporting - Volusion Manual
Navigate to Inventory -> Import / Export, from the home page of your admin area Click the Saved Exports tab at the top of the page Remember that it is saving the query, not the results. Therefore let us say you add another 25 products made by SONY. Well, if you go to the Saved Exports page and do that one-click export to CSV for example, it is going to pull up the CURRENT list of sony products in your database. That's the whole power of saved exports!
Note: Sometimes you may have to re-create your saved exports. For example, after upgrading your store to a newer version, if any field names in the databases have changed, it may cause your saved export to error out. Therefore you would have to re-create your saved export.
Accessing Your Site Statistics 1. Go to cp.volusion.com 2. Use your login username and password to the control panel. Choose the domain from the drop down list, if you are hosting more than one domain with us. 3. In the Choose section drop down list, select Stats. The Home Page is the first thing you will see when logging into your site's statistics. SmarterTools has organized some of the most useful metrics into the home page for quick reference. Data displayed is for the last 7 days. ●
● ● ●
● ●
Views and Visits - The number of page views that have happened on a daily basis along with the total number of visits Bandwidth Usage (KB) - The total amount of bandwidth used per day Top Pages - The top 10 pages that have been hit on your site in the last 7 days Top Referrers - The top 10 sites that referred people to your site. It is not unusual to see your own domain near the top of the list Search Engines - The top 5 search engines that referred people to your site Top Search Phrases - The top 10 search phrases that referred people to your site
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=23 (5 of 5)8/6/2007 6:13:59 PM
Importing/Exporting - Volusion Manual
Click Here to view our Training Video covering the Import/Export section
Importing / Exporting Exporting Data 1. Navigate to Inventory â&#x20AC;&#x201D;> Import / Export, in the home page of the admin area. 2. Click Data export 3. Choose a table, for example, Products(18). The number next to the table name indicate the total number of records in the table. 4. Choose the columns you wish to export by clicking the appropriate check boxes, for example ProductCode (TEXT : 30). Next to each column name, the data type for that field is indicated. For example, (TEXT:30) means the value entered in the field must be of text data type and a maximum character length of 30.
Note: Some tables have column names encapsulated in a box titled Virtual Columns. ** Virtual Field - The data is created on the fly and does not actually exist as a field in the database, therefore usually cannot be imported back in. When you export the virtual columns, the export system is building this data on-the-fly from a variety of tables.
5. Choose the type of file you wish to export to. The most common type is CSV (comma separated values). This type of file can be opened and edited with Microsoft Excel, or any other spreadsheet software. A CSV file can also be imported into Microsoft Access. The CSV format is the most widely supported format across all software, new & old versions. 6. Click the Export my data button. The page will take a moment to generate the file, the page gets refreshed and will provide you with a link to download the file.
Saved Exports You also have the option to Export Later. To utilize this feature, follow the steps above, but http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=24 (1 of 3)8/6/2007 6:14:00 PM
Importing/Exporting - Volusion Manual
on step 6, type in a name for your export, such as My Product Export, and click the Save to QueryBank button.
Note: The Global check box means the query will be available to all administrators. If you un-check this box, the query will only be available to your admin account.
After saving your export, you will be taken to the Saved Exports tab, where you will see your export listed. Now, anytime you wish to do this export, just return to this tab, and do the following: 1. Click the radio button of the saved query you would like to export. 2. Choose the type of file you wish to export to. 3. Click the Export my data button.
Importing Data Navigate to Inventory â&#x20AC;&#x201D;> Import / Export, in the home page of the admin area. Click Data Import. Importing data is as simple as taking a standard CSV spreadsheet of data, and renaming the columns to match those of Volusion's database. We recommend the following steps to accomplish this task: 1. First use the admin area to add a few records to the table you wish to import. Let us take the Products table as an example. We recommend that you use the admin area to add at least 5-10 products first. Be sure to test the configuration of those products and ensure from the front-end of your store that those products look exactly the way you would like them to be displayed. 2. Navigate to Inventory â&#x20AC;&#x201D;> Import / Export, in the home page of the admin area. Click Data Export and export all fields of the Products table. 3. Now that you have done an export of the data, it will make it easy to use this sample file as a template for importing data. You can either copy the data from your old spreadsheet into this new spreadsheet (which we recommend) or you may re-name the columns of your old spreadsheet to match up with the column names you see in this new spreadsheet.
Common Importing Problems: 1. 1. Often in a spreadsheet you will not notice that there are extra columns and rows that are blank, however the spreadsheet software such as Microsoft Excel, considers their blank value to be a text value. To ensure you have a clean spreadsheet please take the following steps: http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=24 (2 of 3)8/6/2007 6:14:00 PM
Importing/Exporting - Volusion Manual
Scroll to the right of your spreadsheet to the first empty column with no column name. Click on the top of the column to select the entire column. Hold the SHIFT key and click at least the next 10 columns or so. Now that you have these columns selected, right-click in that selected area and click Delete. Do not hit the DELETE key on your keyboard, as that will NOT do the same thing. â?? Scroll to the bottom of your spreadsheet to the first empty rows with no data. Click the left side of this row to select the entire row. Hold the SHIFT key and click at least the next 10 rows or so. Now that you have these rows selected, right-click in that selected area and choose Delete. Do not hit the DELETE key on your keyboard, as that will NOT do the same thing. 2. 2. File must be generated on a PC, Macintosh is not supported. The reason is that Macintosh uses a different set of characters for line breaks than a PC. 3. 3. The data types and field lengths are important to consider. For example, if a field only allows 30 characters of TEXT, you may only import up to 30 letters, numbers, or other characters. However, if a field is of INTEGER type, you may only import numbers, up to the number 30,000. Please refer to the Data Export to see what the data type constraints are for each field. â??
Importing Product Photos For bulk importing photos, try our Automatic Thumbnail Generator located at http://www. volusion.com/support/KB_Article.asp?ID=60 This tool will rename and resize all of your photos
(thousands at a time) and with one-click. It will create the required thumbnails, named appropriately and ready to upload via FTP to your site. There is no field in the products table that specifies the photo paths, but rather the photos must simply be named appropriately. That is what this automatic thumbnail generator takes care of.
Note: The import / export section is compatible with Internet Explorer version 6 or higher and with Fire Fox version 1.5 or higher.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=24 (3 of 3)8/6/2007 6:14:00 PM
Using the WYSIWYG - Volusion Manual
Using the Easy Editor The Easy Editor is a tool that allows you allows you to create HTML code without any prior experience.
Inserting Photos 1. click the Easy Editor button next to whichever field you wish to edit. 2. The Easy Editor will pop-up with your data. Now click to place your cursor wherever you want your photo to appear, THEN click the image icon:
3. This will open the following window:
4. You can either select an image that is already on your site from the box labeled File Name or you can choose to upload a new one by using the Upload Image field. If you choose to upload http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=25 (1 of 3)8/6/2007 6:14:01 PM
Using the WYSIWYG - Volusion Manual
a new image, click on the Browse button to find the image on your computer. Once you have found the image click Open and then Upload. 5. When you are done uploading an image click the Insert Button then Save changes on the Easy Editor window. 6. After the Easy Editor window closes REMEMBER to Save changes on the product window thereafter.
Note: When referencing images uploaded by the Easy Editor, we recommend prefixing the path in the "Source:" field with a single forward slash (" / ") — i.e., " EasyEditor/assets/sample.jpg " should be " /EasyEditor/assets/sample.jpg "
Creating Hyperlinks To create a link, click on the External Link button:
After you click on the button the hyperlink box will then pop up.
The first drop down allows you to select the protocol you would like to use for the link. The following options are available: ● ● ● ● ●
http://-- used to link to another page in your website https:// -- used to link to another page in your website through a secure connection mailto:// -- used to open up a new mail window on the customers screen ftp:// -- used to link to an ftp site for a file download news:// -- used to link to a newsgroup article
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=25 (2 of 3)8/6/2007 6:14:01 PM
Using the WYSIWYG - Volusion Manual
Note: If you are linking to a page within your website we highly recommend that you leave this box blank. Using http:// when trying to access a page once a site is using the secure certificate can cause errors.
Once you have selected the protocol you would like to use you can then enter the destination of the link in the second text box. The target drop down allows you to designate where you want the link to appear at. ●
● ●
Self opens the link in the current window. If you are using frames on the page then it will open the link in the frame that contains the link. Blank opens the link in a new browser window. Parent opens the link in the parent browser.
If you are using frames then it will open the link will open in the browser and not use the designated frame set. If you had the link in a pop-up then the link would open in the window that the pop-up came from. The Name field allows you to specify what is actually displayed on the screen. If you had a link to contact_us.asp and you wanted the link to say Contact Us then you would enter that in the Name box.
Formatting Text Most of the features in the Easy Editor are for formatting text. The tools available allow you to specify font, color, size, and indentation.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=25 (3 of 3)8/6/2007 6:14:01 PM
Quickedit Toolbar - Volusion Manual
Using the QuickEdit Toolbar The QuickEdit Toolbar is a feature available for use only in the storefront and not the admin area. To use this toolbar, hover over the QuickEdit Toolbar icon on the top right corner of the home page in your storefront area. This will open a page which displays all relevant configuration variables and sections of the admin area that are related to the page you are viewing. The contents displayed within the toolbar changes every time you click to a new page within your website. The toolbar helps you find relevant sections of the admin area and quickly edit your website. There are three QuickEdit Toolbar screens and they appear at the following locations on your store front: 1. Home Page 2. All Category Pages 3. All Product Pages Home Page QuickEdit Toolbar:
Category QuickEdit Toolbar:
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=26 (1 of 3)8/6/2007 6:14:02 PM
Quickedit Toolbar - Volusion Manual
Product QuickEdit Toolbar:
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=26 (2 of 3)8/6/2007 6:14:02 PM
Quickedit Toolbar - Volusion Manual
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=26 (3 of 3)8/6/2007 6:14:02 PM
Installing Live Chat - Volusion Manual
Installing Live Chat Installing Third-Party Javascripts There are hundreds of services that you can use in collaboration with your store. The following are some third-party services you might signup for: ● ● ● ● ●
Hit Counter / Web Statistics ROI Tracker / Web Analytics Live Chat Trust Logo / Partner Seals Affiliate Systems
Whatever service it might be, the company will always provide you with one or two chunks of javascript code. One chunk might be for the tracking functionality which can be placed anywhere on the footer.asp page. And the other chunk is usually a graphical icon, such as a Click to Chat button, or a logo graphic for example.
Tips for installing live chat code: Generally, the chat software always has a button which must be placed in the code where you would want to display the button. You can place ALL of the code provided by the thirdparty into the same spot, regardless if they instruct you to place the code in 2 different spots. Tips for installing stats code: Normally, you will want to place all of the stats code at the very end of the footer, right before the </body> tag.
How to install ROI Tracking software: Normally, Return On Investment (ROI) tracking software requires that you place special code on the final page of the checkout process. Here are some variables you can use if your ROI tracking software requires some variables: ●
$(CustomerID)
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=27 (1 of 3)8/6/2007 6:14:03 PM
Installing Live Chat - Volusion Manual ● ● ● ● ●
$(OrderNo) $(SubTotal) $(ShippingCost) $(SalesTax) $(GrandTotal)
You may use the above variables in any article on OrderFinished.asp. Therefore, if you go in your admin area to Webmaster -> Website Text and then look in the WEBPAGE column, you can use the above variables in any article that is on the webpage OrderFinished.asp.
Note: These variables may ONLY be used in an article. They are not ASP variables.
So, if you have a javascript provided by your Statistics / Conversion Tracking provider, paste the javascript into the body of the following article: ● ●
Webpage: OrderFinished.asp Spotkey: PreText
As mentioned above, if your javascript requires some parameters such as the Grand Total amount of the order, you may use the above mentioned variables. For example, before the article is displayed on the page, it simply replaces the text $(GrandTotal) in your article with the $ amount 74.95.
Troubleshooting Secure SSL problems related to third-party scripts: It is very common to install a third-party script on your website, and then have a security alert box popup every time someone visits your website in secure SSL mode. This issue is due to the fact the most third-parties will provide you with script designed for the non-secure environment. But because your website is a store, that must be secure, you must obtain the SECURE version of the javascript. Please contact the company who provided the script and request a version of the script that works in a secure SSL environment. Once you are obtained and installed the secure version of your script, you may test it by doing the following: 1. Remove the script from your website completely. 2. Visit your website securely by visiting https://www.<yourdomainname>.com instead of
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=27 (2 of 3)8/6/2007 6:14:03 PM
Installing Live Chat - Volusion Manual
http://www.<yourdomainname>.com. In other words, add the 's' to the URL and see if your website pulls up fine without any alert popup boxes. 3. If everything is fine, THEN install your new script. 4. Now visit your website again securely and check to see that there are still no alert popup boxes. If not, everything is great! If there are alert boxes, please contact your script provider to ensure they provide you with an appropriate SSL version of the script. For more details troubleshooting SSL alert boxes, please see the following related section of this manual: Security > Troubleshooting SSL Alert Boxes
Encryption Password Navigate to Settings -> PCI Policies, from the home page of your admin area, to set the Encryption Password. You may set your Encryption Password only when you first setup your store, before you open for business. This password is used by the system's encryption algorithms. This password will never be needed by a person, it is only used by the system as an added security measure. The password is important to your system, however as mentioned above, you cannot change it after you have received lots of orders. If you have not changed the password, it is using the default encryption password, which is fine.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=27 (3 of 3)8/6/2007 6:14:03 PM
Security - Volusion Manual
Security Administrator Access Levels Navigate to Customers â&#x20AC;&#x201D;> Administrators, from the home page of your admin area.
Note: The administrators are simply Customer accounts with the Access Key field set to Administrator. By default, regular customers have their Access Key set to Customer. All Customers and Administrators records are stored in the Customers table in the database.
SuperAdmin Accounts There is one more field in the Customers table that is related to Administrators, and that field is called IsSuperAdmin. A Super Administrator has full access to everything. Your store must always have at least one SuperAdmin account. By Default, Customer Id # 1 is set as the Super Administrator.
Employee / Limited Access Admin Accounts 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Click to edit any existing customer record. Set the field IsSuperAdmin to N or un-check the check box to disable it. Set the field AccessKey to Administrator(A). Click Save Changes and be sure the radio button below the save changes button is selected as Save + View Record. You should now see a link below the Access Key field that says Edit Cust#123 Access Rules. Click this link to edit the Access Rules for this administrator. You can use this Access Rules page to grant or deny access to any area of your store.
SSL Certificates SSL Certificates are required for any e-commerce website accepting payments online. SSL provides a secure communication between the http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=28 (1 of 3)8/6/2007 6:14:04 PM
Security - Volusion Manual
customer's computer and the web server. Each website (domain name) must have it's own SSL certificate. SSL Certificates are available in 64bit or 128bit. 128bit is more secure, however both are very strong and either will suffice. To purchase an SSL Certificate, you must contact your hosting company....
If you are hosting with Volusion, please follow these steps: 1. Purchase your SSL certificate online from http://www.volusion.com/ssl_certificate.asp. From volusion.com you have the option to purchase a Volusion brand SSL Certificate, or other popular brands including Verisign & Thawte. 2. The Volusion staff will process your order within 7 business days and install the certificate for you.
If you are hosting with another hosting provider: 1. Contact your hosting provider to have them purchase and install the SSL Certificate for you. 2. Login to your admin area, navigate to Settings —> QuickSetup page. 3. Scroll down and check the box of the field SSL Installed. Note: You can only check this box AFTER the certificate has been installed.
To verify that an SSL is installed on your website: 1. Go to the home page of your website(storefront). 2. Change the address bar in your browser to include https rather than just http. For example, if your website is http://www. <yourdomainname>.com then go to https://www.<yourdomainname>.com. If your site comes up at all, then your SSL is installed. 3. Whenever you are in secure mode you will see a LOCK icon in the right side of the address bar and in bottom right corner of your browser. You may double click the icon to view the details of the SSL certificate including the expiry date.
Enabling the SSL Security Seal: The https and lock icon are both required to verify a website is secured by SSL. However, you can also advertise the fact that your site by displaying an SSL Seal graphic on your website... 1. Navigate to Marketing —> Nav Menu Promotions, from the home page of the admin area. 2. Find the appropriate pre-installed SSL Seal from the list, click to remove the check mark from the Hidden check box field to display the seal in your store front. By removing the check mark, you are causing the navigation menu promotion to be displayed on your website, usually on the left side below your navigation menu.
Troubleshooting SSL alert boxes If you have installed any third party scripts on your website, such as tracking JavaScripts, this is the most common cause of a security alert box popping up on your website when visiting your site securely. To determine the cause of the problem, try the following in order until the alert box is gone: 1. Remove any third-party JavaScripts from your website. 2. Do a view source on your website and then hit CTRL+F on your keyboard to pop-up the FIND dialog box. Search for http:// and go through each occurrence. On each occurrence you will need to evaluate if the occurrence is a possible cause of a security alert. The following are the ways to determine this: ❍ If the occurrence consists of a hyperlink such as <a href="http:// then it is OK. ❍ If the occurrence consists of an image source such as <img src="http:// then it is NOT ok. This would cause an alert box. ❍ If the occurrence consists of a background image source such as background="http:// then it is NOT ok. This would cause an alert box. 3. If the occurrence consists of a JavaScript source such as <javascript src='http:// then it is NOT ok. This would cause an alert box. If you find the occurrences above that are NOT ok, you will need to change them to https:// if that is an option depending on whether or not the server in reference supports SSL. If the server in reference happens to be the same URL of your website, you do NOT need to have an absolute path to your website, you will want to use a relative path for all images and hyperlinks. For example:
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=28 (2 of 3)8/6/2007 6:14:04 PM
Security - Volusion Manual ● ●
An absolute URL is: (aka absolute path) http://www.mydomain.com/mypage.asp A relative URL is: (aka relative path)/mypage.asp
Both of the above examples (absolute & relative) link to the same exact place. Therefore, you should always use the relative path when linking between pages and files within your own website. Never use the absolute path. Relative path has NO drawbacks, and is recommended for the following additional reasons: ● ●
There will never be a problem between SSL and non-secure modes. You can change your domain name anytime and never have to change your hyperlinks.
Encryption Password Navigate to Settings -> PCI Policies, from the home page of your admin area.
You may set your Encryption Password only when you first setup your store, before you open for business. This password is used by the system's encryption algorithms. This password will never be needed by a person, it is only used by the system as an added security measure. The password is important to your system, however as mentioned above, you cannot change it after you have received a considerable number of orders. If you have not changed the password, the default encryption password will be used, which is fine.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=28 (3 of 3)8/6/2007 6:14:04 PM
Updates & Upgrades - Volusion Manual
Updates & Upgrades Update Your Store From Version 4 to Version 5 1. Check the version of the store's software you are currently using. This is displayed in the home page of your admin area at the very top. Make sure that your store is at least 4.0 2. Navigate to Webmaster â&#x20AC;&#x201D; Maintenance, from the home page of your admin area. 3. There will be a link to click on to automatically update your store if an update is available. 4. Follow the instructions for your chosen update method. Please note: We recommend reading the information on Preparing to Upgrade to V5 before actually upgrading. After installing most updates, you will need to do a Database Upgrade on your store: 1. Your store will be automatically Closed for maintenance when you transfer the updated files to your server. 2. Go to the home page of your admin area and click the refresh button of the browser. 3. At the top of this page you should see a box saying Your store is currently closed, CLICK HERE to upgrade your database. Go ahead and click that link. 4. On the next page, click Yes, upgrade my database now. The upgrade could take just a few minutes or it could take a few hours, depending on how long it has been since you have last updated your store, the size of data in your database, and how many changes were made in the version you downloaded.
Closing Your Store For Maintenance 1. Navigate to Design â&#x20AC;&#x201D; Maintenance Tools from the home page of your admin area. 2. Click on the Close My Store button. This allows you to temporarily close your store, which displays the following message on all pages of your website:
Thank you for visiting. We are currently performing scheduled maintenance and updates on the website. We will be back online to serve you within 15 minutes to an hour. Thank you for your patience! http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=29 (1 of 3)8/6/2007 6:14:05 PM
Updates & Upgrades - Volusion Manual
From the same page you may click the Open Store button to re-open your store.
How to Increment OrderIDs, PO numbers, RMA numbers, and CustomerIDs: When you first go live with your store, you will want to increment your OrderIDs and CustomerIDs to begin at around 1000 or higher, since by default all ID numbers begin at 1. If your first few customers place an order and receive OrderID # 2 for example, they may get suspicious and concerned about being only the 2nd customer. Furthermore, if you are moving from another shopping cart system, you will want to begin OrderIDs about where they left off from the old shopping cart. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Navigate to Design â&#x20AC;&#x201D; Maintenance, from the home page of the admin area. Click the Close my Store button Click the link Auto-Increment current OrderID numbers. Now from this page you will be able to increment the 4 table IDs mentioned.
Note: Once you change these numbers you cannot revert back. Once you increment up to a certain number there is no way to revert to an earlier state.
How to remove test orders from the store: 1. Navigate to Design â&#x20AC;&#x201D;> Maintenance, from the home page of the admin are. 2. Click the "Close my store" button. You should now see additional options under the Maintenance Toolbox. 3. Click the link "Remove past orders / delete sensitive data 4. Select Orders check box and then choose the date to use for deleting orders. The system will delete orders that were last modified on or before that date 5. When ready, click the "Delete All Data Now" button"
Note: Please be aware that this process permanently deletes the data. Once the data is deleted, there is no way to retrieve it from the system.
Upgrading your store database to SQL Server http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=29 (2 of 3)8/6/2007 6:14:05 PM
Updates & Upgrades - Volusion Manual
1. 2. 3. 4.
Navigate to Design â&#x20AC;&#x201D;> Maintenance, from the home page of your admin area, Click the Close my Store button. You should now see a Maintenance Toolbox. Click the link How to upgrade from MSAccess to SQL Server database. Follow the instructions on this page.
This upgrade will keep all your existing data from your MSAccess database, and copy it into your SQL database. It is important to follow the instructions on the above mentioned page, which basically describes how to use the Microsoft Access Upsize Wizard tool to upsize to create and populate the SQL Database. This is the only upsize method that is supported. Please note that using the SQL Server Enterprise Manager Import tools are NOT supported due to the differences in the way it attempts to upsize the data, it would cause errors when attempting to run your store.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=29 (3 of 3)8/6/2007 6:14:05 PM
Hosting & Email - Volusion Manual
Hosting & Email Accessing the Hosting Control Panel To access your hosting control panel, please contact customer support for the appropriate URL, as it differs depending on when you signed up for your account. Normally, it is http://cp.volusion.com. Note:
Setting up Email Accounts 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Go to http://cp.volusion.com Under Choose Your Section select "Email" in the drop down list, and then select Go. Select Mailboxes and fill out the username and the password. The username will be the first part of your email. Select Add Mailbox and you are done. If you need to add additional emails, repeat steps 3 and 4.
Once you have added your email accounts using the control panel, you will need to setup your computer to download email. At least 90% of people use Microsoft Outlook or Outlook Express. Outlook Express is free and included with all versions of Microsoft Windows. To download the LATEST version of Outlook Express simply download Internet Explorer 6 from http://www.microsoft.com/ie/ Microsoft Outlook (not express) is included with Microsoft Office software, however is not much different. One great thing about Microsoft Outlook 2003 is the built-in spam filter, which is actually very efficient and accurate in blocking spam. We have seen it block at least 50% of spam. To add an e-mail account, you will need the following information: Your Incoming mail server. Which is usually mail.YourDomainName.com. As well as your Internet Service Provider's (ISP) outgoing mail server name. You will also need to have you username and password to connect to your Incoming and Outgoing mail server. For the incoming (POP3) information, Volusion support can assist you. However, for the outgoing (SMTP) information, please ask your Internet Service Provider for this information. Note: Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) is the company to which you pay for DSL / Cable / Dial-up access. All ISPs provide SMTP connectivity as a free service. Some ISPs even REQUIRE you to use their SMTP servers as opposed to any others.
Setting up Outlook XP/2003: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
On the Tools menu, click E-mail Accounts. In the E-Mail Accounts dialog box, click View or change existing e-mail accounts. Click the Add button. Select the POP3 radio button selection and click next. Then enter Your Name, E-mail Address, Incoming mail server, Outgoing mail server, User Name & Password. If your outgoing mail server requires authentication then click on the More Settings button, then click the Outgoing Server tab. Another great idea is to click on the Advanced tab and check the box labeled Leave a copy of
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=30 (1 of 5)8/6/2007 6:14:06 PM
Hosting & Email - Volusion Manual
messages on the server and Remove from server after 10 days. 6. Click next / finish to complete.
Note: Each user can create multiple e-mail accounts by repeating the procedure above for each account.
Setting up Outlook Express: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
On the Tools menu, click Accounts. In the Internet Accounts dialog box, click Add. Select either Mail to open the Internet Connection Wizard Insert the Name you wish to use as your Display Name. Click Next. Enter the E-mail Address that you want people to reply to. Click Next. Set the My incoming mail server is a drop down to POP3. Your Incoming mail server will be mail.yourdomain.com. You will need to contact your Internet Service Provider for your SMTP (outgoing mail server) settings. Click Next. Then insert your Account Name (which would be your FULL email address -- including domain name) and your Password. Make sure that the Remember Password is checked. Click Next. Click Finish. After completing this wizard, go to the Tools menu, click the Mail tab. Double-click on the account you just created, then click the Advanced tab. Click Leave a copy of messages on server and Remove from server after 10 days.
Note: Each user can create multiple e-mail accounts by repeating the procedure above for each account.
Setting up the CRM System: In the admin area of the store, navigate to Customers â&#x20AC;&#x201D;> CRM system. Settings up Departments: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Next, you need to setup your departments. At the top right gray area labeled "Additional CRM Sections", click on Manage Departments link. Next, click the ADD tab Fill in both the Private_Name and Public_Name fields with the name of your department such as Orders.
5. After filling in the Private_Name and Public_Name fields, click Add New. Repeat this until all departments are created. http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=30 (2 of 5)8/6/2007 6:14:06 PM
Hosting & Email - Volusion Manual
POP3 Accounts: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Once all departments are created, click on POP3 Settings at the top right under the "Additional CRM Sections" area. Next, click ADD to create your POP3 Accounts so that the CRM can pull the emails in. Enter in the Email Address you want to connect to the CRM. Then enter the Username of the Email Address.
Note: If Volusion hosts your emails, then the Email Username will be the same as the Email Address.
5. Enter the password for the email address into the Email Password field. 6. For the Email Server field, this should be set to mail.yourdomain.com (where yourdomain is the domain name of your website). 7. In the Ticket Type field, select one of the departments that you created.
The Email Reply Footer field is optional, but allows you to put a message at the bottom of the emails you send out. The Auto-Reply Subject and Auto-Reply Body fields http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=30 (3 of 5)8/6/2007 6:14:06 PM
Hosting & Email - Volusion Manual
allow you to have an automatic reply sent to the customer verifying to them that you received their email. If you click on the
icon next to those fields and you will see
default examples that you can use.
Setting up CRM Inbound Rules Inbound Rules allow you to tell the Volusion software what to do with certain emails when they are received in the CRM. ● ●
From the home page in your store administration, navigate to Customers > CRM System > Inbound Rules Select Add and you will see a empty Inbound Rule record. ❍ The ID_CRM _Inbound_Rules will be automatically assigned once add the record. ❍ Select Field , this field will tell the CRM which field in the ticket to look at when taking a action. ■ From email: Allows you to specify a rule based on the email address ■ Subjectline: Allows you to specify a rule based on the content in the subject line. ■ Body: Allows you to specify a rule based on the content within the body of the ticket. Select Operator : This field will tell the CRM how to look at the variables. ■ Begins With: Tells the CRM to look at the beginning of the field you select. For example, if you selected "subjectline" for Field you can select the "Begins With" operation to have the CRM only look at the characters at the beginning of the subject line of the email. ■ Ends With: Tells the CRM to look at the end of the field you select, like "Begins with" but it will look at the last set of characters instead of the beginning. ■ Contains: Tells the CRM to look at the field you select that contains any of the variables you specified. ■ Equals: Tells the CRM to look at the whole field that contains the EXACT variables you will specify. ❍ Fill out Value: This is what to search for in the email in order to make a match. For example, if you wanted to create a rule based on the email address, you would input the email address into this field (make sure the Field you select is set to "From Email") ❍ Select Action: tells the Volusion software what to do with the ticket. ■ MovetoDept: Tells the CRM to automatically move the ticket into a specified department. ■ Delete: Tells the CRM to automatically delete the ticket. ■ Close: Tells the CRM to automatically close the ticket. ❍ If Action is set to MovetoDept, then specify the department here. When you are finished, select Add New and you have created your rule. ❍
●
Connecting via FTP Connecting to your website via FTP is rarely necessary since your administration area allows you to do almost everything. Some things that require FTP are: ● ● ●
Uploading photos in bulk. Customizing the graphics / replacing existing images on your site. Customizing some HTML code such as CSS, or some e-mail templates.
Using Internet Explorer to connect via FTP: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Open Internet Explorer. In the address bar type in your domain name but preceding it with ftp:// instead of http://. For example, ftp://www.youdomain.com When the Log On As box pops up, enter your username and password in to the corresponding fields. Then click on the Log On button.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=30 (4 of 5)8/6/2007 6:14:06 PM
Hosting & Email - Volusion Manual
If you are having trouble connecting and it seems that Internet Explorer is hanging, you will most likely need to adjust a setting in your browser. Go to Tools menu and choose Internet Options. In the Internet Options dialog box click the Advanced tab. Now either check or un-check the box labeled Use Passive FTP. Some firewall configurations may require this enabled, some may require it disabled.
Using SmartFTP to connect via FTP: If you are not able to get Internet Explorer to connect via FTP, you can use any other FTP client. SmartFTP is a free client available for download here: http://www.smartftp.com/ get/SFTPFull.exe?nomap
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Open SmartFTP In the Address field insert your sites FTP address. For example, www.yourDomainName.com Enter your Username into the Login field and then enter your Password into the Password field Push the Enter key on your keyboard You can double click on any folder to progress a level deeper into you site To transfer files you can drag and drop them from your desktop to the corresponding folder.
Click here for SmartFTP Tutorials
Accessing Your Site Statistics 1. Go to http://cp.volusion.com, http://cp.webhostxp.com, or http://cp2.volusion.com. 2. Login to the control panel. Select your domain from the Choose your domain drop down list. 3. Select Stats from the Choose section drop down list, and click Go. This will log you in to the home page of the SmarterStats Professional Edition 3.1.2181 which provides a breakdown of the most commonly viewed statistics. The welcome / home page displays site statistics from the previous 7 days, if available.
Note: Currently customers that were originally using Webhost XP are unable to access the Smarter Stats tool
4. Once you have Smarter Stats installed the statistics page will provide a link for you to access this tool along with any necessary login information.
Note: There is no extra charge for this feature.
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=30 (5 of 5)8/6/2007 6:14:06 PM
Shipping Resources - Volusion Manual
DHL Resources (formerly Airborne) http://www.dhl-usa.com
● ● ● ● ●
Purchase DHL supplies DHL Services Calculate DHL Rates Calculate DHL Delivery Time DHL package tracker
Track DHL Package
Fedex Resources http://www.fedex.com
● ● ● ● ● ●
Purchase Fedex supplies Fedex Services Calculate Fedex Rates Calculate Fedex Delivery Time Get Fedex Ship Manager software Fedex package tracker
Track Fedex Package
UPS Resources http://www.ups.com
● ● ● ● ● ●
Purchase UPS supplies UPS Services Calculate UPS Rates and Delivery Time Get UPS WorldShip UPS WorldShip Support Documents UPS Online® Tools Tracking
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=31 (1 of 2)8/6/2007 6:14:07 PM
Shipping Resources - Volusion Manual
Track UPS Package
US Postal Service (USPS) Resources http://www.usps.com http://www.endicia.com
● ● ● ● ● ●
Purchase USPS supplies USPS Services Calculate USPS Rates and Delivery Time Get Endicia Software - USPS desktop shipping software Endicia Support USPS package tracker
Track USPS Package
Yellow Freight Resources http://www.myyellow.com
● ● ● ●
Yellow Freight Services Calculate Yellow Freight Rates and Delivery Time Yellow Freight Support Yellow Freight package tracker
http://manual.volusion.com/pdf_version/display-pages.php?id=31 (2 of 2)8/6/2007 6:14:07 PM
Payment Collection - Volusion Manual
Payment Collection Call us today: 1-800-646-3517
●
online store builder
●
web design
●
merchant accounts
●
ssl security
●
marketing
●
24x7 support
●
ecommerce 101 ●
Contact Us
●
Volusion Manual
●
Knowledge Base
●
Support Forums
●
Training Videos
Search edit this page
Go
sections ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ●
1. Quick Start Guide 2. Knowledge Base 3. Installation 4. Using the Admin Area 5. Payment Collection 6. Shipping Calculation 7. Tax Calculation 8. Categories & Subcategories 9. Products & Inventory 10. Products Options 11. Vendors & DropShipping
Payment Collection Payment Methods Navigate to Settings -> Payment in the home page of your admin area. The Payment Methods table contains all the available payment methods you currently accept. To activate/enable a payment method, check the PaymentMethod Active check box or leave it blank to disable it.
Note: DO NOT DELETE PAYMENT METHODS. If you delete an existing payment method, you will NOT be able to re-enter it.
http://manual.volusion.com/Payment-Collection/5.htm (1 of 7)8/6/2007 6:14:08 PM
Payment Collection - Volusion Manual ● ● ● ●
● ● ●
● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
12. Placing Orders 13. Processing Orders 14. Configuration Variables 15. Text/Article Management 16. Newsletters 17. Discounts & Coupons 18. Gift Certificates & Store Credit 19. Affiliate System 20. Search Engine Optimization 21. B2B/Members-Only Site 22. Customizing Your Store 23. Analytics & Reporting 24. Importing/Exporting 25. Using the WYSIWYG 26. Quickedit Toolbar 27. Installing Live Chat 28. Security 29. Updates & Upgrades 30. Hosting & Email 31. Shipping Resources
Additional payment methods may be added if needed. All the payment methods are listed in the Payment Method drop down list on the onepage-checkout page during customer checkout. There are currently three payment method types, which trigger form fields to appear during the checkout process: 1. Credit Card - Triggers (1) Credit Card Number, (2) Expiration Date, (3) Name on Card, (4) CVV2 2. Electronic Check - Triggers (1) Checking Account Type, (2) Check Number, (3) Routing Number, (4) Account Number, (5) MICR 3. Purchase Order Number - Triggers (1) Purchase Order Number The following configuration variables also allow for flexibility on the above form fields: Config Variable
Description
Examp
Enable_Payments_CVV2
Enable collection of CVV2 (Credit Card Security Code)
Y
EnableCreditCardValidation
Enable validation of credit card numbers. Tests for valid number sequence, does not send to gateway for funds verification.
Y
Enable_Payments_CheckingAccountType
Enable collection of Checking Account Type.
Y
Enable_Payments_CheckNumber
Enable collection of Check Number.
Y
Enable_Payments_MICR
Enable collection of MICR from electronic checks.
Y
The following Payment Method types require that you edit an associated article: For example, if you enable the Check By Mail payment method, You'll need to: 1. Navigate to Webmaster -> Website Text, from the home page of the admin area 2. Scroll down to the Order Finished section of the page, according to the chart below PaymentMethodType
Article WebPage
http://manual.volusion.com/Payment-Collection/5.htm (2 of 7)8/6/2007 6:14:08 PM
Article SpotKey
Payment Collection - Volusion Manual
Cash
OrderFinished.asp
Cash_Instructions
Check by Mail
OrderFinished.asp
CheckByMail_Instructions
Money Order
OrderFinished.asp
MoneyOrder_Instructions
PayPal
OrderFinished.asp
PayPal_Instructions
Purchase Order Number
OrderFinished.asp
PurchaseOrder_Instructions
Wire Transfer
OrderFinished.asp
WireTransfer_Instructions
Very Helpful Hint: When searching this long page for an article, press CTRL+F on your keyboard (OR, in your browser, go to EDIT -> FIND) which will open the find dialog box. This let's you search the page and QUICKLY find anything you're looking for. For example, in this case you happen to know the SpotKey according to the chart above, so type in CheckByMail_Instructions and click the Find Next button. It will take you down to the appropriate section of the page, and you can continue clicking the Find Next button to find multiple occurrences of text on the page. This functionality is actually a feature of your browser, not the software. Therefore, you can use this on any page of any website. If you're looking for an article where you do not know the SpotKey, you can always search for any word that you happened to know currently exists in the article. For example, if you see a paragraph on your website front-end that you want to change, and not sure where to go to change it, try going to Webmaster -> Website Text page of your admin area, and use this FIND dialog box to search for a word. For example, let's say the paragraph you see on your front-end is: As soon as your order ships, we will notify you via e-mail. You can also track your packages, review your orders, print invoices, and more... Choose a word or phrase that is somewhat unique. In the above example, you could choose the phrase order ships as an example. In the Webmaster -> Website Text page, type order ships into the find dialog box, you will quickly find the article you're looking to edit.
PayPal To enable PayPal as an available payment option for your customers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Establish a new PayPal account using this link (It's FREE!): https://www.paypal.com/mrb/pal=RLBPZS2DJBXTC Click Settings -> Payment Method from the home page of your administration area Click on the Payment Method ID to edit the PayPal payment method Enter the Primary email address for your PayPal Account in the PaymentMethod_SpecialValue1 field Check the PaymentMethodActive field to enable it, click Save Changes
Note: PayPal is different than a normal merchant account in the fact that the customer is sent to PayPal's website to make his/her payment, whereas with a merchant account the customer NEVER leaves your website to submit payment. Also the PayPal does not require that the customer finish payment, as a customer can choose to abandon even after they are redirected.
After the order is placed, it creates the order in Volusion and then once the customer completes the order on PayPal, a notification is sent to your Volusion Order. In order for this to occur, the primary email address on your PayPal account must be entered as noted in Step 4 above in the setup on Volusion. http://manual.volusion.com/Payment-Collection/5.htm (3 of 7)8/6/2007 6:14:08 PM
Payment Collection - Volusion Manual
Google Checkout To setup Google Checkout go to: ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Go to http://checkout.google.com/ and register. Login to Google checkout and go to integration, Check the check box for “Shopping cart post security”. In the API Callback URL text box enter: HTTPS://WWW.YourDomainName.COM/net/WebService_Google_Checkout.aspx Collect your Merchant ID and Merchant Key. Login to the admin of the Volusion store and go to Settings > Payment > and select “click here to configure Google checkout.” Paste in Merchant ID and Merchant Key. Setup Google Shipping Rates by selecting “Add” and filling out all of the required fields.
When the customer places a order through Google Checkout a order record will be created as the customer is taken to the Google site to complete the order. Once they complete the order, Google will send all of the relevant order information to the order within the Volusion store, populating the order. If the order is not completed in Google Checkout, the order’s information will not be filled out. Any payment transactions that are made need to be done only through Google Checkout. Once the payment transaction is complete, Google will automatically update the order in the Volusion admin.
Setting Up Your Merchant Account & Gateway Your store communicates with a payment gateway, such as Authorize.net for example, and the gateway communicates with your merchant account bank. Therefore your store software only needs to know the connection settings for your gateway. Navigate to Settings —> QuickSetup in the home page of your admin area . Scroll down to the Payment section where you may: 1. Choose your Credit Card Gateway Name from the dropdown menu 2. Fill in the required fields Click the instructions link on the bottom right side of the credit card gateway name drop down list. You will find instructions on How to test your credit card gateway transactions as well as the Transaction types Supported for your gateway.
http://manual.volusion.com/Payment-Collection/5.htm (4 of 7)8/6/2007 6:14:08 PM
Payment Collection - Volusion Manual
TESTING YOUR GATEWAY: Make sure to test your credit card gateway settings to ensure the configuration is working. Following are the steps to test your gateway settings: 1. We recommend that you first contact your gateway to ensure your account is NOT in test mode. 2. Navigate to Settings â&#x20AC;&#x201D;> QuickSetup from the home page of your admin area. Choose the option I'll do everything at shipping as the Authorization Mode. This way the credit card will not be charged until you click the Receive payment button in the order detail page, after the order has been placed 3. Next, place a test order on your website for the cheapest product you sell - a $1.00 product would be great 4. During checkout, we recommend using a real credit card 5. After placing the order, login to your admin area. Navigate to Orders -> Orders, click on the OrderID of the order you just placed 6. In the green colored Payment Log section of this page, click on the Receive button to attempt to charge the credit card. If the charge goes through successfully, it will show in the Payment Log here as DEBIT with all of the related transaction numbers. If the charge does NOT go through, it will show in the Payment Log as DECLINED, which means you did not receive any funds from the card. When a card is declined, you'll see the complete details of why it was declined with an error message displayed at the top of the page 7. If you get an error message at this point, you should double-check the gateway settings in the QuickSetup page. If you need assistance from our support department at this point, please COPY THE COMPLETE ERROR DETAILS that are shown when you try to charge the credit card, and send those details in an e-mail to http://manual.volusion.com/Payment-Collection/5.htm (5 of 7)8/6/2007 6:14:08 PM
Payment Collection - Volusion Manual
support@volusion.com to our support department for assistance
ECHECKS: You'll also notice some fields on this QuickSetup page for an eCheck gateway, which is only valid if you've signed up for electronic check acceptance with your merchant service. This is always a separate service. eCheck gateways allow you to accept check information online and receive funds online without requiring the customer to mail you the check for deposit.
LINKPOINT GATEWAY SPECIFIC VARIABLES: If you're using the LinkPoint gateway, there are some additional configuration variables to check.
NOTE: All configuration variables are preceded with "Config_", although for space-saving purposes, they've been omitted from the display below. Config Variable
Description
Example Value
Credit Card Gateway PaymentGateway_CreditCards_LinkPoint_Host
LinkPoint Host - The http address of the linkpoint servers.
PaymentGateway_CreditCards_LinkPoint_KeyFile
LinkPoint KeyFile - If you've installed your PEM file in C:LinkPoint123456.pem (where 123456 is your storeID), leave this variable blank.
PaymentGateway_CreditCards_LinkPoint_KeyPath
LinkPoint KeyPath - If you've installed your PEM file in C:LinkPoint123456.pem (where 123456 is your storeID), leave this variable blank.
PaymentGateway_CreditCards_LinkPoint_Port
LinkPoint Port (provided in your welcome e-mail from LinkPoint).
123456
Electronic Check Gateway PaymentGateway_Checks_LinkPoint_Host
LinkPoint Host
PaymentGateway_Checks_LinkPoint_KeyFile
LinkPoint KeyFile - If you've installed your PEM file in C:LinkPoint123456.pem (where 123456 is your storeID), leave this variable blank.
PaymentGateway_Checks_LinkPoint_KeyPath
LinkPoint KeyPath - If you've installed your PEM file in C:LinkPoint123456.pem (where 123456 is your storeID), leave this variable blank.
PaymentGateway_Checks_LinkPoint_Port
LinkPoint Port (provided in your welcome e-mail from LinkPoint).
123456
About Volusion | Contact Us | Sitemap | Partner with Volusion | Policies | Ecommerce Manual | Ecommerce Resource | My Account
Š 1999-2006 Volusion, Inc. All Rights Reserved. http://manual.volusion.com/Payment-Collection/5.htm (6 of 7)8/6/2007 6:14:08 PM
Payment Collection - Volusion Manual
Powered by Volusion Shopping Cart Software.
http://manual.volusion.com/Payment-Collection/5.htm (7 of 7)8/6/2007 6:14:08 PM
Categories & Subcategories - Volusion Manual
Categories & Subcategories Call us today: 1-800-646-3517
●
online store builder
●
web design
●
merchant accounts
●
ssl security
●
marketing
●
24x7 support
●
ecommerce 101 ●
Contact Us
●
Volusion Manual
●
Knowledge Base
●
Support Forums
●
Training Videos
Search edit this page
Go
sections ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ●
● ● ● ●
● ● ●
1. Quick Start Guide 2. Knowledge Base 3. Installation 4. Using the Admin Area 5. Payment Collection 6. Shipping Calculation 7. Tax Calculation 8. Categories & Subcategories 9. Products & Inventory 10. Products Options 11. Vendors & DropShipping 12. Placing Orders 13. Processing Orders 14. Configuration Variables 15. Text/Article Management 16. Newsletters 17. Discounts & Coupons 18. Gift Certificates & Store Credit
Click Here to view our Training Video covering the Categories section
Categories & Subcategories Categories and subcategories can be displayed in many unique ways. The purpose of categories is to help the customer find the products they want quickly and efficiently by categorizing your products into various categories and subcategories. You can also assign a single product to multiple categories. Navigate to Inventory —> Categories, to ADD categories
PARENT/CHILD RELATIONSHIP: The category system works with a parent/child relationship:
Each main category has a ParentID of 0 Each sub-category has a ParentID defined as the CategoryID of the parent category The following example explains how to create a main category Footwear, and sub-categories for Footwear:
http://manual.volusion.com/Categories-Subcategories/8.htm (1 of 7)8/6/2007 6:14:10 PM
Categories & Subcategories - Volusion Manual ● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
19. Affiliate System 20. Search Engine Optimization 21. B2B/Members-Only Site 22. Customizing Your Store 23. Analytics & Reporting 24. Importing/Exporting 25. Using the WYSIWYG 26. Quickedit Toolbar 27. Installing Live Chat 28. Security 29. Updates & Upgrades 30. Hosting & Email 31. Shipping Resources
● ● ● ●
In the above example, Sandals, Shoes and Boots are the first set of sub categories. Each of these should have the ParentID defined as 35 Sandals does not have any further sub categories The next set of sub categories are Cross-Training, Walking,Running, Basketball and Tennis. These should have the ParentID defined as 39 The next set of sub-categories are Suede and Leather. These should have the ParentID defined as 36
Edit mode/Drag and Drop mode When you first go to the category table viewer you will see the full category tree of your store. You will be able to see your main categories, with the associated sub-categories listed underneath. If you are visiting this page for the first time you will automatically be in “edit mode.” You will be able to change the name of your category or view the record details of the category to make specific changes. If you select “Drag and Drop mode,” you will be able to move the categories around with your mouse cursor. This will allow you to quick change sub categories to other main categories, or to move main categories under a different navigation menu.
Easy mode If you switch to easy mode you will see a list of your main categories. Easy mode only allows you to quickly change the names of your main categories. It will not allow you to show subcategories, and you can only add new categories that are selected to be on the first navigation menu. Note: If you wish you view your categories in the same fashion as the regular table viewer, you can select “view all,” while in Edit/Drag and Drop mode.
CATEGORY VISIBLE: The Category Visible drop down list has multiple purposes: 1. It can be set to Hidden to temporarily disable the category 2. It may define where a main category will be displayed 3. It may define the style/layout of how a category is displayed Value
Displayed on...
1st Nav Menu
Main website navigation menu
2nd Nav Menu
Second navigation menu, usually titled Quick Links by default
3rd Nav Menu
Additional support for more navigation menus. (Not supported in most templates)
4th Nav Menu
Additional support for more navigation menus. (Not supported in most templates)
5th Nav Menu
Additional support for more navigation menus. (Not supported in most templates)
6th Nav Menu
Additional support for more navigation menus. (Not supported in most templates)
7th Nav Menu
Additional support for more navigation menus. (Not supported in most templates)
8th Nav Menu
Additional support for more navigation menus. (Not supported in most templates)
http://manual.volusion.com/Categories-Subcategories/8.htm (2 of 7)8/6/2007 6:14:10 PM
Categories & Subcategories - Volusion Manual
(Hidden) To link to a photo gallery, you must have a link on your website which follows the format /SearchResults.asp?Cat=17, whereas 17 is the category of your photo gallery. A photo gallery is not for the purpose of selling products, but only for displaying photos with descriptions
Photo Gallery
CUSTOMIZING CATEGORY DISPLAYS: Each of your categories may be displayed in a unique way. The sub categories page layout can be changed through the two SubCategory DisplayMode fields. The display of the products can be changed through the following mentioned Display_... and SHOW... fields. You may add custom text on each category page through the Category Description field. Here are the list of fields and their descriptions: Field
Description
Product Display Mode
Defines how the products are laid out on the page. For example, in the standard single rows or in a grid
Category Description SHORT
Short description used in SubCategory DisplayMode 2, Thumbnails displaymode only
Category Description
Description of this category displayed near top of page.
SubCategory DisplayMode1
Defines how the first subcategory listing is displayed. Either at the top of the category page or on the left side of the category page.
SubCategory DisplayMode2
Defines how the second subcategory listing is displayed. This optionally appears in the center of the page with optional use of subcategory graphics
Display Columns
Number of columns of products to display
Display Rows
Number of rows of products to display
Display Featured ProductsOnly
Setting this field to Y hides the next and previous buttons. This is useful for encouraging the customer to click a subcategory
List Price - Show it?
Shows the list price of products
Sale Price - Show it?
Shows the sale price of products
You Save - Show it?
Shows the You Save: $ amount of products
Stock Status - Show it?
Shows the stock status of products
Availability - Show it?
Shows the availability of products
Description SHORT - Show it?
Shows the short description of products
Description - Show it?
Shows the description of products
CATEGORY GRAPHICS: You can also customize your categories by using custom graphics for each of your categories. You can upload these custom graphics via the Upload New Images. You can upload two different graphics for each category. To upload a new graphics file: 1. Click on the Upload New Images link on the upper left-hand corner of the category's EDIT tab page 2. Click on the browse button and locate the file on your computer, click on the file to select it, click OK 3. Click the Upload my Images button, and your image will show up under the existing images section on the upload page. The upload page will automatically rename the graphic file as follows, but will not resize the photo: Graphic Name
Example
Description
(CategoryID).jpg
35.jpg
A large graphic displayed at the top of your category display page
(CategoryID)-T.jpg
35-T.jpg
A small graphic used on the parent category's display page for the listing of subcategories in SubCategory DisplayMode 2
CATEGORY ORDER: The Category Order field allows you to specify the order in which a category will appear when it is listed with other categories. If you do not specify an order, or if two categories are assigned the same CategoryOrder value, the default order is alphabetical. Lesser numbers will be displayed before greater numbers. http://manual.volusion.com/Categories-Subcategories/8.htm (3 of 7)8/6/2007 6:14:10 PM
Categories & Subcategories - Volusion Manual
The order of the navigation menu by default is listed in alphabetical order. If you wish to use a manual order, you must do the following: ● ● ●
Click Inventory —> Categories Click the View All tab. Enter any number in the Category Order field for each category to define the order in which the categories will be displayed on the navigation menu. Lower numbers will be displayed before greater numbers.
Customizing the visual display (EXAMPLE #1)
http://manual.volusion.com/Categories-Subcategories/8.htm (4 of 7)8/6/2007 6:14:10 PM
Categories & Subcategories - Volusion Manual
SubCategory DisplayMode1
SubCategory DisplayMode 2
A display of all the subcategories. Go to the EDIT category page and set the field SubCategory DisplayMode 1 to Top, Left Side or None (Hide). Related Fields: Table
FieldName
Example Value1
Example Value2
Categories
SubCategory Displaymode1
Top
Left
A display of all the subcategories. You may have
Category Description Text to describe
DataName
two simultaneous subcategory listings, which are configurable using the fields SubCategory
This image
DisplayMode1 and SubCategory DisplayMode 2.
is being
(For more examples of this, see the next example in
pulled from
this tutorial.)
this subcategory.
this
Related Fields:
category and a
Table
FieldName
Categories
SubCategory Displaymode 2
DataValue general
Config_Colors_Lines_Light
CCCCCC
overview of
Config_Colors_BackgroundLight
BEDFFF
the type of
Config_Colors_BackgroundNeutral
EEEEEE
items found in this
Related Graphics:
category.
SearchResults_SubCat_Angle.gif
You may
Bullet_SubCategory.gif
also use
Config_Colors_Lines_Light
HTML in
Config_Colors_BackgroundLight
this field to
Config_Colors_BackgroundNeutral
add any type of content you
http://manual.volusion.com/Categories-Subcategories/8.htm (5 of 7)8/6/2007 6:14:10 PM
Category Thumbnail Image
To upload a
Example Value1
Example Value2
thumbnail
Thumbnails
Category Graphics
subcategory,
for the go to the EDIT
Related Configuration Variables:
category
DataName
DataValue
tab page for
Config_EnableYouAreHere
Y
that subcategory
Related Graphics:
and click
SearchResults_SubCat_Angle.gif
"Upload
Bullet_SubCategory.gif
New Images"
Customizing the visual display (EXAMPLE #2)
Categories & Subcategories - Volusion Manual
Product Display Mode
wish, such Category asGraphic more
This area displays all of the products in this
imagery,
category. Be aware that if a category has
text,An
subcategories, this category will pull products
image promotions,
assigned to this category PLUS any products
etc. used to
assigned to any subcategories.
brand the
Related Fields: Table
FieldName
Example Value1
Categories
Product Display Mode
Single Rows
category Example Value2
with a
Grid
look &
custom feel. To upload
Related Graphics:
this
buttons/btn_go_gray.gif
graphic,
buttons/btn_nextpage.gif
go to
buttons/btn_nextpage.gif
the
Bullet_MoreInfo.gif
EDIT
divider_bgr.gif
category
Grid_Divider_Vertical.gif
page
Grid_divider_bgr.gif
and click the "Upload New Images" link
Navigation Menu Promotions SubCategory SubCategory DisplayMode DisplayMode Note: Navigation menu links are controlled by the Categories table. Navigation menu promotions are an additional way to insert customized links and promotions into your navigation menu. 1 2
http://manual.volusion.com/Categories-Subcategories/8.htm (6 of 7)8/6/2007 6:14:10 PM
Another
Another
In order to add unlimited flexibility to your navigation area, we've created the Specials table. You may
example of
example of
add promotional messages such as Save over 30% during December only!. Let's take a look at some
displaying
displaying
of the things you can do...
subcategories.
subcategories.
To enable this
To enable this
display mode,
display mode,
go to the
go to the
EDIT
EDIT
category tab
category tab
Categories & Subcategories - Volusion Manual
page and set
page and set
the field
the field
SubCategory
SubCategory
DisplayMode
DisplayMode
1to Left Side
2 to Category Graphics
Creating a text promotion with link to an article: ld
Example Value
SpecialTitle
Super Sale!
SpecialDescription
Save up to 30% during December only!
SpecialLink
http://www.yahoo.com
BgColor
Red (or you may use HTML Color Codes such as 0000CC)
Page
ALL
Side
L
Special Order
25
The above nav menu promotion example will be displayed below the main navigationmenus, but above the Quick Links Menu. This is because the SpecialOrder field is set to 25. The existing navigation menu items havethe following pre defined order placemarks: Search box = Position 10Nav Menu 1 = Position 20Nav Menu 2 = Position 30
About Volusion | Contact Us | Sitemap | Partner with Volusion | Policies | Ecommerce Manual | Ecommerce Resource | My Account
Š 1999-2006 Volusion, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Powered by Volusion Shopping Cart Software.
http://manual.volusion.com/Categories-Subcategories/8.htm (7 of 7)8/6/2007 6:14:10 PM
Products & Inventory - Volusion Manual
Products & Inventory Call us today: 1-800-646-3517
●
online store builder
●
web design
●
merchant accounts
●
ssl security
●
marketing
●
24x7 support
●
ecommerce 101 ●
Contact Us
●
Volusion Manual
●
Knowledge Base
●
Support Forums
●
Training Videos
Search edit this page
Go sections ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ●
● ● ● ●
● ● ●
● ●
● ● ●
1. Quick Start Guide 2. Knowledge Base 3. Installation 4. Using the Admin Area 5. Payment Collection 6. Shipping Calculation 7. Tax Calculation 8. Categories & Subcategories 9. Products & Inventory 10. Products Options 11. Vendors & DropShipping 12. Placing Orders 13. Processing Orders 14. Configuration Variables 15. Text/Article Management 16. Newsletters 17. Discounts & Coupons 18. Gift Certificates & Store Credit 19. Affiliate System 20. Search Engine Optimization 21. B2B/Members-Only Site 22. Customizing Your Store 23. Analytics & Reporting
Click Here to view our Training Video covering the Products section
Products & Inventory Product Management Navigate to Inventory —> Products. This will list all existing products in your database. From this page you may add new products and/or edit your existing products.
Adding New Products: 1. The easiest way to add new products is to click to edit an existing product, THEN, click the ADD tab at the top of the page. This will pre-fill all of the fields with the same data as the existing product to often save you time from having to retype common information. If you'd rather not have all fields pre-filled you may simply click the ADD tab from the View All Products page. 2. Fill in all the fields appropriate for this product. Please note that almost all of the fields are optional and are rarely used. The field names listed in Bold are mandatory and must be filled in before you click on the Save Changes or Add New Record buttons. Here is a list of the most commonly used fields: Field
Description
ProductCode
A unique part number/code for this product. Please see a detailed tutorial below for more information on choosing your product codes
ProductName
The complete name of your product
http://manual.volusion.com/Products-Inventory/9.htm (1 of 8)8/6/2007 6:14:11 PM
Products & Inventory - Volusion Manual ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
24. Importing/Exporting 25. Using the WYSIWYG 26. Quickedit Toolbar 27. Installing Live Chat 28. Security 29. Updates & Upgrades 30. Hosting & Email 31. Shipping Resources
The complete name of your product, but shorter. Try to omit any unnecessary words. This value is used in only two places: This field, which has to be less than 50 characters long, should contain the product name, however a shorter version than your ProductName field. This field is displayed on the home page of your website on the right hand side for the Super Product Name Short
Deal, Top Sellers, New Products sections. Most importantly, it is displayed in the URL address of your product pages if you have the SEO Friendly feature enabled. This is a critical component for SEO optimization. Make sure to use a keyword or keyword phrase that you think customers will type to find your product. Leave out numbers and words that customers wouldn't type while looking for this product.
Product Description
A long, detailed description of your product
Product Description Short
A one or two paragraph maximum description, which is shown in search results and therefore should not have too much text
Product Price
The price at which the product is being sold
Product Weight
The weight of the product in pounds. This weight is used by the shipping calculation systems. If your product weighs less than a pound, such as a 1/2 pound, enter 0.5 into this field.
Product Category(s)
Type in the CategoryID(s) of the categories in which you want this product to show up. You may type multiple categoryIDs separated by commas.
3. Upload the product's photos (see below for instructions).
Choosing Good Product Codes: 1. Be sure NOT to use any of the following reserved product codes: SETUP, GFT, FEE. Also be sure that your Product Codes do not begin with either DSC- or MEMBERSHIP2. Try to avoid any characters other than regular letters and numbers. For example, avoid the following characters: (") or (') or (&) or (/) or () or (+) or (#) 3. Do NOT include spaces within the Product Code Examples of GOOD Product Codes... ABC123 (Highly Recommended) ABC-123 (HighlyRecommended) ABC_123
Examples of BAD Product Codes... ABC/123 ABC&123 ABC:123 ABC+123 ABC=123
Uploading Photos There are multiple photo uploading options from automatic thumbnail creation to pre-thumbnailed batch uploading. Upload Method Easy-Auto Upload (Recommended!)
Description PROS: Upload one large photo, and it will automatically create the four required thumbnails
http://manual.volusion.com/Products-Inventory/9.htm (2 of 8)8/6/2007 6:14:11 PM
Products & Inventory - Volusion Manual
CONS: You can only upload one photo at a time. Also, .gif is not supported through this upload method PROS: Will work on any computer or browser Basic Form Upload
CONS: You must resize and correctly name each of your photos before you upload them. You can only upload 10 photos at a time.
When creating photos for your products, follow these standard guidelines: 1. Each of your main product photos must be resized to three smaller sizes (we call them thumbnails) 2. Each photo must be named according to the naming syntax described on this page Note: Most people use the Easy-Auto Upload method described above, which can be accessed by going to EDIT an existing product and clicking on Upload New Photos. This is by far the easiest way to upload photos. If you use the Easy-Auto upload method you can disregard all further notes below about photos because the Easy-Auto upload method takes care of everything automatically. If you have a large number of existing photos, you can use the Thumbnail Generator program that will automatically resize (create thumbnails) and rename all of your photos with a single click. Click here to download this program: Thumbnail Generator
Naming Syntax: (product code)-(photosize).(filetype). The software supports .jpg, .gif and .png PhotoSize
Recommended Dimension
Usage
Image on Shopping Cart page
REQUIRED
100x100
Thumbnail on Search Results
REQUIRED
2
500x500
Larger image
REQUIRED
2T
150x150
0
50x50
1
Normal Image on REQUIRED Product Page & PhotoGallery.asp
.................................................................................................................................. 3
500x500
Additional Image
OPTIONAL
3T
150x150
Additional Image Thumbnail
OPTIONAL
4
500x500
Additional Image
OPTIONAL
4T
150x150
Additional Image Thumbnail
OPTIONAL
.................................................................................................................................. etc.
etc. (unlimited photos supported)
etc.
EXAMPLE: This is how you would name the photos for a product with product code CD445. CD445-0.jpg CD445-1.jpg CD445-2.jpg CD445-2T.jpg CD445-3.jpg CD445-3T.jpg CD445-4.jpg CD445-4T.jpg
All product photos are placed into the folder /vspfiles/photos/
http://manual.volusion.com/Products-Inventory/9.htm (3 of 8)8/6/2007 6:14:11 PM
Products & Inventory - Volusion Manual
Manufacturer Logos are also supported! Simply upload the manufacturer's logo as a .gif file into the /v/photos/manufactures/ directory and name the files the same as the manufacturer's name. For example, if a manufacturer's name is Sony, then name the file would be sony.gif. Recommended maximum image dimensions are 100 x 40 (width x height).
Easy Upload Instructions: ● ●
●
Click on a product code to EDIT, then click on Upload New Photos on the upper left-hand corner. Click on the Browse button and locate the file on your computer(Note: We recommend that you use a Jpeg file format), select the image file, click OK Click on the Upload my Images button. The photo will be renamed and resized in accordance with the naming syntax automatically. Once the file has been successfully uploaded, you will be able to preview the resized photos.
Inventory Management To begin using the live inventory management feature, start by defining your current product's StockStatus value in the Products table.
Understanding InStock vs. Out of Stock: A product is InStock if the StockStatus field for the product is greater than zero OR if the StockStatus field is left blank (NULL). A product is Out of Stock if the StockStatus is zero or less. As long as the StockStatus field has a stock value OR, is NOT left blank(NULL), each time this item is purchased, your store will automatically deduct the quantity ordered from the product's StockStatus value. If this field is left blank(NULL), the system considers the product to have UNLIMITED stock and therefore is treated as always in stock. Each time you receive a new product into inventory, you can add the quantity to the product's StockStatus value.
Displaying StockStatus to the Customer: If the Config_EnableLiveStockStatus variable is enabled, the customer is able to view the actual StockStatus quantity on the product details page. Or, if instead, the configuration variable Config_EnableDisplayStockStatus is enabled, the customer is able to view the text In Stock on the product details page if your product's current stock status is greater than 0, or Out of Stock if the StockStatus is less than 0. If you do not wish to display any indication of StockStatus to the customer, you may set the configuration variable Config_EnableDisplayStockStatus to N. You may also use the Availability field of the Products table to indicate availability. This field is a static field, not affected by your actual StockStatus in any way.
Handling Back Orders: Enabling the configuration variable Config_EnableAllowBackOrders will allow customers to order products which currently have a StockStatus of less than 1. If you want to allow back orders only on certain products, you'll need to enable this variable, and then use the DoNotAllowBackOrders field of the Products table to disable back orders for a specific product.
Recurring Payments Recurring payments allow you to sell products which have a recurring fee, such as a periodic monthly fee. Enabling the config variable Config_EnableRecurringPayments allows six extra form fields to be displayed on the Product Configuration page, to set up products to incur recurring fees. You'll be able to create any schedule of fees, including monthly fees, yearly
http://manual.volusion.com/Products-Inventory/9.htm (4 of 8)8/6/2007 6:14:11 PM
Products & Inventory - Volusion Manual
fees, any number of months in between and even promotional start pricing.
Setting up a product that costs $19.95 per month: 1. Set the Product Price to $0.00 2. Set the Recurring Price to $19.95 3. Set the Recurring How Often (months) to 1
Setting up a product that costs $99.00 per year + $20 setup fee: 1. Set the Product Price to $20.00 2. Set the Recurring Price to $99.00 3. Set the Recurring How Often (months) to 12
Setting up a product that costs $19.95/mo for the first Three months, then $49.95/mo thereafter: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Set the ProductPrice to $0.00 Set the Recurring Price to $49.95 Set the Recurring How Often (months) to 1 Set the Recurring Start Price to 19.95 Set the Recurring Start Duration to 3
Note: The Recurring Duration (months) field if left blank means the recurring fee will be charged infinitely until the account is canceled. For example, If you enter 12 in this field, this would limit the recurring fee to be charged only for 1 year (12 months).
Downloadable Products To set up a downloadable product, go to edit the existing product and then follow these steps: 1. Set the Product Weight to 0
http://manual.volusion.com/Products-Inventory/9.htm (5 of 8)8/6/2007 6:14:11 PM
Products & Inventory - Volusion Manual
2. Enter the name of the file for upload in the Download File field. For example, if the filename is eBook.zip, then type
eBook.zip into this field. 3. Click on the [Upload File] link located next to the Download FileName field which will allow you to upload the ebook.zip file to the server. Make sure the name of the file for upload and the name of the file in the Download FileName field are the same. When the customer purchases the product, the link to download it is sent in the OrderHasShipped.asp email. This is the email sent when an order has been marked as shipped by clicking the Complete Order / Send Emails link in the order details. You can also manually send the email by selecting Shipped in the drop down menu at the bottom of the Quick Order Processing section of the order details. You must also collect payment on the order before you send the Shipped email, otherwise the link will not work. The system can accept any file type, however some file types may need to be enabled on the server. If you test your product and the file does not download, please contact support at 800-646-3517 to see if the file type needs to be enabled.
Note: The maximum file size you can upload within the edit mode of the product is 10MB. Any files larger then 10MB need to upload via FTP to the /vspfiles/downloadables/ folder.
Sometimes Microsoft Windows will hide the extensions of your files, which may cause confusion when working with your store, where the extensions of files are important. To adjust your Windows setting's please follow these steps: 1. 2. 3.
Double-click on your My Computer icon In the window that pops up, go to Tools â&#x20AC;&#x201D;> Folder Options In the dialog box that pops up, click on the View tab, UN-CHECK the option Hide extensions for known file types, and click OK to close the window Note: You can only have one downloadable file per product.
Product Key Distribution http://manual.volusion.com/Products-Inventory/9.htm (6 of 8)8/6/2007 6:14:11 PM
Products & Inventory - Volusion Manual
The Product Key Distribution system is used for the following scenarios: ●
●
If you sell software that requires you to provide a unique activation code to each customer purchase If you would like to send an e-mail to a customer to provide more information about a specific product purchased.
This system basically sends out an e-mail to the customer when payment is received for an order (received meaning either authorized or captured).
Setting up UNIQUE Product Keys for Distribution for an individual product: For example, let's say the first piece of software you want to set up is called BlueSkySoftware 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
9.
Navigate to Inventory —> Product Key Distribution, click the ADD tab Set PKey_KeyType to BlueSkySoftware Set PKey_Email_Template to generic.asp. You can create a new customized template for each key type if you'd like. Set Pkey_Email_Subject to Your BlueSkySoftware key Set PKey_DateAdded to today's date. Keys will be distributed OLDEST first Leave PKey_AllowReuse as blank because you don't want to reuse any keys Leave PKey_Used blank because this key is obviously not used yet Fill in the PKey_Email_Body with the key itself, such as ABCD-1234-WXYZ-9876. You may type more text into the body as well, before or after the key, but obviously the point of this is to give the customer their activation key code. It is often easiest to add any additional text into the Email Template itself by creating a custom e-mail template, rather than entering lots of text here. Click the Add New button to add this new key. You can repeat this process for as many keys as you have. If you have 100 keys for this BlueSkySoftware product ready to go, you'll need to have 100 records in this Product Keys table. Once you have added a few records and tested it, it's often easiest to import them from a .CSV file (see the Import/Export section of this manual for more information).
Setting up a RE-USABLE Product Key for Distribution for an individual product using the PKey_Allow Reuse Field: Navigate to Inventory —> Product Key Distribution, click the ADD tab PKey_AllowReuse field is used if you are NOT distributing UNIQUE keys for a product. If this field is enabled, you only have to set up one record, as opposed to setting up 100 records(one for each time the product is ordered). The PKey_AllowReuse field allows a single key to be reused unlimited times. This transforms the ability of the Product Key Distribution system to be beneficial for many uses. You do not have to include a key in the e-mail that is sent to the customer, you can instead just send an e-mail with content / information about the product they just purchased. For example, if you set up the Product Key Distribution system for a digital camera, you could send the customer an e-mail on photography tips & advice. Another useful example, if you sell information, and if a customer purchases a product called Secrets of Online Marketing for example, your store could automatically send out an email to the http://manual.volusion.com/Products-Inventory/9.htm (7 of 8)8/6/2007 6:14:11 PM
Products & Inventory - Volusion Manual
customer with all information OR send an e-mail with a link to download / view the information online.
To send a product key automatically to a customer as soon as the payment for the order was received: ● ●
●
Navigate to Inventory —> Products Click to edit the product that is associated with the BlueSkySoftware set of keys, enter BlueSkySoftware in the Uses_ProductKeyType(s) field. If a customer orders this product, it will send the customer a unique key for the BlueSkySoftware automatically as soon as payment is received for the order.
About Volusion
| Contact Us | Sitemap | Partner with Volusion | Policies | Ecommerce Manual | Ecommerce Resource | My Account
© 1999-2006 Volusion, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Powered by Volusion Shopping Cart Software.
http://manual.volusion.com/Products-Inventory/9.htm (8 of 8)8/6/2007 6:14:11 PM
Importing/Exporting - Volusion Manual
Importing/Exporting Call us today: 1-800-646-3517
●
online store builder
●
web design
●
merchant accounts
●
ssl security
●
marketing
●
24x7 support
●
ecommerce 101 ●
Contact Us
●
Volusion Manual
●
Knowledge Base
●
Support Forums
●
Training Videos
Search edit this page
Go sections ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ●
● ● ● ●
● ● ●
● ●
● ● ●
1. Quick Start Guide 2. Knowledge Base 3. Installation 4. Using the Admin Area 5. Payment Collection 6. Shipping Calculation 7. Tax Calculation 8. Categories & Subcategories 9. Products & Inventory 10. Products Options 11. Vendors & DropShipping 12. Placing Orders 13. Processing Orders 14. Configuration Variables 15. Text/Article Management 16. Newsletters 17. Discounts & Coupons 18. Gift Certificates & Store Credit 19. Affiliate System 20. Search Engine Optimization 21. B2B/Members-Only Site 22. Customizing Your Store 23. Analytics & Reporting
Click Here to view our Training Video covering the Import/Export section
Importing / Exporting Exporting Data 1. Navigate to Inventory —> Import / Export, in the home page of the admin area. 2. Click Data export 3. Choose a table, for example, Products(18). The number next to the table name indicate the total number of records in the table. 4. Choose the columns you wish to export by clicking the appropriate check boxes, for example ProductCode (TEXT : 30). Next to each column name, the data type for that field is indicated. For example, (TEXT:30) means the value entered in the field must be of text data type and a maximum character length of 30.
Note: Some tables have column names encapsulated in a box titled Virtual Columns. ** Virtual Field - The data is created on the fly and does not actually exist as a field in the database, therefore usually cannot be imported back in. When you export the virtual columns, the export system is building this data on-the-fly from a variety of tables.
5. Choose the type of file you wish to export to. The most common type is CSV (comma separated values). This type of file can be opened and edited with Microsoft Excel, or any other spreadsheet software. A CSV file can also be imported into Microsoft Access. The CSV format is the most widely supported format across all software, new & old versions.
http://manual.volusion.com/Importing-Exporting/24.htm (1 of 3)8/6/2007 6:14:11 PM
Importing/Exporting - Volusion Manual ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
24. Importing/Exporting 25. Using the WYSIWYG 26. Quickedit Toolbar 27. Installing Live Chat 28. Security 29. Updates & Upgrades 30. Hosting & Email 31. Shipping Resources
6. Click the Export my data button. The page will take a moment to generate the file, the page gets refreshed and will provide you with a link to download the file.
Saved Exports You also have the option to Export Later. To utilize this feature, follow the steps above, but on step
6, type in a name for your export, such as My Product Export, and click the Save to QueryBank button.
Note: The Global check box means the query will be available to all administrators. If you un-check this box, the query will only be available to your admin account.
After saving your export, you will be taken to the Saved Exports tab, where you will see your export listed. Now, anytime you wish to do this export, just return to this tab, and do the following: 1. Click the radio button of the saved query you would like to export. 2. Choose the type of file you wish to export to. 3. Click the Export my data button.
Importing Data Navigate to Inventory —> Import / Export, in the home page of the admin area. Click Data Import. Importing data is as simple as taking a standard CSV spreadsheet of data, and renaming the columns to match those of Volusion's database. We recommend the following steps to accomplish this task: 1. First use the admin area to add a few records to the table you wish to import. Let us take the Products table as an example. We recommend that you use the admin area to add at least 5-10 products first. Be sure to test the configuration of those products and ensure from the front-end of your store that those products look exactly the way you would like them to be displayed. 2. Navigate to Inventory —> Import / Export, in the home page of the admin area. Click Data Export and export all fields of the Products table. 3. Now that you have done an export of the data, it will make it easy to use this sample file as a template for importing data. You can either copy the data from your old spreadsheet into this new spreadsheet (which we recommend) or you may rename the columns of your old spreadsheet to match up with the column names you see in this new spreadsheet.
Common Importing Problems: 1. 1. Often in a spreadsheet you will not notice that there are extra columns and rows that are blank, however the spreadsheet software such as Microsoft Excel, considers their blank value to be a text value. To ensure you have a clean spreadsheet please take the following steps: ❍ Scroll to the right of your spreadsheet to the first empty column with no column name. Click on the top of the column to select the entire column. Hold the SHIFT key and click at least the next 10 columns or so. Now that you have these columns selected, right-click in that selected area and click Delete. Do not hit the DELETE key on your keyboard, as that will NOT do the same thing. ❍ Scroll to the bottom of your spreadsheet to the first empty rows with no data. Click the left side of this row to select the entire row. Hold the SHIFT key and click at least the next 10 rows or so. Now that you have these rows selected, right-click in that selected area and choose Delete. Do not hit the DELETE key on your keyboard, as that will NOT do the same thing. 2. 2. File must be generated on a PC, Macintosh is not supported. The reason is that Macintosh uses a different set of characters for line breaks than a PC. 3. 3. The data types and field lengths are important to consider. For example, if a field only allows 30 characters of TEXT, you may only import up to 30 letters, numbers, or other characters. However, if a field is of INTEGER type, you may only import numbers, up to the number 30,000. Please refer to the Data Export to see what the data type constraints are for each field. http://manual.volusion.com/Importing-Exporting/24.htm (2 of 3)8/6/2007 6:14:11 PM
Importing/Exporting - Volusion Manual
Importing Product Photos For bulk importing photos, try our Automatic Thumbnail Generator located at http://www.volusion.com/support/KB_Article.asp? ID=60 This tool will rename and resize all of your photos (thousands at a time) and with one-click. It will create the required
thumbnails, named appropriately and ready to upload via FTP to your site. There is no field in the products table that specifies the photo paths, but rather the photos must simply be named appropriately. That is what this automatic thumbnail generator takes care of.
Note: The import / export section is compatible with Internet Explorer version 6 or higher and with Fire Fox version 1.5 or higher.
About Volusion | Contact Us | Sitemap | Partner with Volusion | Policies | Ecommerce Manual | Ecommerce Resource | My Account
Š 1999-2006 Volusion, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Powered by Volusion Shopping Cart Software.
http://manual.volusion.com/Importing-Exporting/24.htm (3 of 3)8/6/2007 6:14:11 PM
Customizing Your Store - Volusion Manual
Customizing Your Store Call us today: 1-800-646-3517
●
online store builder
●
web design
●
merchant accounts
●
ssl security
●
marketing
●
24x7 support
●
ecommerce 101 ●
Contact Us
●
Volusion Manual
●
Knowledge Base
●
Support Forums
●
Training Videos
Search edit this page
Go sections ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ●
● ● ● ●
● ● ●
● ●
● ● ●
1. Quick Start Guide 2. Knowledge Base 3. Installation 4. Using the Admin Area 5. Payment Collection 6. Shipping Calculation 7. Tax Calculation 8. Categories & Subcategories 9. Products & Inventory 10. Products Options 11. Vendors & DropShipping 12. Placing Orders 13. Processing Orders 14. Configuration Variables 15. Text/Article Management 16. Newsletters 17. Discounts & Coupons 18. Gift Certificates & Store Credit 19. Affiliate System 20. Search Engine Optimization 21. B2B/Members-Only Site 22. Customizing Your Store 23. Analytics & Reporting
Customizing Your Store Click here if you would like to see a complete mapping of all the images used in Volusion's Ecommerce Solution.
Uploading Your Logo A quick and easy way to brand your store in a professional way, is to upload your logo. ● ● ●
From the home page of the admin area, navigate to Design > My Logos Next to “Website Heading Logo” Select “Graphic” and browser for the image file on your computer. Click on “Save Changes.”
Website Heading Logo This is the image file that will be placed at the top of your page.
Why does my logo repeat across the top of my website? The logo you are referring to is the Website Headling Logo, which must be imprinted on a background which is 1600 pixels wide. We recommend that you go to the above mentioned “My Logos” page and scroll down just a bit where you will always see a sample image with NO logo on it, ready for you to download by right-clicking on it and choosing Save Picture As. This will allow you to save this blank background image to your computer, which you can then open in your favorite graphics editor and imprint your logo on top of it. Once you have placed your logo onto this graphic, just re-upload the graphic from this “My Logos” page.
Invoice Logo This is the graphic file that will be included in your store’s order confirmation e-mail to customers, as well as on receipts, invoices, POs sent to vendors and e-mail newsletters generated by the store.
http://manual.volusion.com/Customizing-Your-Store/22.htm (1 of 3)8/6/2007 6:14:13 PM
Customizing Your Store - Volusion Manual ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
24. Importing/Exporting 25. Using the WYSIWYG 26. Quickedit Toolbar 27. Installing Live Chat 28. Security 29. Updates & Upgrades 30. Hosting & Email 31. Shipping Resources
While this image does not have a fixed size, we recommend keeping the dimensions of this image within reasonable limits, as it will be included in customer e-mails, etc.
Changing Your Website Design
Navigate to Design > Choose Template, from the home page of your admin area. You may change the look and feel of your site by installing a new Template. A website design includes of all the graphics on your website, plus the color scheme of your website which includes many of the text colors and background colors on your website. Be aware that applying a website design will reset all of your custom changes back to the default of the template. You may get a new website design by: 1. having a web designer build one for you 2. downloading a design from the Volusion e-Commerce Design Gallery at http://www.volusion.com/DesignGallery. Your default website template is located in your store directory vspfiles/templates/1/. For more in-depth guides on how to design your own template, visit http://www.volusion.com/university.
Navigation Menus Click Design —> Navigation Menu, from the home page of your admin area. If you have one of your menus set to rollover_colors_pop-out, that is the only time you will have to pay attention to the field titled Vertical Offset on this page. The determines the absolute positioned height of the JavaScript menu. The menu is designed to be compatible with only certain templates. If you are using the default Blue New Edge template the vertical offset should be set to 125. If you are using the Audio Gear template the vertical offset should be set to 154.
Customizing Your Template Note: Before customizing your template you should install the free template that best matches your desired layout. Using a template that is close to your layout will make the integration process much easier. To view your design files go to Design à Live Edit File Editor. Under design files you will see the different files that you need to make custom changes to your store’s template. The template.html file handles the header and footer sections of your site. It is also the file you would use to add additional navigation menus. You have the option of either creating static menus through editing the html of the template.html file and adding the correct links or you can have it pull the links dynamically from the store database. To add a dynamic navigation menu, first find the cell where you want it to be located. Once you have determined where its location will be, paste in the following line of code: <%Call catDisplayDDB("1","horizontal","rollover_colors","divider")%> Call catDisplayDDB is the ASP function that tells the page to load the navigation menu. ● ●
1 is the navigation menu that is being displayed. In this case it is pulling the first nav-menu. Horizontal specifies the layout for the categories. You can select either horizontal or vertical.
Currently, the Volusion software allows you to have up to eight separate navigation menus in your shopping cart but images are only available for the first two. Any images for additional navigation menus would need to be uploaded to the images directory for you template. The colors and fonts for each navigation menu are pulled from the color variables under Design à Navigation Menu, but that is only for the first 2 navigation menus. You will need to edit the .CSS files in your store to change the colors of the navigation menus you add yourself. To use a custom splash page that is completely separate from your store all you have to do is place the HTML code of your splash page to default.htm, which is available in the Live Edit File Editor. Note: In order to connect to your store you must have a link pointing to default.asp on your splash page.
About Volusion | Contact Us | Sitemap | Partner with Volusion | Policies | Ecommerce Manual | Ecommerce Resource | My Account
http://manual.volusion.com/Customizing-Your-Store/22.htm (2 of 3)8/6/2007 6:14:13 PM
Customizing Your Store - Volusion Manual
Š 1999-2006 Volusion, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Powered by Volusion Shopping Cart Software.
http://manual.volusion.com/Customizing-Your-Store/22.htm (3 of 3)8/6/2007 6:14:13 PM
Shipping Calculation - Volusion Manual
Shipping Calculation Call us today: 1-800-646-3517
●
online store builder
●
web design
●
merchant accounts
●
ssl security
●
marketing
●
24x7 support
●
ecommerce 101 ●
Contact Us
●
Volusion Manual
●
Knowledge Base
●
Support Forums
●
Training Videos
Search edit this page
Go sections ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ●
1. Quick Start Guide 2. Knowledge Base 3. Installation 4. Using the Admin Area 5. Payment Collection 6. Shipping Calculation 7. Tax Calculation 8. Categories & Subcategories 9. Products & Inventory 10. Products Options 11. Vendors & DropShipping
Shipping Calculation Click Here to view our Training Video covering the Shipping and Tax sections
Shipping Methods Navigate to Store Settings —> Shipping, from the home page of your admin area. The Shipping table contains all of the available shipping methods you support. You may configure the current list of shipping methods by setting the Active field to Y to enable the shipping method or N to disable it.
Note: DO NOT DELETE SHIPPING METHODS. Simply disable them by removing the check mark next to Active field or changing Y
http://manual.volusion.com/Shipping-Calculation/6.htm (1 of 12)8/6/2007 6:14:14 PM
Shipping Calculation - Volusion Manual ● ● ● ●
● ● ●
● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
12. Placing Orders 13. Processing Orders 14. Configuration Variables 15. Text/Article Management 16. Newsletters 17. Discounts & Coupons 18. Gift Certificates & Store Credit 19. Affiliate System 20. Search Engine Optimization 21. B2B/Members-Only Site 22. Customizing Your Store 23. Analytics & Reporting 24. Importing/Exporting 25. Using the WYSIWYG 26. Quickedit Toolbar 27. Installing Live Chat 28. Security 29. Updates & Upgrades 30. Hosting & Email 31. Shipping Resources
to N on the View All page. In-Store pickup will always appear when logged in as an administrator even if the method is not active. It will only appear for your customers if the method is active.
You may add additional shipping methods if needed. The shipping methods will be listed in the drop down list of available shipping choices for the customer.
When editing shipping methods, you may change the Shipping Method Name fields, but DO NOT change the Shipping Method field, which is used by the LIVE shipping calculation system. Available Shipping Calculation Systems:
LIVE This calculation system works by direct communication with shipping companies, including UPS, FedEx, USPS and DHL, to give the customer an accurate shipping rate based on the total weight of the order, as well as the customer's shipping address. http://manual.volusion.com/Shipping-Calculation/6.htm (2 of 12)8/6/2007 6:14:14 PM
Shipping Calculation - Volusion Manual
You may modify the Shipping Method Name field for each record. For example, by default the UPS Ground shipping method is titled UPS Ground. However, you may rename this Shipping Method Name to Regular Ground Shipping if you'd prefer. Just remember that may you NOT change the Shipping Method field. UPS and USPS require you to register with them in order to use our Live Shipping Rate Lookup feature. There are no costs involved. To register with these companies: 1. Navigate to Settings —> Shipping, from the home page of your admin area 2. Click on the Set & Test Shipping Rates tab 3. Click on the link, Click here to register with UPS / USPS / FEDEX / DHL / CANADA POST . This page displays instructions to follow in order to register with these shipping companies
Note: All LIVE rates are the same rates you would get by going to the shipping company's website (such as UPS.com) and getting a rate quote. If you have negotiated with UPS for a lower rate than normal, this LIVE connection CANNOT get your specific rates, as the shipping company's interfaces do not allow for this. However, we do offer ways to adjust these live rates.
Note: You should not set both the FreeShippingQualifyPrice (in the Setup & Test Rates) and the MinOrderPrice (in the Shipping Method section). The system will use the higher of those two fields, something you most likely will not want to occur.
For example, if you get 5% off the normal rates, you can use the variable Config_ExtraShippingCostPercent and set it to -5 to adjust all LIVE rates down by 5%. Also, please be aware that the other fields on this Setup & Test Shipping Rates page are important factors that influence the rates, such as the pickup type of Daily Pickup vs. One-Time Pickup.
Dimensional Packaging: Dimensional Packaging is only supported by UPS, DHL, FedEx, and USPS. This feature allows you to take into account the package size of the product you are shipping. 1. Navigate to Inventory > Products > Select the product you wish to edit. 2. Go to the section called “shipping options,” and put a check next to “Ships by Itself.” 3. Fill out the package type length, width, and height. Select “save changes.”
FedEx-Specific Notes: The variable EnableShippingRates_Residential toggles between two different shipping methods offered by FedEx: ● ●
FedEx Home Delivery FedEx Ground
If the variable EnableShippingRates_Residential is enabled, you cannot offer FedEx Ground. If the variable is disabled, you cannot offer FedEx Home Delivery. http://manual.volusion.com/Shipping-Calculation/6.htm (3 of 12)8/6/2007 6:14:14 PM
Shipping Calculation - Volusion Manual
Note: FedEx Ground is only a service to business addresses, whereas Fedex Home Delivery is the name of the same service to residential addresses. The price varies slightly.
If a LIVE shipping company's web service is unavailable at anytime for any reason, your store will revert to using the Backup BaseRate and CostPerPound fields of the shipping method, which normally have no affect on the LIVE calculation. For example, if USPS doesn't respond with any LIVE rates, and the BaseRate for the shipping method is $10.00 and the CostPerPound is $2.00, the shipping rate for a 5 pound order would be $20.00 (BaseRate * CostPerPound). Please ensure you have set up your Backup BaseRate and CostPerPound fields for any shipping method you are using. The system has default rates for most methods, however you will need to ensure that these are the rates you wish to use as your backup to your Live Rates.
UPS-Specific Notes: You can use UPS’s large package rates, and additional handling fees with the live rate system. 1. Go to Inventory > Products > Select the product you wish to edit. 2. Go to the section called “shipping options,” 3. You will see the check boxes for “Large packages,” and “Additional Handling Indicator.”
BACKUP This calculation system is very flexible. You can incorporate a combination of rules to determine pricing, such as rules based on Order Price Value, Ship To Location, Product Weight, etc. You can read more about ByOrderPrice and Apply To Locations later in this tutorial. Let's begin by discussing the BaseRate and CostPerPound values which apply only to this BACKUP system. The BACKUP system uses the following fields in particular: ● ●
BaseRate - A flat fee for the shipment. For example, $10.00 CostPerPound - A fee multiplied by the weight of the order. For example $2.00.
Using the above parameters, the shipping rate for a 5 pound order would be $20.00 (BaseRate * CostPerPound) For example, if you would want to offer 3 shipping choices for your customers, you will only need to create three shipping methods as follows: Shipping Method
BaseRate
CostPerPound
Ground
$10.00
$2.00
2nd Day
$20.00
$2.75
Next Day
$37.00
$3.50
http://manual.volusion.com/Shipping-Calculation/6.htm (4 of 12)8/6/2007 6:14:14 PM
Shipping Calculation - Volusion Manual
STEP 1: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Create a new shipping method (or change an existing method) with the following values: Set the System to BACKUP Set the ShippingMethodID to any unique number such as 1001 Set the ShippingMethodName to Ground Enable the ShippingMethodActive check box Enable the Apply To All check box Set the BaseRate to $10.00, set the CostPerPound to $2.00
STEP 2: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Create a new shipping method (or change an existing method) with the following values: Set the System to BACKUP Set the ShippingMethodID to any unique number such as 1002 Set the ShippingMethodName to 2nd Day Enable the ShippingMethodActive check box Enable the Apply To All check box Set the BaseRate to $20.00, and the CostPerPound to $2.75
STEP 3: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Create a new shipping method (or change an existing method) with the following values: Set the System to BACKUP Set the ShippingMethodID to any unique number such as 1003 Set the ShippingMethodName to Next Day Enable the ShippingMethodActive checkbox Enable the Apply To All checkbox. Set the BaseRate to $37.00, and the CostPerPound to $3.50
Free This system is triggered whenever an order qualifies for FREE SHIPPING.
An order qualifies for free shipping if: 1. The product(s) which you which to have Free Shipping for must have weight values assigned to them. If a product does not have a weight value assigned to it, no shipping calculations are done by the system 2. the item/ProductCode itself must be marked as a "Free Shipping Item." If this box is not checked, the system will not give "Free Shipping" as a shipping choice, even when other qualifications are met 3. Your "Free Shipping" Method must be set to Active, and it must apply to the State/Country where the customer would have the item shipped to. You can find this method in the admin part of your store by clicking on Settings, then Shipping and then ensure there is a check mark under "Shipping Method Active" column. 4. You have to enter a value greater than 0 in the "FreeShippingQualifyPrice" field. This field is under Settings, then Shipping, then click on "Setup & Test Rates". Also, depending on whatever you set this value to, the total order cost of items in the cart must meet or exceed this price value. In that situation, any http://manual.volusion.com/Shipping-Calculation/6.htm (5 of 12)8/6/2007 6:14:14 PM
Shipping Calculation - Volusion Manual
item(s) in the cart that are marked as "Free Shipping Items" will not be included when calculating shipping costs of items that are not marked as Free Shipping Items. When free shipping is activated, it adds an additional shipping option to the drop down list for the customer to choose from. It does NOT replace the faster shipping methods. Therefore if the customer wants to choose a faster shipping method such as FedEx Overnight, they are still charged for shipping. You may only have one record in your Shipping Methods table that is assigned to the Free system, which by default is: ID
Shipping Method Name
500
Free Shipping (7 Day Ground)
Note: All of the products (in an order) must be marked as FREE SHIPPING ITEMS for that Shipping Option to appear and as well as meet the other qualifications. Also note that you can not split shipping methods among the products.
Download This system is triggered whenever an order's total weight is ZERO. This can be used for software sales which are distributed to the customer via digital download. Cost is always $0. You may only have one record in your Shipping Methods table that is assigned to the Download system, which by default is: ID 501
Shipping Method Name NONE
Pickup This system is used by your store's Point-Of-Sale System. Cost is always $0. You may only have one record in your Shipping Methods table that is assigned to the Pickup system, which by default is: ID 502
Shipping Method Name In-Store Pickup
Note: The In-Store Pickup method ALWAYS shows up if you are logged in as an Administrator, regardless of whether or not this shipping method is enabled in your system. This is not viewed by the customers unless you explicitly enable this as a Shipping option.
Calculating By Order Price Value: The following example explains how to set up shipping rates based on the subtotal value of the order. For example, if you want to offer 3 shipping choices based http://manual.volusion.com/Shipping-Calculation/6.htm (6 of 12)8/6/2007 6:14:14 PM
Shipping Calculation - Volusion Manual
on the following order subtotal values, you will need to create three shipping methods as follows: Min Order Price
Max Order Price
Shipping Charge
$0
$50
$10.00
$50.01
$100
$25.00
$100.01
$40.00
STEP 1: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Create a new shipping method(or change an existing method) with the following values: Set the System to BACKUP Set the ShippingMethodID to an unique number such as 1004 Set the ShippingMethodName to Standard Shipping Enable the ShippingMethodActive checkbox Enable the Apply To All checkbox Set the MinOrderPrice to $0.00, and the MaxOrderPrice to $50.00 Set the BaseRate to $10.00
STEP 2: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Create a new shipping method(or change an existing method) with the following values: Set the System to BACKUP Set the ShippingMethodID to an unique number such as 1004 Set the ShippingMethodName to Standard Shipping Enable the ShippingMethodActive checkbox Enable the Apply To All checkbox Set the MinOrderPrice to $50.01, and the MaxOrderPrice to $100.00 Set the BaseRate to $25.00
STEP 3: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Create a new shipping method(or change an existing method) with the following values: Set the System to BACKUP Set the ShippingMethodID to an unique number such as 1004 Set the ShippingMethodName to Standard Shipping Enable the ShippingMethodActive checkbox Enable the Apply To All checkbox Set the MinOrderPrice to $100.01, and leave the MaxOrderPrice field as blank Set the BaseRate to $40.00
As you will notice above, we named all 3 methods with the same name Standard Shipping. You can repeat the steps again to create another set of 3 methods all named Rush Delivery 2nd Day for example, and the BaseRate set to a higher price for each method of course.
http://manual.volusion.com/Shipping-Calculation/6.htm (7 of 12)8/6/2007 6:14:14 PM
Shipping Calculation - Volusion Manual
Applying Shipping Rates to certain locations: To setup different shipping methods for each location, you will be utilizing the following fields of the Shipping Methods table: Apply To All
This field means the shipping method is applied to ALL locations
Apply To Entire Countries
Click on Click To Edit to view the list of Countries. Select a Country(s) and click Add
Apply To States / Provinces
Click on Click To Edit to view the list of States. Select a State(s) and click Add
DO NOT Apply To Entire Countries
Click on Click To Edit to view the list of Countries. Select a Country(s) and click Add
DO NOT Apply To States / Provinces
Click on Click To Edit to view the list of States. Select a State(s) and click Add
http://manual.volusion.com/Shipping-Calculation/6.htm (8 of 12)8/6/2007 6:14:14 PM
Shipping Calculation - Volusion Manual
The following example explains how to setup shipping rates based on the the location of the customer
Country
Apply To Entire Countries
ApplyToAll
United States Continental
N
United States - Alaska & Hawaii
N
Canada
N
Other Countries
Y
Apply To States / Provinces
DO NOT Apply To States / Provinces
DO NOT Apply To Entire Countries
234
2,11 2,11
37 234,34
Note: Make sure NOT to contradict the ApplyTo side or the DoNotApplyTo side with itself.
For example, the following combinations are INCORRECT and will cause problems: The reason is because 234 is United States, and 2,11 is Alaska and Hawaii. But if you apply a shipping method to 234 United States then that already applies it to Alaska and Hawaii automatically. Therefore, you do not need to put 2,11 in the apply to.
Apply To Entire Countries 234
Apply To States / Provinces
DO NOT Apply To Entire Countries
DO NOT Apply To States / Provinces
2,11 234
http://manual.volusion.com/Shipping-Calculation/6.htm (9 of 12)8/6/2007 6:14:14 PM
2,11
Shipping Calculation - Volusion Manual
Troubleshooting Live Shipping Rates If the shipping rates returned by the system are incorrect, follow the steps below to test the shipping rates: 1. Navigate to Settings —> Shipping, click on Setup & Test Rates tab 2. Scroll down to the Test Results section, click Save Changes. This will calculate the shipping rates and reload the page 3. Scroll down to the Test Results section again, where you should now see a tan colored box with the FROM and TO addresses. Verify both the From: and To: addresses
Note: Make sure to verify that the state code is spelled correctly.
For example, CA or California. If California is used, you will need to verify that California is in your States table. To verify this, go to Settings -> States, to view the list of all registered State names and State codes. You can add additional States for other countries as well, by clicking the ADD tab at the top of the page.
Extra Shipping / Handling Cost To add an additional cost to all shipping rates, modify the configuration variable Config_ExtraShippingCost. For example, $5.00 will be added to all shipping choices (except shipping choices which are $0). You may also specify an additional weight to be added to each order. To do this, modify the value of the Config_ExtraShippingWeight variable. For example, if catalogs are shipped with each order and they weigh 5 pounds each. Set the above variable to 5, to add 5 pounds to each order's shipping calculation. Insurance Cost/Delivery Confirmation You can enable “Insurance Cost” by placing a check box next to “Insure all packages,” and then select the delivery confirmation type on the drop down menu underneath.
Multiple Warehouses Having multiple warehouses allows you to calculate extra shipping cost based on the warehouse the product is being shipped from. If a customer orders a series of products that come from different warehouses, the shipping rates will alter to get the most accurate shipping rate possible. The Volusion software selects which warehouse to use based on the most efficient shipping schedule, which generally means the warehouse that is closest to the customer who ordered a product off of your site.
How to setup a warehouse: http://manual.volusion.com/Shipping-Calculation/6.htm (10 of 12)8/6/2007 6:14:14 PM
Shipping Calculation - Volusion Manual
1. Navigate to Inventory > Warehouses and select “Add.” 2. Fill out the warehouse_name, Country, State or province, and postal code. 3. Then save the changes.
How to assign warehouses to your products: 1. Navigate to Inventory —> Products from the home page of the admin area, click an individual product to edit 2. Under the “Shipping Options” section you should see a WarehouseID section which will include a list of warehouses once you select “Click to edit.” Then choose which warehouse(s) apply to the product. Note: To use this warehouse feature, you must enable the configuration variable Config_EnableWarehouses.
Optimizing the Drop-Ship Shipping Calculation Using the following recommendations will ensure the most accurate shipping calculation for companies that have drop-ship suppliers distributed across the United States. Set your store's ORIGIN shipping location to Billings, MT 59107 1. Navigate to Settings —> Shipping, from the home page of your admin area, click on the Set & Test Shipping Rates tab 2. In the Your Origin - For Shipping Rate Calculation section, fill in Billings, MT 59107 3. Click Save Changes Note: This is the ideal origin because it is the most equal distance from everyone in the United States. The majority of the United States population is on the either the far west coast near California, or the east cost, or the southern states. See the following US Census Map of Population distribution in the US (April 1, 2000 to July 1, 2005) http://www.census.gov/popest/counties/CO-EST2005-01.html Billings is a city located in the southern center of Montana(MT) state. Since we are using a location in MT state, here is a drilldown map of the population distribution within the state of Montana: http://nris.state.mt.us/gis/gisdatalib/downloads/ dens2000.gif
We also recommend to change your ExtraShippingCost_Percentage to 15 to add a minimal 15% extra cost to all calculations. This is due to the fact that choosing MT puts your origin closer to most locations.
About Volusion | Contact Us | Sitemap | Partner with Volusion | Policies | Ecommerce Manual | Ecommerce Resource | My Account
© 1999-2006 Volusion, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Powered by Volusion Shopping Cart Software. http://manual.volusion.com/Shipping-Calculation/6.htm (11 of 12)8/6/2007 6:14:14 PM
Shipping Calculation - Volusion Manual
http://manual.volusion.com/Shipping-Calculation/6.htm (12 of 12)8/6/2007 6:14:14 PM
Tax Calculation - Volusion Manual
Tax Calculation Call us today: 1-800-646-3517
●
online store builder
●
web design
●
merchant accounts
●
ssl security
●
marketing
●
24x7 support
●
ecommerce 101 ●
Contact Us
●
Volusion Manual
●
Knowledge Base
●
Support Forums
●
Training Videos
Search edit this page
Go sections ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ●
● ● ● ●
● ● ●
● ●
● ● ● ● ● ●
1. Quick Start Guide 2. Knowledge Base 3. Installation 4. Using the Admin Area 5. Payment Collection 6. Shipping Calculation 7. Tax Calculation 8. Categories & Subcategories 9. Products & Inventory 10. Products Options 11. Vendors & DropShipping 12. Placing Orders 13. Processing Orders 14. Configuration Variables 15. Text/Article Management 16. Newsletters 17. Discounts & Coupons 18. Gift Certificates & Store Credit 19. Affiliate System 20. Search Engine Optimization 21. B2B/Members-Only Site 22. Customizing Your Store 23. Analytics & Reporting 24. Importing/Exporting 25. Using the WYSIWYG 26. Quickedit Toolbar
Click Here to view our Training Video covering the Shipping and Tax sections
Tax Collection Navigate to Settings —> Tax Generally, in the United States, you only charge tax on an order if your warehouse is in the same state as the customer's ShipTo address. The default setting assumes you wish to collect tax for California residents only, at 8.3%. You may modify/add states accordingly -- in fact, we suggest that when setting up your system that you review each state's tax rates so that they reflect your company's tax collection obligations.
Setting up Tax by Customers You may allow certain customers to be tax exempt by editing the PaysStateTax field in the Customer record. For example, a customer who is buying for a non-profit organization / educational organization / government group / reseller
http://manual.volusion.com/Tax-Calculation/7.htm (1 of 2)8/6/2007 6:14:14 PM
Tax Calculation - Volusion Manual ● ● ● ● ●
27. Installing Live Chat 28. Security 29. Updates & Upgrades 30. Hosting & Email 31. Shipping Resources
Setting up Tax by Product By default all products are taxable. However, You may also set a product(s) as tax exempt by setting the Taxable Productfield of the product to N.
For example, a product such as the Standard American Flag, is not allowed to charge tax on it.
About Volusion | Contact Us | Sitemap | Partner with Volusion | Policies | Ecommerce Manual | Ecommerce Resource | My Account
© 1999-2006 Volusion, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Powered by Volusion Shopping Cart Software.
http://manual.volusion.com/Tax-Calculation/7.htm (2 of 2)8/6/2007 6:14:14 PM
Hosting & Email - Volusion Manual
Hosting & Email Call us today: 1-800-646-3517
●
online store builder
●
web design
●
merchant accounts
●
ssl security
●
marketing
●
24x7 support
●
ecommerce 101 ●
Contact Us
●
Volusion Manual
●
Knowledge Base
●
Support Forums
●
Training Videos
Search edit this page
Go
sections ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ●
●
1. Quick Start Guide 2. Knowledge Base 3. Installation 4. Using the Admin Area 5. Payment Collection 6. Shipping Calculation 7. Tax Calculation 8. Categories & Subcategories 9. Products & Inventory 10. Products Options 11. Vendors & DropShipping 12. Placing Orders
Hosting & Email Accessing the Hosting Control Panel To access your hosting control panel, please contact customer support for the appropriate URL, as it differs depending on when you signed up for your account. Normally, it is http://cp.volusion.com. Note:
Setting up Email Accounts 1. Go to http://cp.volusion.com 2. Under Choose Your Section select "Email" in the drop down list, and then select Go. 3. Select Mailboxes and fill out the username and the password. The username will be the first part of your email.
http://manual.volusion.com/Hosting-Email/30.htm (1 of 6)8/6/2007 6:14:15 PM
Hosting & Email - Volusion Manual ● ● ●
● ● ●
● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
13. Processing Orders 14. Configuration Variables 15. Text/Article Management 16. Newsletters 17. Discounts & Coupons 18. Gift Certificates & Store Credit 19. Affiliate System 20. Search Engine Optimization 21. B2B/Members-Only Site 22. Customizing Your Store 23. Analytics & Reporting 24. Importing/Exporting 25. Using the WYSIWYG 26. Quickedit Toolbar 27. Installing Live Chat 28. Security 29. Updates & Upgrades 30. Hosting & Email 31. Shipping Resources
4. Select Add Mailbox and you are done. 5. If you need to add additional emails, repeat steps 3 and 4. Once you have added your email accounts using the control panel, you will need to setup your computer to download email. At least 90% of people use Microsoft Outlook or Outlook Express. Outlook Express is free and included with all versions of Microsoft Windows. To download the LATEST version of Outlook Express simply download Internet Explorer 6 from http://www.microsoft.com/ie/ Microsoft Outlook (not express) is included with Microsoft Office software, however is not much different. One great thing about Microsoft Outlook 2003 is the built-in spam filter, which is actually very efficient and accurate in blocking spam. We have seen it block at least 50% of spam. To add an e-mail account, you will need the following information: Your Incoming mail server. Which is usually mail.YourDomainName.com. As well as your Internet Service Provider's (ISP) outgoing mail server name. You will also need to have you username and password to connect to your Incoming and Outgoing mail server. For the incoming (POP3) information, Volusion support can assist you. However, for the outgoing (SMTP) information, please ask your Internet Service Provider for this information. Note: Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) is the company to which you pay for DSL / Cable / Dial-up access. All ISPs provide SMTP connectivity as a free service. Some ISPs even REQUIRE you to use their SMTP servers as opposed to any others.
Setting up Outlook XP/2003: 1. On the Tools menu, click E-mail Accounts. 2. In the E-Mail Accounts dialog box, click View or change existing e-mail accounts. 3. Click the Add button. 4. Select the POP3 radio button selection and click next. 5. Then enter Your Name, E-mail Address, Incoming mail server, Outgoing mail server, User Name & Password. If your outgoing mail server requires authentication then click on the More Settings button, then click the Outgoing Server tab. Another great idea is to click on the Advanced tab and check the box labeled Leave a copy of messages on the server and Remove from server after 10 days. 6. Click next / finish to complete.
Note: Each user can create multiple e-mail accounts by repeating the procedure above for each account.
Setting up Outlook Express: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
On the Tools menu, click Accounts. In the Internet Accounts dialog box, click Add. Select either Mail to open the Internet Connection Wizard Insert the Name you wish to use as your Display Name. Click Next. Enter the E-mail Address that you want people to reply to. Click Next. Set the My incoming mail server is a drop down to POP3. Your Incoming mail server will be mail.yourdomain.com. You will need to contact your Internet Service Provider for your SMTP (outgoing mail server) settings. Click Next. Then insert your Account Name (which would be your FULL email address -- including domain name) and your Password. Make sure that the Remember Password is checked. Click Next. Click Finish. After completing this wizard, go to the Tools menu, click the Mail tab. Double-click on the account you just created, then click the Advanced tab.
http://manual.volusion.com/Hosting-Email/30.htm (2 of 6)8/6/2007 6:14:15 PM
Hosting & Email - Volusion Manual
11. Click Leave a copy of messages on server and Remove from server after 10 days.
Note: Each user can create multiple e-mail accounts by repeating the procedure above for each account.
Setting up the CRM System: In the admin area of the store, navigate to Customers â&#x20AC;&#x201D;> CRM system. Settings up Departments: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Next, you need to setup your departments. At the top right gray area labeled "Additional CRM Sections", click on Manage Departments link. Next, click the ADD tab Fill in both the Private_Name and Public_Name fields with the name of your department such as Orders.
5. After filling in the Private_Name and Public_Name fields, click Add New. Repeat this until all departments are created.
POP3 Accounts: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Once all departments are created, click on POP3 Settings at the top right under the "Additional CRM Sections" area. Next, click ADD to create your POP3 Accounts so that the CRM can pull the emails in. Enter in the Email Address you want to connect to the CRM. Then enter the Username of the Email Address.
Note: If Volusion hosts your emails, then the Email Username will be the same as the Email Address.
5. Enter the password for the email address into the Email Password field. 6. For the Email Server field, this should be set to mail.yourdomain.com (where yourdomain is the domain name of your website). 7. In the Ticket Type field, select one of the departments that you created.
http://manual.volusion.com/Hosting-Email/30.htm (3 of 6)8/6/2007 6:14:15 PM
Hosting & Email - Volusion Manual
The Email Reply Footer field is optional, but allows you to put a message at the bottom of the emails you send out. The Auto-Reply Subject and Auto-Reply Body fields
allow you to have an automatic reply sent to the customer verifying to them that you received their email. If you click on the default examples that you can use.
Setting up CRM Inbound Rules Inbound Rules allow you to tell the Volusion software what to do with certain emails when they are received in the CRM. ● ●
From the home page in your store administration, navigate to Customers > CRM System > Inbound Rules Select Add and you will see a empty Inbound Rule record. ❍ The ID_CRM _Inbound_Rules will be automatically assigned once add the record. ❍ Select Field , this field will tell the CRM which field in the ticket to look at when taking a action.
http://manual.volusion.com/Hosting-Email/30.htm (4 of 6)8/6/2007 6:14:15 PM
icon next to those fields and you will see
Hosting & Email - Volusion Manual ■ ■ ■
From email: Allows you to specify a rule based on the email address Subjectline: Allows you to specify a rule based on the content in the subject line. Body: Allows you to specify a rule based on the content within the body of the ticket.
Select Operator : This field will tell the CRM how to look at the variables. ■ Begins With: Tells the CRM to look at the beginning of the field you select. For example, if you selected "subjectline" for Field you can select the "Begins With" operation to have the CRM only look at the characters at the beginning of the subject line of the email. ■ Ends With: Tells the CRM to look at the end of the field you select, like "Begins with" but it will look at the last set of characters instead of the beginning. ■ Contains: Tells the CRM to look at the field you select that contains any of the variables you specified. ■ Equals: Tells the CRM to look at the whole field that contains the EXACT variables you will specify. ❍ Fill out Value: This is what to search for in the email in order to make a match. For example, if you wanted to create a rule based on the email address, you would input the email address into this field (make sure the Field you select is set to "From Email") ❍ Select Action: tells the Volusion software what to do with the ticket. ■ MovetoDept: Tells the CRM to automatically move the ticket into a specified department. ■ Delete: Tells the CRM to automatically delete the ticket. ■ Close: Tells the CRM to automatically close the ticket. ❍ If Action is set to MovetoDept, then specify the department here. When you are finished, select Add New and you have created your rule. ❍
●
Connecting via FTP Connecting to your website via FTP is rarely necessary since your administration area allows you to do almost everything. Some things that require FTP are: ● ● ●
Uploading photos in bulk. Customizing the graphics / replacing existing images on your site. Customizing some HTML code such as CSS, or some e-mail templates.
Using Internet Explorer to connect via FTP: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Open Internet Explorer. In the address bar type in your domain name but preceding it with ftp:// instead of http://. For example, ftp://www.youdomain.com When the Log On As box pops up, enter your username and password in to the corresponding fields. Then click on the Log On button.
If you are having trouble connecting and it seems that Internet Explorer is hanging, you will most likely need to adjust a setting in your browser. Go to Tools menu and choose Internet Options. In the Internet Options dialog box click the Advanced tab. Now either check or un-check the box labeled Use Passive FTP. Some firewall configurations may require this enabled, some may require it disabled.
Using SmartFTP to connect via FTP: If you are not able to get Internet Explorer to connect via FTP, you can use any other FTP client. SmartFTP is a free client available for download here: http://www.smartftp.com/ get/SFTPFull.exe?nomap
1. Open SmartFTP http://manual.volusion.com/Hosting-Email/30.htm (5 of 6)8/6/2007 6:14:15 PM
Hosting & Email - Volusion Manual
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
In the Address field insert your sites FTP address. For example, www.yourDomainName.com Enter your Username into the Login field and then enter your Password into the Password field Push the Enter key on your keyboard You can double click on any folder to progress a level deeper into you site To transfer files you can drag and drop them from your desktop to the corresponding folder.
Click here for SmartFTP Tutorials
Accessing Your Site Statistics 1. Go to http://cp.volusion.com, http://cp.webhostxp.com, or http://cp2.volusion.com. 2. Login to the control panel. Select your domain from the Choose your domain drop down list. 3. Select Stats from the Choose section drop down list, and click Go. This will log you in to the home page of the SmarterStats Professional Edition 3.1.2181 which provides a breakdown of the most commonly viewed statistics. The welcome / home page displays site statistics from the previous 7 days, if available.
Note: Currently customers that were originally using Webhost XP are unable to access the Smarter Stats tool
4. Once you have Smarter Stats installed the statistics page will provide a link for you to access this tool along with any necessary login information.
Note: There is no extra charge for this feature.
About Volusion | Contact Us | Sitemap | Partner with Volusion | Policies | Ecommerce Manual | Ecommerce Resource | My Account
Š 1999-2006 Volusion, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Powered by Volusion Shopping Cart Software.
http://manual.volusion.com/Hosting-Email/30.htm (6 of 6)8/6/2007 6:14:15 PM
Search Engine Optimization - Volusion Manual
Search Engine Optimization Call us today: 1-800-646-3517
●
online store builder
●
web design
●
merchant accounts
●
ssl security
●
marketing
●
24x7 support
●
ecommerce 101 ●
Contact Us
●
Volusion Manual
●
Knowledge Base
●
Support Forums
●
Training Videos
Search edit this page
Go
sections ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
1. Quick Start Guide 2. Knowledge Base 3. Installation 4. Using the Admin Area 5. Payment Collection 6. Shipping Calculation 7. Tax Calculation 8. Categories & Subcategories
How to become SEO Friendly Here at Volusion, we want to make sure your on-line business is a success! We have many great SEO tools built into our software and want to make sure you are taking full advantage of them. Now is the perfect time to make sure your website is optimized for search engines. With the latest Volusion e-Commerce Software, you have the tools.
TIP #1: Enable the SEO Friendly feature
http://manual.volusion.com/Search-Engine-Optimization/20.htm (1 of 7)8/6/2007 6:14:16 PM
Search Engine Optimization - Volusion Manual ● ● ●
● ● ● ●
● ● ●
● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
9. Products & Inventory 10. Products Options 11. Vendors & DropShipping 12. Placing Orders 13. Processing Orders 14. Configuration Variables 15. Text/Article Management 16. Newsletters 17. Discounts & Coupons 18. Gift Certificates & Store Credit 19. Affiliate System 20. Search Engine Optimization 21. B2B/Members-Only Site 22. Customizing Your Store 23. Analytics & Reporting 24. Importing/Exporting 25. Using the WYSIWYG 26. Quickedit Toolbar 27. Installing Live Chat 28. Security 29. Updates & Upgrades 30. Hosting & Email 31. Shipping Resources
Navigate to Marketing —> SEO, in the admin area and follow the steps on that page to enable this feature. If you have any questions on how to implement this, please contact technical support at 1-866-999-2808.
Note: Demo Versions of Volusion E-Commerce Software do NOT support this feature. Please do not enable this feature until you have signed up for a solution, as this feature requires changes to your hosting control panel.
TIP #2: Fill in the Meta Tags Fill in all the following fields in your database in order to maximize your potential of being listed high in the rankings: Fill in the three MetaTags fields on this page. These MetaTags will be used on all of the pages in which you have not yet specified MetaTags. Examples can be found on the SEO Optimization page right next to the text boxes.
http://manual.volusion.com/Search-Engine-Optimization/20.htm (2 of 7)8/6/2007 6:14:16 PM
Search Engine Optimization - Volusion Manual
Products Table: 1. Product Name Short — This field should contain the product name, however a shorter version than your Product Name field. This field is displayed on the home page of your website in the 3 right hand side Super Deal, Top Sellers, New Products sections. More importantly, it is displayed in the URL of your product pages if you have the SEO Friendly feature enabled as described in TIP #1. 2. Photo_AltText — A maximum of 2 to 3 words recommended. 3. Meta Tag Title — This could be the same thing as your Product Name or main keyword or keyword phrase. 6 words or less is recommended here. 4. Meta Tag Description — Short paragraph. A maximum of 2 or 3 sentences. 5. Meta Tag Keywords — List of keywords separated by commas. There is no need for more than 15 to 20 words here.
http://manual.volusion.com/Search-Engine-Optimization/20.htm (3 of 7)8/6/2007 6:14:16 PM
Search Engine Optimization - Volusion Manual
If you do not have time to fill in all these fields, it is recommended that you just copy your Product Name or main keyword into all the Meta Tag fields.
Note: If you DO NOT fill in all three Meta Tag fields, then no keywords will show up in your URL address. Also keep in mind that on each page you should not try to optimize for more than 2 to 3 keywords or keyword phrases.
Categories Table: 1. Link Title Tag - 2 to 3 words max recommended. This is also displayed in the URL of your product pages if you have the SEO Friendly feature enabled as described in TIP #1. 2. Meta Tag Title — This could be the same thing as your Category Name. 3. Meta Tag Description — Short paragraph. 2 to 3 sentences. 4. Meta Tag Keywords — List of keywords separated by commas.
http://manual.volusion.com/Search-Engine-Optimization/20.htm (4 of 7)8/6/2007 6:14:16 PM
Search Engine Optimization - Volusion Manual
Articles Table: 1. Meta Tag Title — This could be the same thing as your Category Name. 2. Meta Tag Description — Short paragraph. 2 to 3 sentences. 3. Meta Tag Keywords — List of keywords separated by commas.
TIP #3: Link to Category & Product Indexes Make sure you have a link in your footer to 'cindex.asp and /pindex.asp, which are the two files in your store that list all of your categories and products. This makes it easy for search engines to find all of the pages in your site. If you do not already have links in your footer to these files, here's some sample code which you can paste in your footer: <a href="/cindex.asp">Category Index</a> <a href="/pindex.asp">Product Index</a> You may also contact support@volusion.com to request one of our support reps to add these links to your footer.
Note: These links are already in the footer of all stores by default, you only need to add these links if they are removed.
TIP #4: Write good content http://manual.volusion.com/Search-Engine-Optimization/20.htm (5 of 7)8/6/2007 6:14:16 PM
Search Engine Optimization - Volusion Manual
Content is king. The more relevant content you have on your site the better. For example, if you can have many paragraphs for your Product Description that is one of the best things. Same for your categories, if you can type up at least a few paragraphs for your categories, you will have MUCH better success with the search engines. They have always liked lots of text paragraphs. And of course try to include your keywords as much as possible in them.
Do I have to submit my website to the search engines? If you have not done so already, yes. Search engines will find you eventually on their own if other sites link to you, but it does not hurt to give them a hand. Here are the two major search engines to submit to: Yahoo: http://submit.search.yahoo.com/ Google: http://www.google. com/addurl.html
Note: Our Knowledge Base also has information on submitting your product list to search engines. See the following on how: Google Upload and Other Uploads
So how long does it take to see results? The major search engines are crawling the web, and re-crawling websites non-stop. Once you are listed in the search engines, even if you are not ranked very high, the search engines will automatically re-crawl your website every so often. You may get lucky and have them visit your site the day after you make all your changes, or it make take 1-3 months. All of us webmasters simply have to be patient.
How do I choose good keywords? If you are trying to optimize your website text with good keywords, it is good to try and find out what the most commonly search phrases are. The following link will provide great tips for choosing good keywords: http://websearch.about.com/od/quicktipsandtricks/ht/keyword.htm
How do I learn more about SEO? There are many great resources out there to learn about search engine optimization. Two sites where you can learn a great deal about the subject and ask questions are: http://www.seochat.com and http://www.searchenginewatch.com
Google Page Rank http://manual.volusion.com/Search-Engine-Optimization/20.htm (6 of 7)8/6/2007 6:14:16 PM
Search Engine Optimization - Volusion Manual
This has become one of the important aspects in getting high rankings in Google. Basically, the ranking system has to do with how many high quality and relevant sites link to your site. We recommend downloading the tool bar from Google, so you can see your ranking. In addition, by visiting the above mentioned sites you will be able to read more information on page ranking. Remember, things are always changing in the land of search engines, so you have to constantly educate yourself to stay ahead. Patience is also a good virtue to keep in mind, because getting high rankings can take time. Finally, be safe and err to the side of caution on any questionable strategies to get you to the top. Good Luck!
*NOTE: Because the Search Engines are constantly changing their ranking algorithms on a daily basis, it is impossible to know the best methods for search engine ranking; therefore this guide is provided for general information only, and does not constitute legal or professional advice.
About Volusion | Contact Us | Sitemap | Partner with Volusion | Policies | Ecommerce Manual | Ecommerce Resource | My Account
Š 1999-2006 Volusion, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Powered by Volusion Shopping Cart Software.
http://manual.volusion.com/Search-Engine-Optimization/20.htm (7 of 7)8/6/2007 6:14:16 PM
Affiliate System - Volusion Manual
Affiliate System Call us today: 1-800-646-3517
●
online store builder
●
web design
●
merchant accounts
●
ssl security
●
marketing
●
24x7 support
●
ecommerce 101 ●
Contact Us
●
Volusion Manual
●
Knowledge Base
●
Support Forums
●
Training Videos
Search edit this page
Go sections ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ●
1. Quick Start Guide 2. Knowledge Base 3. Installation 4. Using the Admin Area 5. Payment Collection 6. Shipping Calculation 7. Tax Calculation 8. Categories & Subcategories 9. Products & Inventory 10. Products Options 11. Vendors & Drop-
Affiliate System What is the affiliate system? The affiliate system allows you to pay people for referring traffic and sales to your website. For example, you could pay 10% commission. All you would have to do is give each affiliate an unique URL to direct traffic to, and the affiliate system will track all visitors through to the sale. Therefore, you can easily run a report to view the amount/commission each affiliate has earned so far. The affiliate can also login to their account anytime to view their statistics.
How to setup the affiliate system:
http://manual.volusion.com/Affiliate-System/19.htm (1 of 5)8/6/2007 6:14:17 PM
Affiliate System - Volusion Manual
● ● ● ●
● ● ●
● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Shipping 12. Placing Orders 13. Processing Orders 14. Configuration Variables 15. Text/Article Management 16. Newsletters 17. Discounts & Coupons 18. Gift Certificates & Store Credit 19. Affiliate System 20. Search Engine Optimization 21. B2B/Members-Only Site 22. Customizing Your Store 23. Analytics & Reporting 24. Importing/Exporting 25. Using the WYSIWYG 26. Quickedit Toolbar 27. Installing Live Chat 28. Security 29. Updates & Upgrades 30. Hosting & Email 31. Shipping Resources
Navigate to Marketing —> Affiliates and click on the Affiliate Settings tab From this page you will be able to setup the payout percentage rates on the total sales generated by the affiliate. The payout may reach 5 levels deep, based on one affiliate referring another affiliate. For example, each new affiliate is always at level 1. So, if level 1 payout percentage is set to 0.05, the affiliate will earn 5% of all sales he/ she generates. If he/she refers another affiliate, that affiliate will become level 2, and the original affiliate will earn a percentage of sales generated by this new affiliate. If this new affiliate happens to refer another affiliate, the original affiliate AGAIN may collect a percentage of this new affiliates generated sales. This may continue up to 5 levels deep. Keep in mind that each new affiliate starts at his/her own level 1, whereas he/she can refer 5 levels deep as well which is explained as follows: The Affiliate payout section of the affiliate area lists the parent ID for each affiliate. If the ID is 0 then the affiliate was the first person to sign up. If the parent ID is a different number then the person is signed up under that affiliate. For example, if Affiliate A signed up and was assigned ID # 2, his Parent ID is 0. If Affiliate B then signed up under Affiliate A, his ID would be # 3 and his Parent ID would be # 2.
You may also set the Config_AffiliateMinimumCheck configuration variable to the minimum total earnings you require before you will generate and mail a check to the affiliate. For example, your policy might be a $25.00 minimum check, because you don't want to write checks for $2.00 each month, you'd rather wait until their check is worth mailing. If you create banner ads for your affiliates to use, simply upload them to: ● ●
(your templates images folder)/banners/banner1.gif (your templates images folder)/banners/banner2.gif
http://manual.volusion.com/Affiliate-System/19.htm (2 of 5)8/6/2007 6:14:17 PM
Affiliate System - Volusion Manual ●
(your templates images folder)/banners/banner3.gif
The default directory is (your store)/templates/1/images/banners/. The actual current location of your images can be found in the Settings --> Config Variables, the path stored within the <Config_ImagesFolder> field. EXAMPLE: /templates/1/images/banners/banner1.gif Banners can be any size. There is currently support for only 3 banners, as described above. You may upload the banners to your server via FTP.
How to edit the affiliate pages text: The affiliate sign-up process consists of the following 3 pages: 1. Affiliate_info.asp 2. Affiliate_signup.asp 3. Affiliate_thankyou.asp You may edit the text on all of the above pages by going to Webmaster —> Website Text from the home page of your admin area. Please note that the Affiliate_thankyou.asp page by default tells the customer to "please allow 24 hours for your account to be activated". This is actually not true, as their account is activated immediately. However, the reason this message is worded this way by default is to protect you, the store owner, and give you time to review their new registration and cancel it if necessary. If this is not a concern, feel free to change the message to say the following: "Thank you for becoming an affiliate, please click the 'My Account' link located in the top right corner of this website to login to your account. Once you've logged in, you'll see a 'View my affiliate page' link where you can download banner ads and track your success."
How the sign-up process works: Customers may sign-up to become an affiliate at http://www.yourdomain.com/affiliate_info.asp. Once they sign-up, you will receive an e-mail notification at the address specified in the Config_EmailAddress_AffiliateNotification variable.
Note: No email is sent to the customer, only to the administrator
At this point, the customer is already in your system as an affiliate. You may then review the new affiliates account information, and if for any reason you do not want the customer to be an affiliate, you may cancel it by: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Navigate to Customers —> Customers Find the new affiliates customer record Edit the record by changing the Access Key from Partner (P) to Customer (C) You may also completely remove the affiliate account. Go to Marketing —> Affiliates from the home page of your admin area. Check the check box located at the right hand side of the record for the Customer's affiliate record and click Save Changes
http://manual.volusion.com/Affiliate-System/19.htm (3 of 5)8/6/2007 6:14:17 PM
Affiliate System - Volusion Manual
Customers who are Affiliates also have access to an additional section of web pages in their My Account manager. These additional pages allow the customer to automatically generate banner ads, as well as view their current statistics and earnings. A customer can track total click-throughs generated, as well as how many of those clicks actually convert to sales.
How to give certain affiliates different commissions:
1. Navigate to Marketing â&#x20AC;&#x201D;> Affiliates, and click on the Affiliate Payouts tab 2. You can edit existing affiliates and change their commission percentages, as well as how many days affiliates are tracked for. For example, 7 days to track, means that if a customer visits your website through an affiliate link, that customer's computer is tagged with that affiliate for 7 days. So, if the customer visits the website 3 days later and places an order, that affiliate will still get commission from the sale. If the customer returns on the 6th day and orders AGAIN, the affiliate will again get more commission. If the customer places an order again on the 8th day, the affiliate will no longer get any commission. However, if the customer does not directly visit your website thereafter, and for some reason the customer continues to visit the affiliates website and clicks on their affiliate URL every time they visit your website, then the affiliate will continue to get commission. Each time they click on the affiliate URL, the days to track is reset, for example back to another 7 days.
Note: When entering the percentages an Affiliate should earn, the values must be entered in decimal format. So if you wanted level 1 to be 5%, then you would enter the value as 0.05.
How to pay your affiliates each month: 1. Navigate to Marketing â&#x20AC;&#x201D;> Affiliates, and click on the Pay Affiliates tab. 2. When you are ready to pay all the affiliates listed on this page, click the link print all checks for the selected period. 3. Enter the text to use as the date and memo sections of the checks, then click Print Checks. If you have the correct check paper, you may automatically print out the checks; otherwise you may just view the checks on-screen and write the checks manually. 4. After printing, or manually writing all checks, click Yes, I've successfully printed all checks. This will let your database know you have paid the balance amount to all affiliates.
http://manual.volusion.com/Affiliate-System/19.htm (4 of 5)8/6/2007 6:14:17 PM
Affiliate System - Volusion Manual
About Volusion | Contact Us | Sitemap | Partner with Volusion | Policies | Ecommerce Manual | Ecommerce Resource | My Account
Š 1999-2006 Volusion, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Powered by Volusion Shopping Cart Software.
http://manual.volusion.com/Affiliate-System/19.htm (5 of 5)8/6/2007 6:14:17 PM
Newsletters - Volusion Manual
Newsletters Call us today: 1-800-646-3517
●
online store builder
●
web design
●
merchant accounts
●
ssl security
●
marketing
●
24x7 support
●
ecommerce 101 ●
Contact Us
●
Volusion Manual
●
Knowledge Base
●
Support Forums
●
Training Videos
Search edit this page
Go
sections ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ●
● ● ● ●
●
Newsletters
1. Quick Start Guide 2. Knowledge Base 3. Installation 4. Using the Admin Area 5. Payment Collection Navigate to Marketing —> Newsletters, from the home page of your admin area. 6. Shipping Calculation 7. Tax Calculation How to create a newsletter: 8. Categories & Subcategories 9. Products & Inventory 10. Products Options 11. Vendors & DropShipping 12. Placing Orders 13. Processing Orders 14. Configuration Variables 15. Text/Article Management 16. Newsletters
Send Newsletters
http://manual.volusion.com/Newsletters/16.htm (1 of 5)8/6/2007 6:14:18 PM
Newsletters - Volusion Manual ● ●
● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
17. Discounts & Coupons 18. Gift Certificates & Store Credit 19. Affiliate System 20. Search Engine Optimization 21. B2B/Members-Only Site 22. Customizing Your Store 23. Analytics & Reporting 24. Importing/Exporting 25. Using the WYSIWYG 26. Quickedit Toolbar 27. Installing Live Chat 28. Security 29. Updates & Upgrades 30. Hosting & Email 31. Shipping Resources
● ● ● ●
Click the ADD tab at the top of the page to begin creating a new newsletter. Fill in the Newsletter Name field with a title for this newsletter. This is not displayed to the customer. Choose an Email Template. There is an existing one called EmailTemplate1.asp that is a simple email template with an un-subscribe link at the bottom. Choose who you want to send the e-mail to: Group
Description
All Email subscribers
All records in Customers table with EmailSubscriber set to Y. (By default, all customers are Email Subscribers until they unsubscribe.)
Only Customers
All records in Customers table with AccessKey set to C.
Only Affiliates
All records in Customers table with AccessKey set to P.
Only Administrators
All records in Customers table with AccessKey set to A.
Note: Newsletters do not get sent out to customers that have the option "Customer_IsAnonymous" checked.
● ●
● ●
Type a Scheduled Send Date for your reference as to when you plan to send it, and to look back in the future as to when you sent it. This is only for your reference. Fill in the Send Test Email To field with an email address to send a TEST email prior to sending it out. Note: This must be an email address that is registered in your customers table. Normally, you would not want to check the box labeled Include people who unsubscribed. Type an Email Subject, which will be the subject line of the email. In the Email Body (HTML version) you may type out your newsletter and include any fonts, graphics, links, images that you want. Any HTML code can be used. Note: Do NOT include any <HTML></HTML> or <BODY></BODY> tags, just begin with your paragraphs and content. You actually should follow this rule of thumb throughout the
http://manual.volusion.com/Newsletters/16.htm (2 of 5)8/6/2007 6:14:18 PM
Newsletters - Volusion Manual
●
●
●
entire software. Fill in the Email Body (Text Only Version). This should be filled in with plain text only. No HTML. A very, very small percentage of people have their email settings to view text and no HTML, this is for them. So you will want to only use plain text here. Check the appropriate Newsletter # check box from 1 to 20 under the section titled Send to persons w/ the following interests only. By default everyone would be on Newsletter 1.
Click Add New Record at the bottom of the page to add this new newsletter. Make sure the radio button beneath the button is set to Add + View Record in edit mode, because the next step is to edit this newsletter...
Preview / View Stats / Send the Newsletter: ● ●
●
Click on a existing Newsletter to edit it. At the top of the page, you will see a green box labeled Send / View Stats. Click the button Preview / View Stats. From this page you can preview the email. Another important thing to check on this page is the top of the page Quick Stats that lists how many emails have been sent. If 0 of 250 have been sent, this means it is going to send the newsletter to 250 customers. If this number doesn't look correct, go back to the previous page and verify that you are sending the newsletter to the appropriate group of customers. Next, click the Send Test Email Now button, which sends you an email to the email address you specified. Once you review the test email and everything looks good then you can continue on to the next step which sends all emails.
Note: If you are managing your own server, then, sending newsletters is dependent on the installation of the VSMTP component and a correct configuration / installation according to the instructions provided in the Volusion Components zip file provided to licensed version store owners. There is an Email Agent program that runs on the server to send bulk email newsletters. Please refer to the installation notes provided in the Volusion components zip file.
Tracking Newsletters: To view your success of newsletter campaigns you will want to return to the Preview page and look at the Quick Stats section of the page. This will show you how many people have opened the emails, how many bounced, etc.
http://manual.volusion.com/Newsletters/16.htm (3 of 5)8/6/2007 6:14:18 PM
Newsletters - Volusion Manual
If you would like to get very accurate detailed statistics on the success of your newsletters through to the point of tying together sales ROI, you will want to do the following: ● ●
●
Click on an existing newsletter to edit it. In the top right section of the page titled ROI Tracker > Newsletter you will see a TrackingURL. Use this TrackingURL throughout your newsletter, so anytime you have a link in your newsletter, make sure to use this TrackingURL. The only important parameter of the TrackingURL is the ?Click=123 part. So, if one of your hyperlinks in your newsletter links to a product or category page that already has query string parameters, you can add the &Click=123 parameter to it. Here are a few example links: ❍ http://www.yourdomain.com/?Click=123http://www.yourdomain.com/SearchResults.asp?Cat=1&Click=123 ❍ http://www.yourdomain.com/SearchResults.asp?Cat=7&Click=123 ❍ http://www.yourdomain.com/ProductDetails.asp?ProductCode=ABCXYZ&Click=123 To track your sales success, Go to Reports -> ROI Tracking from the home page of your admin area. . You will see the newsletter listed and you can track it's success along side all of your other advertising channels.
Personalizing the Email Subject and Body: You may personalize each email using the text $(FirstName) or $(LastName) in the subject or body of the e-mail. This text, which is case sensitive, will be automatically substituted with each customer's name prior to sending each email.
Creating Custom Email Templates: ● ● ●
●
You must login via FTP to your site. In the FTP account, navigate to the following directory of your website where all of your email templates are stored: /vspfiles/admin/emails/ Copy the existing EmailTemplate1.asp file and rename it. For example, MyNewEmail.asp. Edit this new file in your favorite HTML editor, and upload it back to the website via FTP. To use this newly created newsletter, simply choose it from th drop down menu list for the field Email Template. It will automatically get listed in the drop down menu list if it exists in the vspfiles/admin/emails/ folder on your site.
Note: To include an unsubscribe link in your e-mails, simply create a link to MailingList_unsubscribe.asp. You may also create a link, usually on your navigation menu or anywhere on your site that says Join our Mailing List, which you may link to the page MailingList_subscribe.asp. All customers who create an account at your store are automatically subscribed to your mailing list unless they un-check the newsletter sign-up check box during checkout. The newsletter opt-in check box that is checked by default during checkout, is located below the billing address on the one-page-checkout.asp page.
Handling Bounced Email: ● ● ●
Navigate to Settings —> Config Variables, click on the Email variables tab Fill in the following variables: Config_BouncedEmailAddress = (This is the email address that bounced emails get sent to. Make sure to create an email account prior to inserting an address into this field.)
The above variable is required. http://manual.volusion.com/Newsletters/16.htm (4 of 5)8/6/2007 6:14:18 PM
Newsletters - Volusion Manual
Note: We suggest setting up an email address called bounced@yourdomain.com. And you can check this email account Inbox anytime.
However, if you would like your store to handle all bounced email and provide you statistics on the bounced email, fill in the following configuration variables as well: ● ● ●
Config_POP3_Bounced_Server = (This is the mail server such as mail.yourdomain.com) Config_POP3_Bounced_Username = (This is the username to login to your email account, this value is usually your full email address) Config_POP3_Bounced_Password = (This is the password to login to your email account)
If the above variables are filled in, it will allow the system to keep track of how many emails were bounced for each newsletter email campaign you send out.
Monthly Newsletter Limit Plan
Limit
Bronze Plan
250
Silver Plan
500
Gold Plan
2,500
Platinum Plan
5,000
Semi-Dedicated Standard
10,000
Semi-Dedicated Premium
15,000
Dedicated
15,000
Note: Please note that these limits are only for the newsletter and not for any order confirmation or system generated e-mails.
About Volusion | Contact Us | Sitemap | Partner with Volusion | Policies | Ecommerce Manual | Ecommerce Resource | My Account
© 1999-2006 Volusion, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Powered by Volusion Shopping Cart Software.
http://manual.volusion.com/Newsletters/16.htm (5 of 5)8/6/2007 6:14:18 PM
Discounts & Coupons - Volusion Manual
Discounts & Coupons Call us today: 1-800-646-3517
●
online store builder
●
web design
●
merchant accounts
●
ssl security
●
marketing
●
24x7 support
●
ecommerce 101 ●
Contact Us
●
Volusion Manual
●
Knowledge Base
●
Support Forums
●
Training Videos
Search edit this page
Go sections ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ●
● ● ●
Discounts & Coupons
Navigate to Marketing —> Coupons 1. Quick Start Guide 2. Knowledge Base 3. Installation Discount Type 4. Using the Admin Area Percent off a product 5. Payment Collection Percent off entire order 6. Shipping Calculation 7. Tax Calculation Dollar amount off a product 8. Categories & Dollar amount off entire order Subcategories Free Shipping off an entire order 9. Products & Inventory 10. Products Options 11. Vendors & DropShipping 12. Placing Orders 13. Processing Orders 14. Configuration Variables
http://manual.volusion.com/Discounts-Coupons/17.htm (1 of 3)8/6/2007 6:14:18 PM
/ Discounts from the home page of your admin area Description Discount is applied as a percentage discount. Discount is applied as a percentage discount on the entire order. Discount is applied as a dollar amount discount. Multiplied per quantity. Discount is applied as a dollar amount discount on the entire order. The order will not charge shipping
Discounts & Coupons - Volusion Manual ●
● ● ●
● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
15. Text/Article Management 16. Newsletters 17. Discounts & Coupons 18. Gift Certificates & Store Credit 19. Affiliate System 20. Search Engine Optimization 21. B2B/Members-Only Site 22. Customizing Your Store 23. Analytics & Reporting 24. Importing/Exporting 25. Using the WYSIWYG 26. Quickedit Toolbar 27. Installing Live Chat 28. Security 29. Updates & Upgrades 30. Hosting & Email 31. Shipping Resources
How to create Quantity Discounts:
3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
1. Set the discounts Name to something like: Quantity Discount 2. Set the MinQty to your first price break. So if your price changes when 50 or more are ordered, then 50 would go into this field Set the MaxQty to end of the current price break. Set the DiscountType to Percent Off or Dollar Amount Off a product Set the DiscountValue to how much the discount is on this price break. Click Add + View New Record Repeat steps 1-6 and change the MinQty and MaxQty for each of your price breaks
Note: The discount name should be the same for all your price breaks. If you set up a new group of price breaks, then that group will have a different name.
To apply this set of Quantity Discounts to a product, do the following: ● ●
Navigate to Marketing —> Coupons / Discounts, click on the DiscountAutoID to edit it Enter all of the product codes which should receive the discount in the ApplyToProductCode(s) field
How to create a coupon: http://manual.volusion.com/Discounts-Coupons/17.htm (2 of 3)8/6/2007 6:14:18 PM
Discounts & Coupons - Volusion Manual
1. Set the Coupon Code to anything you want 2. Tell your customers what the coupon code is. They will be able to enter the Coupon Code on the shopping cart page during checkout to trigger the discount. For Example, to create a coupon for $5 off your order 3. Set the discounts Name to $5 off your order 4. Set the DiscountType to Per Order 5. Set the DiscountValue to 5 6. Set the Coupon Code to (for example, ABC123)
How to create a coupon for free shipping: 1. Set the discount type to “Free Shipping off a ENTIRE ORDER.” 2. Set the Coupon code to anything you want. 3. Then select “Save changes.”
Note: You cannot combine two coupons and/or discounts that discount a percentage off the entire order.
About Volusion | Contact Us | Sitemap | Partner with Volusion | Policies | Ecommerce Manual | Ecommerce Resource | My Account
© 1999-2006 Volusion, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Powered by Volusion Shopping Cart Software.
http://manual.volusion.com/Discounts-Coupons/17.htm (3 of 3)8/6/2007 6:14:18 PM
Placing Orders - Volusion Manual
Placing Orders Call us today: 1-800-646-3517
●
online store builder
●
web design
●
merchant accounts
●
ssl security
●
marketing
●
24x7 support
●
ecommerce 101 ●
Contact Us
●
Volusion Manual
●
Knowledge Base
●
Support Forums
●
Training Videos
Search edit this page
Go sections ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ●
● ● ● ●
● ● ●
● ●
● ● ●
1. Quick Start Guide 2. Knowledge Base 3. Installation 4. Using the Admin Area 5. Payment Collection 6. Shipping Calculation 7. Tax Calculation 8. Categories & Subcategories 9. Products & Inventory 10. Products Options 11. Vendors & DropShipping 12. Placing Orders 13. Processing Orders 14. Configuration Variables 15. Text/Article Management 16. Newsletters 17. Discounts & Coupons 18. Gift Certificates & Store Credit 19. Affiliate System 20. Search Engine Optimization 21. B2B/Members-Only Site 22. Customizing Your Store 23. Analytics & Reporting
Placing Orders Understanding the Checkout Process Your customers will usually begin at your home page. Sometimes they will begin from a category page, or a product details page if they came from a search engine. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1. 2. 6. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 7. 8.
Home page (Default.asp) Category pages / Search Results pages (SearchResults.asp) Product Details page (ProductDetails.asp) Shopping Cart (ShoppingCart.asp) Login (Login.asp) Login with existing e-mail and password or Click "create new account" button Create New Account or Modify Existing Account Info (AccountSettings.asp) Create new e-mail address + choose new password Enter new shipping address Enter new billing address if different from shipping address Choose shipping preference Enter credit card / payment information Review Order then hit Proceed to Checkout button (one-page-checkout.asp.asp) Order Finished Confirmation / Receipt (OrderFinished.asp)
New customers would follow the above steps intuitively as they shop from your website. Returning customers will skip most of step #6 because when they login to their account they'd have all of their past information saved to allow for a quick checkout process.
http://manual.volusion.com/Placing-Orders/12.htm (1 of 3)8/6/2007 6:14:19 PM
Placing Orders - Volusion Manual ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
24. Importing/Exporting 25. Using the WYSIWYG 26. Quickedit Toolbar 27. Installing Live Chat 28. Security 29. Updates & Upgrades 30. Hosting & Email 31. Shipping Resources
Admin Area - Quick Phone Order Page As an administrator, you can place orders from the front-end of your store simply following the same checkout process as your customer's would, or you may use the Phone Order page in the admin area to take orders over the phone and enjoy some additional tools, control, and features that are useful for taking phone orders quickly.
Placing Orders from the front-end: 1. From the home page of your admin area, in the top right corner click the Logout link 2. Now, from the home page of your store's front-end, go ahead and add all of the products to your cart, then proceed to checkout 3. When asked to login or create a new account, simply create a new account with all of the customer's information. You're basically just placing the order the same way they would.
Placing Phone Orders thru' the Phone Order page: Navigate to Orders —> Phone Order page, from the home page of your admin area For a NEW customer —> Create a new account by entering an email, password, and click Create New Account Note: It is possible to have the customer place the order anonymously, which means that they do not need a Email account to place a order. Simply select "anonymous customer," before filling out the order. The downside to this process is that you will not be able to capture any of the customer's address, or email information. For financial reporting, all anonymous orders are lumped together.
For an EXISTING customer —> Enter the Customer ID and click the Login button and it will pull up the customers email and password. To add products to the Phone Order page: 1. Click on the Go Shopping link to add products to the cart. This will take you to the home page of your storefront. 2. Once products have been added to the shopping cart, close the shopping cart page in your storefront. This will
bring you back to the Phone Order page. 3. Click on the REFRESH button in the Phone Order page. This will add / list the products that was added to cart
thru your storefront, to the Phone Order Page cart 4. Enter the customers Shipping information, then click Precalculate Tax + Shipping Rates, then choose the
shipping method they prefer 5. Enter the customers Billing information and payment details, and click the Place order button
Note: At the point of taking a phone order, you are logged in as administrator to the admin area, but are placing the order thru the customers account by logging into his account thru the phone order page.
Point of Sale System Navigate to Orders —> Point of Sale, from the home page of your admin area. The Point of Sale(POS) system allows you to quickly sell your products to customers who are physically in your store. This also assumes there will be no shipping cost, since the customer will carry his items out of the store. The point of sale process is just like going to your local supermarket... 1. Use your Barcode Scanner to scan each product. If you have a product without a UPC code or you do not have
a barcode scanner, you can simply browse your online store to add the product to the cart. 2. Collect payment: (in any of the following quick ways) http://manual.volusion.com/Placing-Orders/12.htm (2 of 3)8/6/2007 6:14:19 PM
Placing Orders - Volusion Manual
Use your Credit Card Swipe to swipe the customer's credit card Enter the cash value handed to you ❍ If the customer is paying by check, you may click Proceed to checkout to change payment button to enter the MICR check info button, then click Save Changes 3. Your Receipt Printer quickly prints the receipt + displays the amount of change to give to the customer if paid cash. ❍ ❍
The following POS hardware is supported: ● ● ●
Barcode Scanner Credit Card Swipe / Magnetic Stripe Reader 3-Inch Receipt Printer
Note: An MICR check reader is not supported at this time.
To purchase hardware, you might consider the following hardware vendors: http://pos.epson.com http://www.symbol.com http://www.waspbarcode.com
Or you may want to search eBay for low cost hardware. One of the most inexpensive credit card swipes is the Magtek Credit Card Swipe. Hooking up the hardware: Both the Barcode Scanner and the Credit Card Swipe hookup to any computer using the same plug as your keyboard. The barcode scanners and credit card swipes always come with a splitter to allow for everything to plug into the same existing plug on your computer. Whenever you use either of their pieces of hardware, for example, if you scan a barcode, all that does is simulate your keyboard typing. So, for example you can open up any text editor such as Microsoft Word, or notepad, and then just scan a UPC code... wherever your cursor is within the document you'll see it type the UPC code numbers into the document. So the point is that these hardware devices simply save you time, and ensure accuracy since you don't have to type the code, you just scan it. The powerful convenience actually comes from using your e-commerce software in conjunction with this hardware, for example when using the POS System in your admin area, you'll simply have your cursor in the UPC code field, and all you have to do is scan any barcode to add the product to the cart. Quick & Easy.
About Volusion | Contact Us | Sitemap | Partner with Volusion | Policies | Ecommerce Manual | Ecommerce Resource | My Account
© 1999-2006 Volusion, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Powered by Volusion Shopping Cart Software.
http://manual.volusion.com/Placing-Orders/12.htm (3 of 3)8/6/2007 6:14:19 PM
Processing Orders - Volusion Manual
Processing Orders Call us today: 1-800-646-3517
●
online store builder
●
web design
●
merchant accounts
●
ssl security
●
marketing
●
24x7 support
●
ecommerce 101 ●
Contact Us
●
Volusion Manual
●
Knowledge Base
●
Support Forums
●
Training Videos
Search edit this page
Go
sections ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ●
●
1. Quick Start Guide 2. Knowledge Base 3. Installation 4. Using the Admin Area 5. Payment Collection 6. Shipping Calculation 7. Tax Calculation 8. Categories & Subcategories 9. Products & Inventory 10. Products Options 11. Vendors & DropShipping 12. Placing Orders
Processing Orders Each time a customer order is placed, you will receive a notification via e-mail at the address(es) you specified in the following variables: ● ● ●
Go to Settings —> Quicksetup Send Order Notifications To (1):* Send Order Notifications To (2):*
Each day that you have orders, it is recommended that you process them in the following way: 1. Go to Orders —> Orders, from the home page of the admin area 2. Click on the OrderID you wish to process 3. Follow the steps and links in the Quick Order Processing box
Recommended Steps:
http://manual.volusion.com/Processing-Orders/13.htm (1 of 9)8/6/2007 6:14:20 PM
Processing Orders - Volusion Manual ● ● ●
● ● ●
● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
13. Processing Orders 14. Configuration Variables 15. Text/Article Management 16. Newsletters 17. Discounts & Coupons 18. Gift Certificates & Store Credit 19. Affiliate System 20. Search Engine Optimization 21. B2B/Members-Only Site 22. Customizing Your Store 23. Analytics & Reporting 24. Importing/Exporting 25. Using the WYSIWYG 26. Quickedit Toolbar 27. Installing Live Chat 28. Security 1. LockOrder 29. Updates & Upgrades If you have chosen to process payments at the time of shipment, all orders are editable by the customer via the customer's My Account manager 30. Hosting & Email 31. Shipping Resources immediately after placing the order. Each time you begin to process an order, it is recommended that you click the Lock Order link in the Quick
Order Processing box, to prevent the customer from editing the order. You can also auto-lock all orders to prevent customers from editing an order once it has been placed. To do this, disable the variable Config_EnableOrderEditing. 2. Collect Payment Depending on the Authorization Mode you have set on the QuickSetup page of your store, you may be collecting payment at the time of sale, or you may be collecting payment at shipping 1. Collecting payment at sale: In the green section on the left side titled Payment Log you will see the payment details for this order. Since you are authorizing + capturing at sale, there is nothing to do now except review that the payment log record shows a successful charge for the correct amount. 2. Collecting payment at shipping: In the green section on the left side titled Payment Log you will see the payment details for this order. To collect payment you will want to have the drop down menu selected as DEBIT, verify that the amount in the text box is correct, then hit the Receive button.
3. Authorizing payment at sale and capture at shipping: In the green section on the left side titled Payment Log you will see the payment details for this order. Since you have it authorizing payment at sale you should see a payment log record displaying a successful authorization of funds. Now to collect the funds you will need to click the Capture button. So to explain further, authorizing funds at sale only, checks if funds are available. Capturing funds at shipping actually charges the customer's credit card. http://manual.volusion.com/Processing-Orders/13.htm (2 of 9)8/6/2007 6:14:20 PM
Processing Orders - Volusion Manual
3. Print Invoice / Packing Slips To print an invoice or packing slip, simply click the appropriate link on Step 3 in the Quick Order Processing box. There are four possible invoice versions to print: 1. Print Order - This prints an invoice including complete payment details, which is intended only for internal staff use, not meant to be sent to a customer 2. Print Invoice - This prints a standard invoice, hiding sensitive payment details 3. Print Gift Invoice - This only shows up if the customer selected gift options including Yes, my items are a gift check box during checkout. A gift invoice hides all pricing and payment information 4. Print Packing Slip - This prints an invoice without any pricing information 4. Ship Items / Add Tracking Numbers This step simply means that it's time to physically ship the items. Go ahead and physically pack them up and send them off to your shipping company. Your shipping company will then provide you with tracking numbers for the packages. Once you get the tracking numbers, return to the software and input the tracking numbers into the section of this page titled Shipping / Tracking Numbers. Please contact your preferred shipping company for more details on how to ship packages using their interface such as UPS.com, FedEx.com, etc. 5. Complete Order / Send Emails Now that the packages have been shipped, you can mark this order as completed, and send the customer an e-mail notifying them that their order has shipped. Just click the Complete Order / Send E-mails link to mark the order as Shipped which automatically send the customer a confirmation e-mail letting them know that their packages are on their way! The e-mail sent to the customer contains a link to login to their My Account section of your store and track their packages through your website.
Note: The Send Emails drop down list of templates is to re-send any e-mails to the customer. The Complete Order / Send E-mails link sends out the Order has shipped e-mail automatically.
Understanding Inventory on Orders: Navigate to Orders —> Orders in the home page of your admin area Scroll down to the section titled Items Purchased, which displays all the items purchased through this order You can edit any details of each item listed and then click the Save Changes button below. Usually this is not necessary, the only thing you will do regularly is check the following columns: ● ● ● ●
Quantity - This is the quantity that the customer ordered Qty On Backorder - This is the quantity that was NOT in-stock at the time the order was placed Qty On Hold - This is the quantity that was in-stock at the time the order was placed Qty Shipped - This is the quantity that has been shipped
Examples of Inventory on Orders: Let's say a customer orders 10 of an item, and you have all 10 in-stock, here is what will show in the above mentioned fields: ● ● ● ●
Quantity = 10 Qty On Backorder = 0 Qty On Hold = 10 Qty Shipped = 0
http://manual.volusion.com/Processing-Orders/13.htm (3 of 9)8/6/2007 6:14:20 PM
Processing Orders - Volusion Manual
Then, to ship this product, you would just enter 10 in the Qty Shipped field. Let's say a customer orders 10 of an item, and you have only 7 in-stock, here is what will show in the above mentioned fields: ● ● ● ●
Quantity = 10 Qty On Backorder = 3 Qty On Hold = 7 Qty Shipped = 0
Then, to ship this product, you will have to wait until you get the extra 3 in stock. Once the products are received and are ready to ship, you will need to change the Qty On Backorder to 0, and the Qty On Hold to 10 before you are able to completely ship this order. To make these changes mentioned, you will need to add the stock received to the Stock Status field of the product. To do this, click on the View link which is located to the left of the product code in the Items purchased section. This will take you to the product's edit page. Add the no. of quantity received to the Stock Status field and click Save Changes. This will update the stock in order details page and you are now able to ship the products to the customer.
How would i partially ship a product in an order? For example, a customer purchases 5 units of a product, and the current stock status for this product was 2, and you would like to ship 2 nos of the product to the customer. Therefore, at the time this order was received, the On hold field in the order detail page will be automatically set to 2 and the Back Order field will be set to 3. To partially ship this product: ● ●
Type the quantity on hold (2 nos) in the text box located between the On Hold and Shipped fields. This is the quantity to be shipped. Type the quantity to be shipped (2 nos) in the Qty on PackSlip box located to the far right end of the product code.
Note: The number in the Qty on PackSlip should match the quantity On hold.
Adding Tracking Numbers to an Order: To add tracking numbers to an order, go to Orders and then click on the Order ID that you want to add the tracking numbers to. Below the payment information you will see the following section:
The only required fields to add tracking numbers is the Tracking Number and Shipping Method fields. Once you have filled in the fields, click the Add button on the right. http://manual.volusion.com/Processing-Orders/13.htm (4 of 9)8/6/2007 6:14:20 PM
Processing Orders - Volusion Manual
Note: You must click the Add button to on the right side of the Tracking Numbers section to add the tracking number. Clicking the Save Changes button at the bottom will NOT add the tracking number.
Adjusting Order Totals / Adding Discounts: ● ● ● ●
Navigate to Orders —> Orders in the home page of an admin area Scroll down to the Discounts section of the page (the light-green area) To add a new price adjustment, change the discount name from Special Discount to whatever you like You can enter either a negative or positive Discount Value. Note: You can add a discount value to either add or subtract from the total order value.
Changing Order Information / Adding Notes: To change a customer's Billing Address, Shipping Address, Payment Method, or Shipping Method, simply click the appropriate pencil icon next to each. You can also add both public and private order notes anytime. Simply use the yellow section on the right side of the page titled Order Comments. The Public notes are viewable to the customer and appear on their invoice, and can be seen when they check the status of their order online. Public notes can also be filled in by the customer when they place their order if you have the config variable Config_EnableOrderComments enabled. Once the order has been placed they can no longer edit the public notes. Private notes are only viewable to administrators.
http://manual.volusion.com/Processing-Orders/13.htm (5 of 9)8/6/2007 6:14:20 PM
Processing Orders - Volusion Manual
Adding / Removing Products from an Order: To add additional products or remove products from an order, go to the Items Purchased section of the order details. To remove a product, simply click on the quantity they ordered and change the amount to 0, then click Save Changes.
Once the quantity has been changed to 0, you can remove the product from the order itself by clicking the check box at the bottom that says "Remove Items that have Qty set to 0" and then click Save Changes.
To add additional items, look below the last product in the order and there will be a blank section with the word "ADD" to the left. This is where you can add additional products. Simply enter in the Product Code and the Quantity the customer needs and then click Save Changes. http://manual.volusion.com/Processing-Orders/13.htm (6 of 9)8/6/2007 6:14:20 PM
Processing Orders - Volusion Manual
Note: You can remove as many products as you want from an order at a time, however, only one additional product can be added to the order at a time.
How to manually drop-ship an order: Note: An item on an order can only be drop-shipped if it is out-of-stock.
●
● ● ● ●
For example, if an order for 10 nos was placed for an item, and this item was out-of-stock, the Qty On Backorder for this item will be automatically set to 10, and the Qty On Hold will be 0. Next, verify the Drop Shipped (abbreviated as Drop Shpd) column has a check box in the box. Now, click the Drop Ship button toward the bottom left corner of this page. If the drop-ship was successful, you will see the Qty On Backorder change from 10 down to 0. You will also see the Drop Shipped column now show 10, and the Qty Shipped column also show 10.
Note: If you do not see this happen, you will want to verify the product was setup to support drop shipping.
● ● ●
To verify a product was setup for Drop Shipping: Click on the link titled View to the left of the Product code in the Items Purchased section of this page. This will take you to the edit product management page. Scroll down to the very bottom to the Vendor Rules. Make sure the Vendor Rules are filled in accordingly.
For more details on setting up Vendor Rules, click the following link: Vendors & Drop-Shipping —> Vendor Management
Recurring Payments Navigate to Orders -> Recurring Billing from the home page of the admin area. ●
By default, you will be taken to the Recurring: DUE tab. This tab page displays all payments that are currently due to be charged. Everyday, or every few days you can
http://manual.volusion.com/Processing-Orders/13.htm (7 of 9)8/6/2007 6:14:20 PM
Processing Orders - Volusion Manual
●
●
visit this page, review the list of payments that are due, and then just click the Process all payments now button to collect all the payments. This will clear the DUE list for today. If any payments are declined, they will then show up in the Recurring: Declined tab. The customer is also sent an automatic e-mail notifying them that their card was declined and are provided with a link for them to update their payment information / credit card details. All recurring payment records that were declined have the Delay Charge Until field set to a date 3 days in the future. This means that although the payment is still DUE, it is delayed for another 3 days. Therefore, 3 days later the system will move this record back to the DUE tab so that an attempt to charge the credit card again maybe made. During these 3 days the customer may have either updated their credit card details or deposited more funds into their credit card.
Note: If you would like to delay a payment for whatever reason, you can also fill in the Delay Charge Until field anytime. If for some reason you want to completely cancel a recurring payment record, uncheck the Active box for the recurring payment record. The Recurring: All tab displays all recurring records.
Returns / RMAs If a customer calls in requesting to return an item, follow these steps: ● ● ●
●
● ●
Navigate to Orders —> Orders in the home page of your admin area Click on the order ID to edit it Scroll down to the Items Purchased section and locate the item they wish to return On the extreme right side of the item you will see the column titled Qty to Return. Enter the quantity they are requesting to return in the Save Changes.
colored box, and click
You will now notice that a new section has appeared above the Items Purchased section called RMAs. This new section lists all RMAs associated with this order. You can now enter the Refund Type and if appropriate you may enter what OrderID the returned merchandise was exchanged for. Both of these two fields Refund Type and Exchange for OrderID are only for your notes and are not used by the system.
http://manual.volusion.com/Processing-Orders/13.htm (8 of 9)8/6/2007 6:14:20 PM
Processing Orders - Volusion Manual
● ●
●
Once you receive the merchandise from the customer, you may click on the Inventory -> Receiving from the home page of your admin area. From the first drop down menu select RMA#. Then in the text box beside it type in the RMA#, for example 17. Then, click the Prepare button. This will pull up all the details of this RMA. You may then enter in the Qty Sellable and the Qty Damaged and then click Save Changes.
Note: The Qty Sellable means the item you have received is going back into inventory and thereby automatically adds this quantity to the Stock Status of the product in your store. The Qty Damaged on the other hand does not adjust the Stock Status of the product in your store.
●
Once all items on this RMA are received, the status of the RMA will be changed automatically from WAITING to RECEIVED.
How do i return the payment OR adjust the order value for an order with the RMA? The following are the ways to refund the amount and adjust the order value: ● ● ●
If the payment was collected, this amount has to be credited back to the customer or given a store credit If the payment was not collected, then you would deduct the value for the returned items from the Total Order value and collect the payment. You can adjust the Total Order Value by editing the Qty field in the Items Purchased section, for the individual product.
About Volusion | Contact Us | Sitemap | Partner with Volusion | Policies | Ecommerce Manual | Ecommerce Resource | My Account
© 1999-2006 Volusion, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Powered by Volusion Shopping Cart Software.
http://manual.volusion.com/Processing-Orders/13.htm (9 of 9)8/6/2007 6:14:20 PM
Analytics & Reporting - Volusion Manual
Analytics & Reporting Call us today: 1-800-646-3517
●
online store builder
●
web design
●
merchant accounts
●
ssl security
●
marketing
●
24x7 support
●
ecommerce 101 ●
Contact Us
●
Volusion Manual
●
Knowledge Base
●
Support Forums
●
Training Videos
Search edit this page
Go sections ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ●
● ● ● ●
● ● ●
● ●
● ● ●
1. Quick Start Guide 2. Knowledge Base 3. Installation 4. Using the Admin Area 5. Payment Collection 6. Shipping Calculation 7. Tax Calculation 8. Categories & Subcategories 9. Products & Inventory 10. Products Options 11. Vendors & DropShipping 12. Placing Orders 13. Processing Orders 14. Configuration Variables 15. Text/Article Management 16. Newsletters 17. Discounts & Coupons 18. Gift Certificates & Store Credit 19. Affiliate System 20. Search Engine Optimization 21. B2B/Members-Only Site 22. Customizing Your Store 23. Analytics & Reporting
Analytics & Reporting Store Statistics Navigate to Reports -> Financials, from the home page of your admin area. This page allows you to run a wide variety of real-time reports, all with the convenience of being able to drill down all the way to individual orders or products. For example, if you would like to view Orders by Year, month and date: ● ● ● ●
Click on the year 2006 to view a new report for 2006 Then, click on January to view all orders for month of January 2006 Click on the 18th to view all orders for January 18th, 2006 And finally, you can click to view each individual order for Monday, January 18th 2006.
The power of drill down allows you to validate & trust that your numbers are accurate for the report you are running. All information is real-time, showing 100% live data. For example, the instant you receive a new order, it will be part of the financial reports, if you include that time period.
How to generate a report: 1. Choose a report 2. Choose a time period (optional)
http://manual.volusion.com/Analytics-Reporting/23.htm (1 of 4)8/6/2007 6:14:21 PM
Analytics & Reporting - Volusion Manual ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
24. Importing/Exporting 25. Using the WYSIWYG 26. Quickedit Toolbar 27. Installing Live Chat 28. Security 29. Updates & Upgrades 30. Hosting & Email 31. Shipping Resources
3. Choose what to group by (usually you will only want to group by one thing at a time)
Chart Format: You may choose to view your data in either a bar graph, or pie chart by clicking the appropriate icon in the top-right corner of the chart area. The charts only show the first 30 records of your data. So, if your reports returns more than 30 records, you will want to refer to the data grid below the
cart for the remaining records.
FAQ If this report page shows less orders than running a report on the VIEW ALL orders section of the admin area, the discrepancy is due to two reasons. 1. This page uses an INNER JOIN on OrderDetails, which means if your orders have no products on them it will not include that order in the financials. 2. The second reason is that if you do not choose an Order Status for the report on this Financials page, then it automatically excludes Cancelled Orders.
ROI Tracking/Ad Campaigns Navigate to Reports -> ROI Tracking, from the home page of the admin area. The term ROI stands for Return On Investment. In this case the ROI Tracker allows you to keep track of all your advertising campaigns to keep track of the campaigns that are performing best in terms of total clicks and total sales, as well as the conversion rate.
ROI Tracking & Affiliate System: The ROI Tracker uses the same exact system as the Affiliate system. This system consits of two tables, Affiliates and Customers. Therefore, on this ROI Tracking page, you will view two columns on the left labeled A and C respectively. You will also see that the ROI Tracker displays both regular Affiliates, as well as Ad campaigns on this page. This helps you to clearly view all advertising channels from one screen. Any clicks that hit your website from your personal advertising, or from your affiliates, you can view it from here.
Note: Do not test out any of the links under the ROI tracking. If you click on or go to one of those links, it will put a cookie into your browser. Then if you run a transaction on the Phone Order page or your website, you will give credit to that affiliate or campaign for the sale.
The Other Campaign: There one other record on the ROI Tracking page called Other. This record is like a catch-all for clicks. Any clicks that hit your website that are not through a TrackingURL, meaning not from a personal advertising campaign, banner ad or an Affiliate, end up in the Other campaign record. If you click on the link titled Other, you will be able to drill down further and see the actual pages your visitors came from.
Linking From Google Appropriately: Clicks will only be recognized if you link properly. Lets say, you wanted to track how many customers clicked on your Google Adwords link and at the same time, for the customer to be taken to the home page.
http://manual.volusion.com/Analytics-Reporting/23.htm (2 of 4)8/6/2007 6:14:21 PM
Analytics & Reporting - Volusion Manual
● ●
Create the tracker using the Add button. You can name it anything you want as its for your reference. For example, google adwords
Once you create the ROI tracker, you will notice that an tracking url was generated in the following format: For example, http://www.yourdomain.com/?click=XNote: Click=X (X representing a customer ID number) So, what you would do is provide Google the link http://www.yourdomain.com/?click=X so that 1. the customer is taken to the homepage 2. the click is tracked into the right campaign
Note: The URL's used for the ROI tracking links only work with the Non-SEO URLs. In other words if you enable SEO friendly you must continue to use the asp pages for the ROI tracking. See the direct examples at the bottom of the ROI tracking for the correct format. These URLs will work regardless of whether SEO is enabled or not.
Installing Third-Party Tracking Scripts Please see the following related section in the manual: Installing Third-Party Javascripts
Custom Reporting Capabilities Custom reports can be generated in the following three ways: Report Generator: ● ● ● ●
Navigate to Reports -> Reporting, from the home page of your admin area. Choose "Custom," in the drop down menu next to "Choose your Report." Create your own custom SQL Query in the large text box. Select "Generate Report"
Note: Using this feature requires a strong knowledge of SQL programming. You could run any report you wish through this page which will allow you to pull any available information from the Volusion software.
Custom Saved Exports: ● ● ●
● ● ●
●
Navigate to Inventory -> Import / Export, from the home page of your admin area. Click Data Export Choose the Table you wish to export. Now choose the columns to export, and be sure to select a filetype to Export To such as CSV. Scroll down to the Export Later section of the page. Fill in the field under Save to QueryBank as with a name for your custom export. For example, My Custom Report 1 Click the Save to QueryBank button. You will be taken to the Saved Exports tab at the top of the page, where you will see your saved export queries, which you can access anytime. Now if you would like to really write a CUSTOM SQL QUERY / CUSTOM SQL REPORT you can click on the pencil icon to edit this query. By editing the query you can generate virtually any report you can imagine.
Note: Custom reporting requires a strong knowledge of SQL programming. So, once you have this saved query in your Saved Exports tab you can run it anytime by selecting the query, choosing the export to (i.e. CSV) and clicking the Export my data button on this Saved Exports page. Search, then Save to QueryBank: Let us take the Products table as an example. ●
Navigate to Inventory -> Products, from the home page of the admin area
http://manual.volusion.com/Analytics-Reporting/23.htm (3 of 4)8/6/2007 6:14:21 PM
Analytics & Reporting - Volusion Manual
● ● ● ●
●
Click on the Search tab at the top of the page Type in the word sony in the Manufacturer field Scroll down to the bottom of the page and click the Search button This will pull up all products with a manufacturer of sony for example. So the point is that you just created a search on whatever you want, now you want to export this data. So to export the results of your search, do the following: Scroll to the right side of the page, above the results you will see Export to QueryBank as with a field to type in a name for your new saved export. Type in My Custom Product Export 1 for example.
Now to access your saved export query anytime, you can go to: Navigate to Inventory -> Import / Export, from the home page of your admin area Click the Saved Exports tab at the top of the page Remember that it is saving the query, not the results. Therefore let us say you add another 25 products made by SONY. Well, if you go to the Saved Exports page and do that one-click export to CSV for example, it is going to pull up the CURRENT list of sony products in your database. That's the whole power of saved exports!
Note: Sometimes you may have to re-create your saved exports. For example, after upgrading your store to a newer version, if any field names in the databases have changed, it may cause your saved export to error out. Therefore you would have to re-create your saved export.
Accessing Your Site Statistics 1. Go to cp.volusion.com 2. Use your login username and password to the control panel. Choose the domain from the drop down list, if you are hosting more than one domain with us. 3. In the Choose section drop down list, select Stats. The Home Page is the first thing you will see when logging into your site's statistics. SmarterTools has organized some of the most useful metrics into the home page for quick reference. Data displayed is for the last 7 days. ● ● ● ●
● ●
Views and Visits - The number of page views that have happened on a daily basis along with the total number of visits Bandwidth Usage (KB) - The total amount of bandwidth used per day Top Pages - The top 10 pages that have been hit on your site in the last 7 days Top Referrers - The top 10 sites that referred people to your site. It is not unusual to see your own domain near the top of the list Search Engines - The top 5 search engines that referred people to your site Top Search Phrases - The top 10 search phrases that referred people to your site
About Volusion | Contact Us | Sitemap | Partner with Volusion | Policies | Ecommerce Manual | Ecommerce Resource | My Account
© 1999-2006 Volusion, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Powered by Volusion Shopping Cart Software.
http://manual.volusion.com/Analytics-Reporting/23.htm (4 of 4)8/6/2007 6:14:21 PM
Quickedit Toolbar - Volusion Manual
Quickedit Toolbar Call us today: 1-800-646-3517
●
online store builder
●
web design
●
merchant accounts
●
ssl security
●
marketing
●
24x7 support
●
ecommerce 101 ●
Contact Us
●
Volusion Manual
●
Knowledge Base
●
Support Forums
●
Training Videos
Search edit this page
Go
sections ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ●
● ● ● ●
● ●
1. Quick Start Guide 2. Knowledge Base 3. Installation 4. Using the Admin Area 5. Payment Collection 6. Shipping Calculation 7. Tax Calculation 8. Categories & Subcategories 9. Products & Inventory 10. Products Options 11. Vendors & DropShipping 12. Placing Orders 13. Processing Orders 14. Configuration Variables 15. Text/Article Management 16. Newsletters 17. Discounts & Coupons
Using the QuickEdit Toolbar The QuickEdit Toolbar is a feature available for use only in the storefront and not the admin area. To use this toolbar, hover over the QuickEdit Toolbar icon on the top right corner of the home page in your storefront area. This will open a page which displays all relevant configuration variables and sections of the admin area that are related to the page you are viewing. The contents displayed within the toolbar changes every time you click to a new page within your website. The toolbar helps you find relevant sections of the admin area and quickly edit your website. There are three QuickEdit Toolbar screens and they appear at the following locations on your store front: 1. Home Page 2. All Category Pages 3. All Product Pages Home Page QuickEdit Toolbar:
http://manual.volusion.com/Quickedit-Toolbar/26.htm (1 of 3)8/6/2007 6:14:22 PM
Quickedit Toolbar - Volusion Manual ●
● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
18. Gift Certificates & Store Credit 19. Affiliate System 20. Search Engine Optimization 21. B2B/Members-Only Site 22. Customizing Your Store 23. Analytics & Reporting 24. Importing/Exporting 25. Using the WYSIWYG 26. Quickedit Toolbar 27. Installing Live Chat 28. Security 29. Updates & Upgrades 30. Hosting & Email 31. Shipping Resources
Category QuickEdit Toolbar:
Product QuickEdit Toolbar:
http://manual.volusion.com/Quickedit-Toolbar/26.htm (2 of 3)8/6/2007 6:14:22 PM
Quickedit Toolbar - Volusion Manual
About Volusion | Contact Us | Sitemap | Partner with Volusion | Policies | Ecommerce Manual | Ecommerce Resource | My Account
Š 1999-2006 Volusion, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Powered by Volusion Shopping Cart Software.
http://manual.volusion.com/Quickedit-Toolbar/26.htm (3 of 3)8/6/2007 6:14:22 PM
Vendors & Drop- Shipping - Volusion Manual
Vendors & Drop- Shipping Call us today: 1-800-646-3517
●
online store builder
●
web design
●
merchant accounts
●
ssl security
●
marketing
●
24x7 support
●
ecommerce 101 ●
Contact Us
●
Volusion Manual
●
Knowledge Base
●
Support Forums
●
Training Videos
Search edit this page
Go
sections ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
1. Quick Start Guide 2. Knowledge Base 3. Installation 4. Using the Admin Area 5. Payment Collection 6. Shipping Calculation 7. Tax Calculation 8. Categories & Subcategories
Vendors & Drop-Shipping Vendor Management Adding Vendors: Navigate to Inventory —> Vendors, and click the ADD tab to begin adding Vendors
http://manual.volusion.com/Vendors-Drop-Shipping/11.htm (1 of 7)8/6/2007 6:14:23 PM
Vendors & Drop- Shipping - Volusion Manual ● ● ●
● ● ● ●
● ● ●
● ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
9. Products & Inventory 10. Products Options 11. Vendors & DropShipping 12. Placing Orders 13. Processing Orders 14. Configuration Variables 15. Text/Article Management 16. Newsletters 17. Discounts & Coupons 18. Gift Certificates & Store Credit 19. Affiliate System 20. Search Engine Optimization 21. B2B/Members-Only Site 22. Customizing Your Store 23. Analytics & Reporting 24. Importing/Exporting 25. Using the WYSIWYG 26. Quickedit Toolbar 27. Installing Live Chat 28. Security 29. Updates & Upgrades 30. Hosting & Email 31. Shipping Resources
Each of your vendors should be listed in this Vendors table, which provides the complete details of the vendors, including all the necessary information to generate Purchase Orders when needed. Most of the information that is filled out in this table is information which will be displayed on the Purchase Order's that you generate.
Note: The Vendor_PO_Template should be set to po.asp. It is possible to create custom templates for each vendor, but by default this one will work.
Setting up Vendor Rules: The Vendor Rules table is what ties a product(s) to various vendor(s). It is flexible enough to even support multiple vendors supplying a single product.
The Vendor Rules section is located at the bottom of the EDIT product detail page. This needs to be filled in to specify which vendor(s) are associated with this product. 1. In the VendorID field, enter the VendorID for the vendor 2. In the VendorPartNo field, enter the Part Number for this product as required by your Vendor. Often this is the same as your ProductCode 3. In the MinQty field, enter 1, and leave the MaxQty field blank 4. In the Price field, enter the price you pay your vendor for this product 5. Click Save Changes to Vendor Rules
Note: You may setup multiple Vendor Rules based on Quantity using the MinQty and MaxQty fields. For example, you may be charged $50.00 if you were to purchase just 1 no. of the product, but if you purchase 5-10 nos. of the product you may be charged $45.00 each, and 10 or more you may be charged $40.00 each. Furthermore, you may have multiple vendors who can supply this product, and you may be able to get it cheaper from one vendor if you buy 1, but you might get it cheaper from http://manual.volusion.com/Vendors-Drop-Shipping/11.htm (2 of 7)8/6/2007 6:14:23 PM
Vendors & Drop- Shipping - Volusion Manual
another vendor if you buy 5 or more.
Purchase Orders Generating Purchase Orders: Purchase Orders can be generated in the following ways: 1. Through Automatic Drop-Shipping (as described below) 2. Through the Low Inventory tab at the top of the View All Products page 3. Manually creating POs from the View All Purchase Orders page and then clicking the ADD tab
How to use the Low Inventory and Queued for PO tabs: These tabs are located on the top-right of the View All Products page. The purpose of these tabs is for your purchasing department to be able to quickly order inventory for products that are running low on stock. The following fields of the Products table must be filled in: â&#x2014;?
â&#x2014;?
Stock Low Qty Alarm - If the StockStatus of this product goes below this Stock Low Qty Alarm number, this product will show up on the Low Inventory tab Stock Re-Order Qty - This number specifies the product quantity to order, each time it runs low
If the above fields are filled in, along with the Vendor Rules as always, this product will show up on the Low Inventory tab when it's running low on stock. In the Low Inventory tab page, display the AddToPO_Now field(Click on Customize this view, and check the AddToPO_Now field). If this box is checked, the product will be moved to the Queued for PO tab. In the Queued for PO tab page, cross-reference the data including the vendors and costs for each product, and choose a vendor you'd like to use this time, or just leave everything according to the Vendor Rules, which will choose the cheapest vendor for the Quantity you're ordering.
Note: If you'd like to choose a different vendor to order from this time, click to edit the product, then scroll down to the Vendor Rules section of the edit product page, and fill in the Deactivate Until field of the Vendor Rules record that you do not want to use this time. The Deactivate Until field holds a date value, such as 10/22/04 and will deactivate the Vendor until the date specified. When you're ready to build the purchase order(s), just click the Generate All Purchase Orders button on this page. If you are ready to send them as well, check the box and send them now.
http://manual.volusion.com/Vendors-Drop-Shipping/11.htm (3 of 7)8/6/2007 6:14:23 PM
Vendors & Drop- Shipping - Volusion Manual
How to create a Purchase Order manually: Note: Before creating a PO manually, make sure to Add the Vendor and fill in the Vendor Rules for the product. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Navigate to Inventory -> Purchase Orders in the home page of the admin area, and click the ADD tab Choose the Vendor from the drop down list, Click Continue On the Build New Purchase Order page, verify the PO information and Click Build New PO Enter the product code and Qty, Click ADD. Note: To Edit products that have been added to the PO, click on Edit Items currently associated with this PO 5. Once all products have been added to the PO, click on Yes, send the PO now
Sending Purchase Orders: When sending purchase orders to Vendors, the following are the available options: SendVia
Description
E-mails the PO to the specified vendor's e-mail address
fax
Faxes the PO to the specified vendor's fax number
none
Allows you to print the PO to send it manually.
Note: You must sign-up for an account with ClickFax to use this feature. This will allow us to send the PO e-mail to the ClickFax system, which will instantly send the PO to the vendor's fax machine. The e-mail address that you register with ClickFax must match the one specified in the config variable Config_EmailAddress_Billing (Billing E-mail Address). Click here to sign up for a new account: ClickFax
Receiving Purchase Orders: Once you get the inventory from your vendor, you will want to receive the PO. Navigate to Inventory â&#x20AC;&#x201D;> Receiving, from the home page of your admin area and follow these steps: 1. From the first drop down menu choose PO#, and in the field next to it type in the PO number such as 1089 and click the Prepare button 2. You should now see all of the items listed that were ordered through this PO. As you count the tangible inventory to verify that you received the complete quantity of products that you ordered, you'll want to fill in the Quantity Received boxes on this page, and click the Save Changes button http://manual.volusion.com/Vendors-Drop-Shipping/11.htm (4 of 7)8/6/2007 6:14:23 PM
Vendors & Drop- Shipping - Volusion Manual
3. Since 90% of the time your vendor's never tell you the actual shipping cost until this point, now is the time you can input the Shipping Cost in the field right above the Distribute button in the lower right corner of this screen. 4. Once you are finished, click the Distribute button at the bottom right corner to update the stock status of the products that you received.
Note: In order for the stock status to update when receiving a Purchase Order, the products must already have a stock amount in the Stock Status field even if the Stock Status is 0. The reason is if the Stock Status field is blank, the system assumes the stock is infinite and therefore it doesn't update when you receive your stock from a Purchase Order.
For example, if you enter $59.91 for the shipping cost and click the Distribute button, it will distribute $59.91 evenly throughout the items on the order based on the weight of each product. After clicking the Distribute button you can then easily adjust/edit the shipping cost for an item(s) as you see fit. The reason for the distribution of shipping charges per item is to help you run more accurate Cost/Profit reports to get the TRUE cost of your goods. For example, you might be paying $5.00 for an item and selling it for $12.00 and assuming your profit is $7.00 per sale. However, the item might be costing you $10.00 after shipping it to your warehouse because of its size & weight, therefore the Distribute data feature is able to calculate the true Cost/Profit of your inventory.
Customizing Purchase Orders: Purchase Order templates can be customized for each vendor: 1. Navigate to Inventory â&#x20AC;&#x201D;> Vendors, from the home page of your admin area 2. Click the VendorID of the individual vendor you wish to customize 3. The Vendor_PO_Template field is by default set to po.asp. This file is located in the following directory of your website /wwwroot/ admin/emails/po.asp. You can edit this file by logging in via FTP, or you can use the LiveEdit File Editor feature by simply clicking the pencil icon on this page, which opens the file to allow editing the existing po.asp template However, you could create a NEW template for a purchase order and upload it via FTP. The following are the instructions to add a NEW template: 1. Login via FTP, and navigate to the following directory /wwwroot/admin/emails/ 2. Duplicate the po.asp file and rename it. For example: VendorABC.asp 3. Open the new file VendorABC.asp to edit it
Note: It's mostly HTML along with some variables that are in the form of $(variable) http://manual.volusion.com/Vendors-Drop-Shipping/11.htm (5 of 7)8/6/2007 6:14:23 PM
Vendors & Drop- Shipping - Volusion Manual
Automatic Drop-Shipping How to setup a product for automatic drop-shipping: 1. Navigate to Inventory —> Products, click to edit one of your existing products 2. You must fill in the Vendor Rules for each of your products as specified above 3. Next verify that the following fields of this product are set as follows:
● ● ● ●
The Stock Status field must be set to 0. As this product is ordered, the stock status will decrease to -1, -2, etc. which is fine The AutoDropShip check box must be checked The DoNotAllowBackOrders check box must be unchecked The Config_EnableAllowBackOrders checkbox [within Settings —> Config Variables —> Checkout Variables] must be checked
In this Drop-Shipping scenario, POs are sent as soon as payment is received for the order. In most scenarios you'll want to only authorize payment first, which sends the PO, and then when your vendor says ok, it's shipped, then you can capture the payment. If you authorize + capture at the same time, that's fine too. POs are sent automatically only the first time payment is authorized/captured. POs will never be sent twice.
About Volusion | Contact Us | Sitemap | Partner with Volusion | Policies | Ecommerce Manual | Ecommerce Resource | My Account
© 1999-2006 Volusion, Inc. All Rights Reserved. http://manual.volusion.com/Vendors-Drop-Shipping/11.htm (6 of 7)8/6/2007 6:14:23 PM
Vendors & Drop- Shipping - Volusion Manual
Powered by Volusion Shopping Cart Software.
http://manual.volusion.com/Vendors-Drop-Shipping/11.htm (7 of 7)8/6/2007 6:14:23 PM
Installing Live Chat - Volusion Manual
Installing Live Chat Call us today: 1-800-646-3517
●
online store builder
●
web design
●
merchant accounts
●
ssl security
●
marketing
●
24x7 support
●
ecommerce 101 ●
Contact Us
●
Volusion Manual
●
Knowledge Base
●
Support Forums
●
Training Videos
Search edit this page
Go sections ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ●
● ● ● ●
● ● ●
● ●
● ● ●
1. Quick Start Guide 2. Knowledge Base 3. Installation 4. Using the Admin Area 5. Payment Collection 6. Shipping Calculation 7. Tax Calculation 8. Categories & Subcategories 9. Products & Inventory 10. Products Options 11. Vendors & DropShipping 12. Placing Orders 13. Processing Orders 14. Configuration Variables 15. Text/Article Management 16. Newsletters 17. Discounts & Coupons 18. Gift Certificates & Store Credit 19. Affiliate System 20. Search Engine Optimization 21. B2B/Members-Only Site 22. Customizing Your Store 23. Analytics & Reporting
Installing Live Chat Installing Third-Party Javascripts There are hundreds of services that you can use in collaboration with your store. The following are some third-party services you might signup for: ● ● ● ● ●
Hit Counter / Web Statistics ROI Tracker / Web Analytics Live Chat Trust Logo / Partner Seals Affiliate Systems
Whatever service it might be, the company will always provide you with one or two chunks of javascript code. One chunk might be for the tracking functionality which can be placed anywhere on the footer.asp page. And the other chunk is usually a graphical icon, such as a Click to Chat button, or a logo graphic for example.
Tips for installing live chat code: Generally, the chat software always has a button which must be placed in the code where you would want to display the button. You can place ALL of the code provided by the third-party into the same spot, regardless if they instruct you to place the code in 2 different spots. Tips for installing stats code: Normally, you will want to place all of the stats code at the very end of the footer, right
http://manual.volusion.com/Installing-Live-Chat/27.htm (1 of 3)8/6/2007 6:14:24 PM
Installing Live Chat - Volusion Manual ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
24. Importing/Exporting 25. Using the WYSIWYG 26. Quickedit Toolbar 27. Installing Live Chat 28. Security 29. Updates & Upgrades 30. Hosting & Email 31. Shipping Resources
before the </body> tag.
How to install ROI Tracking software: Normally, Return On Investment (ROI) tracking software requires that you place special code on the final page of the checkout process. Here are some variables you can use if your ROI tracking
software requires some variables: ● ● ● ● ● ●
$(CustomerID) $(OrderNo) $(SubTotal) $(ShippingCost) $(SalesTax) $(GrandTotal)
You may use the above variables in any article on OrderFinished.asp. Therefore, if you go in your admin area to Webmaster -> Website Text and then look in the WEBPAGE column, you can use the above variables in any article that is on the webpage OrderFinished.asp.
Note: These variables may ONLY be used in an article. They are not ASP variables.
So, if you have a javascript provided by your Statistics / Conversion Tracking provider, paste the javascript into the body of the following article: ● ●
Webpage: OrderFinished.asp Spotkey: PreText
As mentioned above, if your javascript requires some parameters such as the Grand Total amount of the order, you may use the above mentioned variables. For example, before the article is displayed on the page, it simply replaces the text $(GrandTotal) in your article with the $ amount 74.95.
Troubleshooting Secure SSL problems related to third-party scripts: It is very common to install a third-party script on your website, and then have a security alert box popup every time someone visits your website in secure SSL mode. This issue is due to the fact the most third-parties will provide you with script designed for the non-secure environment. But because your website is a store, that must be secure, you must obtain the SECURE version of the javascript. Please contact the company who provided the script and request a version of the script that works in a secure SSL environment. Once you are obtained and installed the secure version of your script, you may test it by doing the following: 1. Remove the script from your website completely. 2. Visit your website securely by visiting https://www.<yourdomainname>.com instead of http://www.<yourdomainname>. com. In other words, add the 's' to the URL and see if your website pulls up fine without any alert popup boxes. 3. If everything is fine, THEN install your new script. 4. Now visit your website again securely and check to see that there are still no alert popup boxes. If not, everything is great! If there are alert boxes, please contact your script provider to ensure they provide you with an appropriate SSL version of the script. For more details troubleshooting SSL alert boxes, please see the following related section of this manual: Security > Troubleshooting SSL Alert Boxes
http://manual.volusion.com/Installing-Live-Chat/27.htm (2 of 3)8/6/2007 6:14:24 PM
Installing Live Chat - Volusion Manual
Encryption Password Navigate to Settings -> PCI Policies, from the home page of your admin area, to set the Encryption Password. You may set your Encryption Password only when you first setup your store, before you open for business. This password is used by the system's encryption algorithms. This password will never be needed by a person, it is only used by the system as an added security measure. The password is important to your system, however as mentioned above, you cannot change it after you have received lots of orders. If you have not changed the password, it is using the default encryption password, which is fine.
About Volusion | Contact Us | Sitemap | Partner with Volusion | Policies | Ecommerce Manual | Ecommerce Resource | My Account
Š 1999-2006 Volusion, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Powered by Volusion Shopping Cart Software.
http://manual.volusion.com/Installing-Live-Chat/27.htm (3 of 3)8/6/2007 6:14:24 PM
Security - Volusion Manual
Security Call us today: 1-800-646-3517
●
online store builder
●
web design
●
merchant accounts
●
ssl security
●
marketing
●
24x7 support
●
ecommerce 101 ●
Contact Us
●
Volusion Manual
●
Knowledge Base
●
Support Forums
●
Training Videos
Search edit this page
Go sections ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ● ●
● ● ● ●
● ● ●
● ●
● ● ● ● ●
1. Quick Start Guide 2. Knowledge Base 3. Installation 4. Using the Admin Area 5. Payment Collection 6. Shipping Calculation 7. Tax Calculation 8. Categories & Subcategories 9. Products & Inventory 10. Products Options 11. Vendors & DropShipping 12. Placing Orders 13. Processing Orders 14. Configuration Variables 15. Text/Article Management 16. Newsletters 17. Discounts & Coupons 18. Gift Certificates & Store Credit 19. Affiliate System 20. Search Engine Optimization 21. B2B/Members-Only Site 22. Customizing Your Store 23. Analytics & Reporting 24. Importing/Exporting 25. Using the WYSIWYG
Security Administrator Access Levels Navigate to Customers —> Administrators, from the home page of your admin area.
Note: The administrators are simply Customer accounts with the Access Key field set to Administrator. By default, regular customers have their Access Key set to Customer. All Customers and Administrators records are stored in the Customers table in the database.
SuperAdmin Accounts
http://manual.volusion.com/Security/28.htm (1 of 4)8/6/2007 6:14:24 PM
Security - Volusion Manual ● ● ● ● ● ●
26. Quickedit Toolbar 27. Installing Live Chat 28. Security 29. Updates & Upgrades 30. Hosting & Email 31. Shipping Resources
There is one more field in the Customers table that is related to Administrators, and that field is called IsSuperAdmin. A Super Administrator has full access to everything. Your store must always have at least one SuperAdmin account. By Default, Customer Id # 1 is set as the Super Administrator.
Employee / Limited Access Admin Accounts 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Click to edit any existing customer record. Set the field IsSuperAdmin to N or un-check the check box to disable it. Set the field AccessKey to Administrator(A). Click Save Changes and be sure the radio button below the save changes button is selected as Save + View Record. You should now see a link below the Access Key field that says Edit Cust#123 Access Rules. Click this link to edit the Access Rules for this administrator. You can use this Access Rules page to grant or deny access to any area of your store.
SSL Certificates SSL Certificates are required for any e-commerce website accepting payments online. SSL provides a secure communication between the customer's computer and the web server. Each website (domain name) must have it's own SSL certificate. SSL Certificates are available in 64bit or 128bit. 128bit is more secure, however both are very strong and either will suffice. To purchase an SSL Certificate, you must contact your hosting company....
If you are hosting with Volusion, please follow these steps: 1. Purchase your SSL certificate online from http://www.volusion.com/ssl_certificate.asp. From volusion.com you have the option to purchase a Volusion brand SSL Certificate, or other popular brands including Verisign & Thawte. 2. The Volusion staff will process your order within 7 business days and install the certificate for you.
If you are hosting with another hosting provider: 1. Contact your hosting provider to have them purchase and install the SSL Certificate for you. 2. Login to your admin area, navigate to Settings —> QuickSetup page. 3. Scroll down and check the box of the field SSL Installed. Note: You can only check this box AFTER the certificate has been installed.
To verify that an SSL is installed on your website: 1. Go to the home page of your website(storefront). 2. Change the address bar in your browser to include https rather than just http. For example, if your website is http://www. <yourdomainname>.com then go to https://www.<yourdomainname>.com. If your site comes up at all, then your SSL is installed. 3. Whenever you are in secure mode you will see a LOCK icon in the right side of the address bar and in bottom right corner of your browser. You may double click the icon to view the details of the SSL certificate including the expiry date.
Enabling the SSL Security Seal: The https and lock icon are both required to verify a website is secured by SSL. However, you can also advertise the fact that your site by displaying an SSL Seal graphic on your website... 1. Navigate to Marketing —> Nav Menu Promotions, from the home page of the admin area. 2. Find the appropriate pre-installed SSL Seal from the list, click to remove the check mark from the Hidden check box field to display the seal in your store front. By removing the check mark, you are causing the navigation menu promotion to be displayed on your website, usually on the left side below your navigation menu. http://manual.volusion.com/Security/28.htm (2 of 4)8/6/2007 6:14:24 PM
Security - Volusion Manual
Troubleshooting SSL alert boxes If you have installed any third party scripts on your website, such as tracking JavaScripts, this is the most common cause of a security alert box popping up on your website when visiting your site securely. To determine the cause of the problem, try the following in order until the alert box is gone: 1. Remove any third-party JavaScripts from your website. 2. Do a view source on your website and then hit CTRL+F on your keyboard to pop-up the FIND dialog box. Search for http:// and go through each occurrence. On each occurrence you will need to evaluate if the occurrence is a possible cause of a security alert. The following are the ways to determine this: ❍ If the occurrence consists of a hyperlink such as <a href="http:// then it is OK. ❍ If the occurrence consists of an image source such as <img src="http:// then it is NOT ok. This would cause an alert box. ❍ If the occurrence consists of a background image source such as background="http:// then it is NOT ok. This would cause an alert box. 3. If the occurrence consists of a JavaScript source such as <javascript src='http:// then it is NOT ok. This would cause an alert box. If you find the occurrences above that are NOT ok, you will need to change them to https:// if that is an option depending on whether or not the server in reference supports SSL. If the server in reference happens to be the same URL of your website, you do NOT need to have an absolute path to your website, you will want to use a relative path for all images and hyperlinks. For example: ● ●
An absolute URL is: (aka absolute path) http://www.mydomain.com/mypage.asp A relative URL is: (aka relative path)/mypage.asp
Both of the above examples (absolute & relative) link to the same exact place. Therefore, you should always use the relative path when linking between pages and files within your own website. Never use the absolute path. Relative path has NO drawbacks, and is recommended for the following additional reasons: ● ●
There will never be a problem between SSL and non-secure modes. You can change your domain name anytime and never have to change your hyperlinks.
Encryption Password Navigate to Settings -> PCI Policies, from the home page of your admin area.
You may set your Encryption Password only when you first setup your store, before you open for business. This password is used by the system's encryption algorithms. This password will never be needed by a person, it is only used by the system as an added security measure. The password is important to your system, however as mentioned above, you cannot change it after you have received a considerable number of orders. If you have not changed the password, the default encryption password will be used, which is fine.
http://manual.volusion.com/Security/28.htm (3 of 4)8/6/2007 6:14:24 PM
Security - Volusion Manual
About Volusion | Contact Us | Sitemap | Partner with Volusion | Policies | Ecommerce Manual | Ecommerce Resource | My Account
Š 1999-2006 Volusion, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Powered by Volusion Shopping Cart Software.
http://manual.volusion.com/Security/28.htm (4 of 4)8/6/2007 6:14:24 PM